Find out what to expect from Janet's new podcast in this super short trailer. Listen on Apple Podcasts Or your favourite podcast app. And don't forget to download, subscribe rate and review - those reviews are SO important! 

THIS IS THE LAST EPISODE OF THIS PODCAST. MY NEW PODCAST IS CALLED THE COURAGEOUS CONTENT PODCAST. FOLLOW & DOWNLOAD ON YOUR FAVOURITE PODCAST APP.   https://courageous-content.captivate.fm/ Have you ever launched a course or product that flopped - leaving you wondering where you went wrong?  If this sounds familiar you’ll love this podcast episode with business coach Natalie Sisson.  Natalie explains how to bounce back from a failed launch and shares her experience of a launch that flopped (and the BIG lessons she learnt). You’ll learn why being true to yourself can have a huge impact on your launch and how to find the resilience to bounce back from failure. This is the final episode of The Build Your Online Audience podcast. Join the waiting list for my NEW podcast (launching in May 2021) here.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About this final Build Your Online Audience podcast episode (00:30) How Natalie inspired me at the start of my podcast journey (01:01) Find out about my new Courageous Content podcast (01:58) About Natalie and her mission to help women earn what they’re worth (03:32) What happened when Natalie’s launch went wrong (06:40) How your mindset can make a bad launch so much worse (09:20) Why your launch will bomb if you don’t stay true to your values (14:15) Why solving problems is more important than perfection (15:53) The key things you need to remember for a successful course launch (17:10) Why the size of your audience should determine your launch strategy (19:10) Why keeping your launch simple is key to success  (23:02) How to find out if people will buy your course before you launch (26:57) About Natalie's new book ’Suck it up Princess’ (33:45) Why resilience is key when you’re launching (36:20) How to join the waitlist for my new Courageous Content podcast (37:29) Resources Natalie's website and podcast Natalie’s InstagramNatalie’s book Suck It Up Princess Teachable  Be the first to hear when my new podcast goes live in May 2021.Sign up for the waitlist to hear about my new Courageous Content podcast Join my  Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray’s Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast)[Bonus] Why I'm ending the Build Your Online Audience Podcast and what's happening next (podcast) [009] How to build a memorable brand with Natalie Sisson (podcast)[418] How long does it take to create an online course (podcast) [426]  The ultimate course launch checklist (podcast) [440] The secret to a successful online course or membership launch (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

My Build Your Online Audience Podcast is ending at episode 450 and I'd love you to come along to my podcast wrap party on Friday 26 March 2021 at 4pm-6pm GMT. I've invited all my podcast guests from the past five years and I'd love to have all my listeners there too.  Listen to this quick podcast to find out how to get the link to register to join us. Plus if you've ever fancied starting your own podcast then make sure you come along because I'm going to be explaining how you can win an amazing podcast bundle. There's everything you need to get your podcast up and running. See you there! Register for my podcast party here {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   When is my podcast wrap party (0:22)  Why you need to register for my podcast wrap party (0:34) How you can win a podcast prize bundle to get your podcast live (0:58) What’s included in my podcast prize bundle (01:31) How to register for my podcast wrap party (02:06) When I’m launching my new Courageous Content podcast (02:31) Why I’d love you to join my podcast party (02:44) Resources Be the first to hear when my new podcast goes live in May 2021. Sign up for the waitlist to hear about my new Courageous Content podcast Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray’s Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Why I'm ending the Build Your Online Audience podcast and what's coming next (podcast) [376] Lessons learned from 1 millions downloads of my podcast (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Have you ever wondered what would happen to your content if you needed to take time out of your business?  Do you have content batched and scheduled ahead? Or would your content grind to a halt until you were able to get back to work?  If you’re like many business owners I know, creating a contingency plan for your content is probably on your to-do list - but something you tell yourself you’ll get to when you get a spare moment (which, when you run a business is often ‘never’). But it is important.  In this episode, I talk to business strategist Diane Mayor about how to create a contingency plan for your content (and why you need to).  You’ll learn why planning for the good times (a sudden spike in sales, for example)  is just as important as planning for a crisis. PLUS what to include in your contingency planning.  And why this topic is important - even if you’re a solopreneur.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes Why I’m ending the Build Your Online Audience Podcast (and what’s coming next) (02:15) How Diane Mayor helps business owners (03:32) About this podcast episode and why contingency planning is important (04:50) How Diane got started in contingency planning (05:40) When I realised I needed a contingency plan (07:30) Why your reaction to an event is what creates the good or bad results (10:03) How to reduce panic in a crisis by making sure you’ve got a planned response (12:49) How to work out the risks you can control in your business (and what you can’t) (13:31) Tips for contingency planning for a live event (18:48) Where to start with your contingency planning (21:02) How to create a crisis plan if you’re a solopreneur (26:26) How far ahead to batch content if you’re contingency planning (32:41) Why you should prioritise content creation for a podcast, blog or YouTube content over social media content (36:30) What you need to consider when you’re batching content (and how to make it work for you) (38:40) How to assess risk in your content planning (and why you can’t prepare for everything) (42:10) How to plan for a media crisis (if you don’t have a PR team) (47:22) Why you should keep your content organised (52:14) Resources Diane's website and podcast  Diane's Instagram Be the first to hear when my new podcast goes live in May 2021. Sign up for the waitlist to hear about my new Courageous Content podcast Join my  Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray’s Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Why I'm ending the Build Your Online Audience Podcast and what's happening next (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [439] How to create a content batching week with Jordan Gill (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

In this episode, I explain why I’m ending this podcast in two episodes time (episode 450). I share the reasons why and what’s coming up next (don’t panic - I’m not giving up podcasting all together). If you’re a regular listener to the show, THANK YOU so much for your support. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   My big news about this podcast (0:38) How my podcast audience has kept me motivated (01:48) The three reasons why I’m ending this podcast (03:02) Why I wanted to quit while I was ahead and at the top (05:50) How my business has changed and why I want to align my podcast with that change (06:33) The podcast interview that sparked a lightbulb moment (07:43) Why my Facebook Ads made me realise what my ideal clients really needed (10:09) How my Courageous Content challenge has helped business owners create better content (13:15) How the new podcast will help me align my offerings with my content(15:40) About my new podcast and the topics it will cover (19:18) Why you need to create content  you enjoy and fits your personality (23:50) Why I want to help women find the courage to create content (26:21) How the new podcast will focus more on the emotional side of content creation (28:13) Why marketing 'gurus' aren't always the best source of content inspiration (29:57) Why we could be talking about building a community rather than an audience  (31:07) The types of guests you'll hear from on my new podcast (32:41) Why I want to help people find the joy in content creation (33:02) Thanks to my fabulous team behind the podcast (33:46) About the new podcast launch and where you can find more details (34:37) Come along to my podcast party (35:20) Resources Be the first to hear when my new podcast goes live in May 2021. Sign up for the waitlist to hear about my new Courageous Content podcast Join my Courageous Content mini-courseJoin my Instagram Success Academy Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray’s Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [315] How to create a brand statement and why you need to with Nicole J Smith (podcast) [376] Lessons learned from 1 millions downloads of my podcast (podcast) [400] How to build a large audience for your blog, vlog or podcast or (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

I generated more than £185k in sales of my 2021 Social Media Diary and Planner and related products. In this podcast episode (which you can also read as a blog), I share my tips on how to generate a semi-passive income from selling a planner or journal. You’ll find out: How to choose a topic for your planner/journal How a planner/journal can help you sell higher-tickets products/services How to ensure your planner/journal is profitable How to develop complementary products you can sell alongside your journal/planner {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   1. Make sure your planner solves a problem  There are so many types of planners available - the competition can be huge. Which is why your planner needs to solve a specific problem for a specific person. For example, my Social Media Diary & Planner helps business owners who are struggling to come up with content ideas. It’s packed full of key dates and awareness days, which helps them generate content ideas. And it includes templates and checklists to help them create annual, monthly, weekly and daily content plans - which helps them stay on track. Another example might be a music practice planner. I’m an amateur pianist, and one of the problems I have is organising what I’m going to practise, when. The membership programme I belong to sells a piano practice planner. This is a great resource for keeping track of your practice. It also creates a record of what you’ve covered so you can look back at your progress. A wedding planner/journal is another good example because it helps prospective brides stay organised and creates a keepsake of the event. 2. Pick a niche for your plannerDon’t be put off if there are already planners on sale in your industry/space. It is possible to niche down within your industry For example, there are hundreds of planners on dog training. Niching down to a particular breed of dog - or aspect of training e.g. potty training, behaviour -  will not only help you stand out, it will also increase your sales. For example, Bridezilla founder, Alicia McCormack created a wedding planner for people who hate bridal magazines and wedding fairs. There are also planners for vintage weddings, 1950s themed weddings and other specific niches. There are lots of possibilities to niche down within your industry. Even if it seems like there are lots of planners already on the market. You may feel that getting super specific will reduce your sales. Actually, you’re far more likely to make sales because your product will be a better fit for your ideal customer. 3. Build an audience to sell your planner to The average conversion rate for online sales is 1-2%. Which means for every hundred people in your audience (i.e. your email list) only a handful are likely to buy. So if you’re hoping to sell hundreds/thousands of your planner - and you don’t currently have a large audience to sell to - you may need to readjust your expectations. If this is the case, you have a number of options: Launch your planner anyway - but just do a small print run for your first launch. While the printing cost will be higher, this will give you a chance to test out your product. Work on building your audience until it’s big enough to achieve your target sales. 4. Build authority on your planner topic There may be someone else out there who sells a similar planner/journal to the one you want to create.  Someone who has an established audience e.g. a YouTube channel, book and/or large social media following. So why would someone choose to buy from you? I say this not to put you off launching your planner, but to remind you that you need to build authority in your industry/space. And also to manage your expectations. It may take you time to build the authority (and audience) you need to sell your planner (at least in the numbers you would like). The best way to build authority is to publish content that answers your ideal customers’ questions  - ideally on your website.That way, when your ideal clients are searching online for answers to their questions, they’ll end up on your website. I publish regular blogs/podcasts on content planning/creation throughout the year. This helps me and my planner get ‘found’ more easily in Google. If you approach your planner business with realistic expectations, you can only build from there. This is one of the things we cover in my How To Launch Your Own Planner masterclass. We do some calculations to see what your audience size is and what you can expect to sell. Then you can decide if you want to launch now or do a small print run. It can cost more to do a small print run, but you can learn and build from there. I’ve got a podcast episode all about how much it costs to launch a planner that will help you understand how many you’ll need to sell. 5. Make your planner part of your sale funnel The great thing about creating a planner/journal is that you can create information products (e.g. online courses/digital downloads) to go alongside it. You don’t need to launch one now (in fact, it’s best to keep things simple and start with your planner/journal). But if you can see the potential to create an information product to go alongside your diary, you’ll be able to generate more revenue. Since I launched my Social Media Diary & Planner five years ago, I’ve launched a content planning membership programme to support people with using the diary throughout the year. This is £149 (compared to £39 for the diary) and around 25% of diary owners now opt to buy the planning club as well as the diary. Do also consider how your planner/journal might fit into the rest of your sales funnel. A planner/journal can often be an ‘entry level’ product which can lead to an upsell for a higher ticket offer. Ready to launch your own planner or journal? If you’re serious about launching a planner or journal for your industry, join my How To Launch A Planner Masterclass. I go into greater depth about the steps you need to take to launch a successful planner or journal. And it includes all the checklists and templates you need. Plus, what you need to do before you go to a printer. You can join the masterclass here.  Podcast shownotes About my how to launch your own planner masterclass (03:06) Why you should listen to this podcast episode (03:44) How much revenue my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner has generated (05:32) The size of audience you need to sell a planner/journal (06:34) Making sure your planner solves a specific problem (08:50) Examples of problems a planner can solve (09:52) Choosing a niche for your planner/journal (and how to research it) (12:27) Why you shouldn’t be scared of creating a planner for a niche audience (13:54) Why you must build an online audience to sell your planner to (15:04) Building authority and why it’s vital for your planner launch (16:45) Setting realistic expectations for the launch of your planner (17:34) How to sell your planner if you have a small audience (18:01) How to generate additional revenue from your planner from online courses/digital downloads(21:05) Why your planner should be part of your overall sales funnel (23:40) Why you should join my how to launch a planner masterclass (27:17) Resources Join my How to launch your own planner masterclassJoin my Instagram Success Academy Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] How to get the most out of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner (podcast)[220] How to create a planner or journal for your industry (podcast) [355] How to create and launch your own planner (podcast) [414] How much does it cost to launch your own planner (podcast) [422] Behind the scenes of my launch how I sold £10K of planners in 24 hours (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Did you know that just one in three podcast hosts are women? And just 21% of chart-topping podcast hosts are female? Even though almost as many women listen to podcasts as men.  So what holds women back from launching a podcast? And why do so few women who DO start a podcast hit the top of the charts in their niche? This special podcast episode - published to mark International Women’s Day 2021 - aims to inspire more women to get their voices heard. You’ll hear from four podcasters (three female and one male) on how to get started with podcasting and overcome common fears - like getting to grips with the tech and getting used to the sound of your own voice. PLUS practical tips on launching your podcast. Even if starting a podcast isn’t on your radar, there is so much to inspire you in this episode to get your voice out there. Speakers: Charlotte Foster, Ant McGinley, Anna Parker Naples and Avni Gohill. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes Why I hosted a ‘Women in Podcasting Session’ at 2021Sorted (01:42) Why you should listen to this podcast episode (even if you're not launching a podcast) (02:30) Who you’ll hear from in this episode (05:12) How long should a podcast episode really be (6:56) Why planning is key to making your podcast episode  interesting (07:18) How to get over the fear of hearing your voice on a podcast (07:52) How to relax when you’re recording your podcast (10:50) Why you shouldn’t script your podcast episode  (11:20) How to get your podcast started and why you don’t need a big budget (13:21) Why podcasting is powerful for raising your business visibility (19:50) Why your podcast launch strategy is important for positioning in the future (21:10) How to be strategic when choosing your podcast guests (22:16) Why your podcast is a great source of content (23:13) Why your podcast is great for your SEO on Google (24:05) Why you don’t need loads of fancy equipment to record a podcast (28:08) How to use Zoom to record your podcast episodes (29:07) Why a podcast is a long term investment (33:02) Why you have to promote your podcast and keep telling people about it (35:18) How to keep your podcast editing simple (35:29) Tools you can use for editing your podcast audio (37:10) Resources   Podcast speakers Charlotte Foster Turn up the volume on your voice Anna Parker Naples Podcast with impactAnt McGinley Pods up North Avni Gohil Virtuelicious     Tools Descript -  transcribe and edit audioAudacity - for recording and editingSearchie - for transcriptsOtter - for recording and transcriptsZoom for recording your podcast  Join my Courageous Content mini-courseJoin my Instagram Success Academy Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray’s Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [446] How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (podcast) [400] How to build a large audience for your blog, vlog or podcast (podcast) [383] How to get your podcast live in 60 days (podcast) [376] Lessons learned from 1 millions downloads of my podcast (podcast) [253] How to land a guest appearance on podcasts with Nicole Holland (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Being a guest on other peoples’ podcasts is a great way to build your audience - and your authority. But most podcast hosts get far more pitches than they can handle - which means they can afford to be choosy about who guests on their show. So what’s the best way to pitch yourself as a podcast guest? And how can you make sure your pitch stands out from the rest? In this podcast episode, you’ll learn how to craft the perfect email pitch for a podcast and how to increase your chances of getting a ‘yes’ from the host. You’ll also find out what podcast hosts are looking for in a guest and the common mistakes to avoid in your pitch.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Why it's worth being a podcast guest Why Being a podcast guest is a great way to get in front of your ideal customers/clients - and build your audience - fast.  It’s much quicker than writing a guest blog post. Most podcast interviews last between 30-60 mins. This means you can potentially do several a week.  It’s also a great way to build trust quickly.  There’s something about being in someone’s earbuds that’s much more intimate than the written word. Which means that by the end of a 30 minute interview, people often feel they know, like and trust you enough to visit your website, download your free resources and/or even buy your products/services.  And the best thing is, every time you appear on someone else’s podcast, you’re getting in front of a brand new audience - an audience you haven’t had to build yourself. So if you set yourself a target to do three interviews a week, you could potentially build your audience by thousands - in a relatively short space of time. But before you get too excited…let’s back up a bit.  Most podcast hosts - particularly on popular shows - get dozens of pitches each week. So competition for guest spots can be pretty tough.  So how do you write a pitch for a podcast host that really stands out? Read on and find out. And why not check out my YouTube video about pitching yourself as a podcast guest as well:- 1. Focus on how you can help the podcast host (not yourself) As a podcast host, this is what I’m looking for in a guest: Someone who can provide great content for my audience. In my case, this is practical ‘how to’ advice on listeners can apply in their business on social media marketing, content marketing and email marketing. On another podcast, great content might simply be entertainment or providing information about a specific topic.  Someone who has an established online presence in the form of a blog, vlog, podcast and/or has written a book. Not only does this mean they have an audience they can share our podcast interview with, but it also means I can serve my listeners by directing them towards more useful content.  Sadly, most of the pitches I get are focused on what the person doing the pitching hopes to get out of the interview rather than how they can help my audience.  In many cases, it’s clear they haven’t even listened to the show (or even scrolled through previous episode titles) to get a feel for the kind of content I offer. I think my experience is pretty typical - which is why I say 'no' to most pitches I receive. If you can focus on how you can help the podcast host - rather than yourself - you'll have a much better chance of getting a 'yes'. 2. Label the subject header of your email Most podcast hosts are actively looking for great content, so label the subject line of your email and they’re far more likely to pay attention. 3.Use the subject header to summarise your idea  A concise subject header that summarises your story (ideally in ten words or less) is far more likely to get a podcast host’s attention. Resist the temptation to use puns or clever wordplay though; an obscure headline that doesn’t mean anything may get ignored.If you’re pitching an interview about how to get more conversions from a Facebook Ad, how to recover from postnatal depression or how to wear beige in winter...that’s exactly what you should say. 4. Keep your introduction brief If you’re pitching cold, it’s a good idea to 'introduce' yourself (a slightly different approach to pitching to journalists). But do keep it brief - or you could lose the podcast host’s attention before you’ve even got started. 5. Show you've actually listened to the podcast  Most of the pitches I get are from people who either haven’t listened to my podcast and/or haven’t given any thought to the kind of content I generally run. Say something that shows you’ve taken the time and trouble to actually listen to the podcast, and you’ll stand out a mile. 6. Show you can add value for their audience  Many of the pitches I receive offer a series of vague topics the interviewee might cover. When what I’m really looking for is a killer episode idea. And I’m literally looking for a title that will fit right in with previous titles on my podcast app. 7. Show the podcast host how you can help them grow their audience If you want to increase your chances of getting a ‘yes’, you need to show how you can help them grow their audience - by promoting the podcast interview to yours.  So do include any relevant stats, like the size of your email list and numbers of social media followers. But don’t let not having a big email list or social media following put you off;  personally, I’d rather get in front of 500 people who are exactly the kind of people I love to work than 50,000 people who ‘sort of’ fit. So if you target the right kind of content at the right kind of people, you can usually make a strong case – as long as you’re focused on how you can help the podcast host rather than yourself. Although I have a decent-sized email list (around 15k at the time of writing) it's tiny compared to some of the big podcast hosts I've pitched to. But that's still a significant number of people - and I have specialist knowledge and experience - which makes me a valuable podcast guest. 'Selling' this in my pitches has helped me get on some pretty Big Deal podcasts. If you’re just starting out and your email list is small (or non-existent), focus on the value of the content you can offer.     8. Show that other people value your content  If you’ve contributed guest content elsewhere, do mention it in your pitch. Seeing that others value your content - particularly well-established podcasters - should provide reassurance that you know what you’re talking about.   9. Make it as easy as possible for the podcast host to say 'yes'  For most podcast hosts, the interview is the enjoyable bit. Chasing people up for photos, biogs and social media handles can be a pain. So make it as easy for them as possible by providing all of that info in your pitch.   10. Don't forget to follow up  Getting half an hour or longer on a call with someone you admire - or would love to work with in the future - is a great opportunity to start building a business relationship.  I’ve kept in contact with many of the people I’ve interviewed for my podcast - and many who’ve interviewed me for theirs, including Chris Ducker, Natalie Sisson and Amanda Cook. So when your interview goes live, don’t forget to email the host to thank them for the interview...and get out there and promote it. Email your list, share it on all your social media networks and keep on doing it (I’m still sharing podcast interviews I did years ago on social media now). Remember you haven’t just given a podcast interview - you’ve co-created a piece of evergreen content - which is hugely valuable. You might also enjoy: how to use guest content to grow your audience.  Find this post useful? Download my FREE podcast pitch template here.    Podcast Shownotes Why understanding the audience is key to pitching for a podcast (03:30) Where you might be going wrong with your podcast guest pitch (06:39) How much it costs to make a podcast and why it matters (07:10) What you need to remember when you pitch to a podcast host (07:50) A common mistake people make when pitching to guest on a podcast (10:02) My top tip for pitching yourself as a podcast guest (12:05) Why authority is just as important as expertise  (13:50) How to approach your pitch if you haven’t got a huge online audience (17:43) Why you must do your research before you pitch to be a guest on a podcast (19:41) What to write in your email pitch and how to stand out (20:21) Why you shouldn’t pretend you’ve listened to a podcast when you pitch (22:09) How to demonstrate the value that you can add as a podcast guest (and what you need to avoid) (23:15) Why podcasts hosts aren’t always looking for Big Name Guests (26:40) What podcasts guests are looking for in a podcast guest (27:25) How to make it easy for a podcast host to say ‘yes’ to you (30:21) Why creating a one-sheet that includes photos and bio and social media handles can make it easier to get booked as a podcast guest (31:30) Why it’s worth keeping in touch with podcast hosts after the interview (32:13) Other resources Join my Courageous Content mini-courseJoin my Instagram Success Academy Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray’s Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [424] How to build an audience on YouTube with Justin Brown (podcast)[400] How to build a large audience for your blog, vlog or podcast (podcast)[383] How to get your podcast live in 60 days (podcast)[376] Lessons learned from 1 millions downloads of my podcast (podcast)[253] How to land a guest appearance on podcasts with Nicole Holland (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Self-publishing your own book is a great way to build your online audience - and your authority.  But how do you get started? How much does it cost? And should you do it all yourself - or use a print-on-demand service like Amazon, IngramSpark or Bookbaby.  If you’ve been asking yourself these questions (and more) then you’ll love this podcast episode with publishing expert and bestselling Indie author Sacha Black. Sacha shares every single step you need to take on your self-publishing journey - from coming up with a killer idea for a non-fiction book - to publication to promotion. You’ll also learn how to promote your book (with or without an online audience) and some killer tips to avoid the stress of a one-star review. PLUS the one thing you must avoid when you launch. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   About Sacha Black and how she helps people self-publish (02:19) Create engaging content with my Courageous Content mini-course (03:05) What you need to consider before you start writing a non-fiction book  (06:06) How to come up with a killer topic for your book (06:24) The differences between traditional publishing and self-publishing (09:42) The pros and cons of being an Indie author (11:18) How to structure your book and why the problem you solve is at the heart of it (12:50) Why choosing the wrong style/genre could upset your audience (15:10) The optimum word count for a non-fiction book (16:10) What it means to publish ‘wide’ or ‘exclusive’ (and the pros and cons of both) (17:15) Publishing costs of a digital book vs a printed book (20:25) Reasons to outsource the formatting of your book (22:26) Why you should invest in a professionally-designed book cover (23:01) What sort of budget do you need for marketing a book (24:04) How to publish your formatted digital book online (24:34) What not to include in a book description (and why controversial is good) (28:34) Tips to avoid one-star reviews on Amazon (and what you must avoid when you launch) (30:38) How to promote your book if you haven’t got an online audience (32:36) Why content marketing is great for selling a book (33:48) Tips to get people on your email list (37:11) Resources   Vellum for formatting on MacBookBaby for publishingKobo for publishingBarnes and Noble for publishingOverdrive for publishingReedsy for editingDraft2Digital online publishingIngram Spark print on demandBookbub for distribution Mastering Amazon Descriptions by Brian Meeks How to write a sizzling synopsis by Bryan Cohen The Rebel Author Podcast Sacha Black Sacha's published books Sacha Black Instagram Sacha Black website Join my Courageous Content mini-courseJoin my Instagram Success Academy Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [408] 11 Instagram Story ideas to help you make more sales (podcast) [411] How to become the go-to person in your industry with Jen Hall (podcast) [414] How much does it cost to launch your own planner? (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

If you’re building a personal brand online, people have to get to know the person behind the business. Otherwise, they won’t buy from you. But how much personal information should you share on your social media and other content platforms?  What is ‘ok’ to share and what should be kept private? And what is the difference between sharing and oversharing? If you’ve ever asked yourself any of these questions, you’ll love this podcast episode on how much personal information you should share on social media (and other content platforms). If you worry about sharing too much personal information, I explore why you might feel like that (and whether your concerns are justified).  I also share practical tips on how to decide what to share and what to keep private.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About my Courageous Content mini-course (02:02) Why I recorded this podcast episode (03:42) Why you should share personal experiences in your business content (05:12) What type of personal experiences should you share (08:56) Why sharing personal content will make you seem more approachable (10:01) What I choose to share online and why some stuff stays private (11:45) Why oversharing means different things to different people (12:45) Why people have a problem with oversharing (14:35) Why you need to reconsider your oversharing beliefs (17:09) Why sharing your experiences and feelings is good for you (20:02) Why oversharing is a force for good (21:12) How to decide what personal content to share (23:13) How I decide what personal topics to share in my content (27:07) Where to draw boundaries on the content your share (27:31) Why you must be able to stand by what you say 100% (34:50) Why you have to stop worrying about people not liking you (38:40) Resources Join my Courageous Content mini-course Join my Instagram Success Academy Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] How I discovered my ADHD Superpower (podcast)   [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [385] How to sell on Instagram Stories (without feeling sleazy) (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [408] 11 Instagram Story ideas to help you make more sales (podcast)   Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Ever find yourself wondering how some business owners manage to get tons of engagement (and sales) from the content their share on social media? Then you’ll love this podcast episode with Dawn Bradley - who teaches hair stylists how to build a six-figure business (having done exactly that herself).  Dawn explains how to create content that really gets under the skin of your ideal customers/clients and keeps them coming back for more.PLUS how to get comfortable with sharing content on more personal topics (and why you should). And why you must stop trying to appeal to everyone (because you’ll end up appealing to no one). This episode is packed full of tips, strategies and ideas - regardless of what type of business you have.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode (00:39) About my Instagram Success Academy (01:35) About Dawn and her business journey (02:20) When Dawn realised she wanted to work smarter not harder (05:30) How Dawn used the power of Instagram to create demand for her services (07:15) The language Dawn uses to attract her ideal clients (11:38) Why relatable content is more important than perfection (16:20) How Dawn uses client shaming without upsetting people (21:11) Why you can’t appeal to everyone and why you shouldn’t try to (29:51) How to deal with people who want to give you feedback (34:20) How Dawn niched her content by embracing the weird (36:50) Why Dawn got anxious putting out content that didn’t align with her (37:10) How to make your audience relax by putting out content that they can relate to (41:01) How Dawn blends professional and personal life to connect with her audience (45:10) Why boundaries about what you share online are important (47:50) Why spontaneous content can work better than scheduled (49:20) Why connecting with people’s emotion is really important (52:48) Resources Dawn Instagram Dawn website Join my Instagram Success Academy Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K fast (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [385] How to sell on Instagram Stories (without feeling sleazy) (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [408] 11 Instagram Story ideas to help you make more sales (podcast) [415] How to use TikTok to build your online audience with Sam Bearfoot (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you using Instagram Reels as part of your Instagram strategy? Maybe you’ve been thinking about creating Instagram Reels but you need some creative inspiration? Or perhaps you’ve no idea what to make your Instagram Reels about? In this podcast episode, I explain how to get started with Instagram Reels and why Reels are a powerful way to stand out from the crowd on Instagram and create relatable content that gets people into your DMs - fast. Discover my time-saving hacks (using Instagram Reels and TikTok together) and the four types of content that really FLY on Instagram Reels (and how to keep people coming back for more). Plus you’ll get my 15 second Instagram Reels template. And the ONE thing I did that exploded my video content. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About my Instagram Sucess Academy (00:37) What are Instagram Reels? (04:57) Why video is a good way to connect with your audience (07:34) How to get started on Instagram Reels (09:22) The ideal length for an Instagram Reel (011:18) Why TikTok is great for recording Instagram Reels (11:42) How to think about your content strategy for Instagram Reels (12:56) Why you will need to experiment with your content (15:51) Why you’re not too old for TikTok (17:29) Signs that your content is hitting the mark (19:06) How I created content that really hit the mark (21:14) Why your content needs to be really specific and niche (23:37) Why you might be making a mistake with your content (25:00) How to think about content for a product-based business (25:35) Why you have to think about your customers and their problems (30:15) Types of content that work well on Instagram Reels Tips and tricks (30:50) Why relatable content is really powerful (32:50) Janet’s Instagram Reel challenge (34:09) My 15-second template for an Instagram Reel (34:32) Why you should avoid selling on Instagram Reels (36:01) How to get people to come back for more (36:39) What to do if you’re too nervous to show your face (38:14) Resources Join my Instagram Success Academy Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K fast (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [385] How to sell on Instagram Stories (without feeling sleazy) (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [408] 11 Instagram Story ideas to help you make more sales (podcast) [415] How to use TikTok to build your online audience with Sam Bearfoot (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

What’s this new social media app Clubhouse everyone’s talking about? And how can you use it to build your online audience?  In this podcast episode, I share how this audio-only app can be a powerful way to build your online audience and how you can use it to build your authority and your network. You’ll learn how to get started with Clubhouse (if you haven’t already). PLUS how the exclusive invite system works.  I also share what I like about Clubhouse and what I’ve discovered (so far) about the best strategies you can use to build your online audience (yep - even if you have a product-based business). {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   About my Instagram Success Academy (01:30) What is the Clubhouse app and how does it work (04:08) How to find the topics that you’re interested in on Clubhouse (06:33) How to get an invite for Clubhouse (07:25) How to start a Clubhouse broadcast and promote it to your audience (09:45) The best way to get started and show up on Clubhouse (10:33) How to get used to speaking on audio on Clubhouse (14:08) What I like about Clubhouse (14:40) Why Clubhouse is good for building your authority and your network (16:13) Disadvantages of the Clubhouse app (16:48) How to use Clubhouse to build an online audience (18:35) How to choose people to collaborate with on Clubhouse (22:15) Why you should niche your conversation topics on Clubhouse (23:15) Come and join me on Clubhouse this Friday to talk about this episode (24:59) Why you need to be giving and helpful and not just sell (25:47) How to use Clubhouse if you have a product-based business (26:51) Resources Find out more about my  Instagram Success Academy here Join my 2021Sorted Club Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [373] How to get more followers on any social media platform (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram followers by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [415] How to use TikTok to build your online audience with Sam Bearfoot (podcast) [438] Five things you must stop doing if you want to build your online audience in 2021 (podcast)   Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Want to know the secret to launching a successful online course or membership site? In this special podcast episode, I’m sharing a game-changing lesson from my Build Your Online Audience Programme which has helped some of my clients generate thousands of pounds in revenue. You’ll learn the steps you need to take to launch an online course or membership (some of which might surprise you). PLUS how long it will take to build the audience of the size you need to launch a profitable online course or membership . You'll find out how spending too much time on the wrong activities can hold you up (and what those activities are). There’s also tons of ideas on how to generate income in your business FAST (even if you haven’t built your online audience yet). Want to know more about my Build Your Online Audience Programme? Head to the links in the show notes below. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Podcast shownotes About the science of audience building (04:12) Why your audience need to get to know you before they buy (08:50) How long it takes to build your audience for an online course/membership (13:01) Why you need a bigger audience than you might think (15:57) What I didn’t realise about audience building when I started out (17:35) Why your course/membership launch flopped (18:15) How to make money in your business  - even if you haven’t built an audience yet (20:12) The three online audiences you need to build to sell online courses/memberships (22:17) Why you might be spending too much time on the wrong audience (23:33) How long it takes someone to trust you enough buy from you (24:37) Your mindset - and how it can holdiyou back from building your audience (26:04) How to reach out to the people who are most likely to buy from you (28:14) How to work out your hot, warm and cold leads (28:51) Why you shouldn’t be afraid to go for the 'no' (35:20) How to get more leads and opportunities from existing clients/customers (36:33) Resources Join my 2021Sorted Club Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [418] How long does it take to create an online course (podcast) [426] The ultimate course launch checklist: how to plan and create content for a course or membership launch (podcast) [427] How to make more money teaching online (and how to do it really well) (podcast) [438] Five things you must stop doing to build your online audience in 2021 (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn Resources Join my masterclass LINK Join my 2021Sorted Club Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [418] How long does it take to create an online course (podcast) [426] The ultimate course launch checklist: how to plan and create content for a course or membership launch (podcast) [427] How to make more money teaching online (and how to do it really well) (podcast) [438] Five things you must stop doing to build your online audience in 2021 (podcast)   Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you struggle to make the time to create content for your business? Would you love to start each month knowing you’ve nailed ALL your content for the month ahead? If that sounds good then you’ll love this podcast episode with systems expert and host of Systems Saved Me podcast Jordan Gill. Jordan explains how to create a content batching week - so whether you have a podcast, YouTube channel or regular blog post you can get your content creation wrapped up FAST - and avoid the time sink of creating content in dribs and drabs. Discover why you need to stop squeezing your content creation in between other work tasks and why carving out some time to intentionally create your content, will REALLY take your content to another level (as well as saving you time and brain space). Find out Jordan’s own systems and processes for batching her podcast episodes and how to make sure you stay on track and get in the right headspace to do it. And if you can’t manage a whole week of content batching Jordan’s got some tips that will help you batch on a smaller scale. PLUS why batching content and using systems will make sure you show up as your best self in your content (and REALLY help you build your online audience). There’s so much value in this podcast episode with Jordan Gill and I d love to know if it’s inspired you to try a content batching week.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About my Masterclass How to create a launch plan (03:30) About Jordan Gill and how she helps business owners (06:05) How to create a content batching week for any type of content (08:32) Why batching content will help you do your best work (10:22) How Jordan gets in the right headspace to create content (10:57) What to do if you’ve batched your content ahead of time and things change (13:30) How to batch content and stay relevant if you create timely content (15:11) Why you should have some backup content in case you need to be flexible (17:45) Why you need to give yourself time to get your processes streamlined (20:27) How Jordan has set up her podcast batching processes  (21:09) How to make sure you stick to your systems even if others don’t (22:38) How Jordan would structure a week of creating podcast content (24:15) How Jordan manages her podcast guest onboarding and content curation (25:24) How Jordan chooses the content that she’s going to create (27:42) How batching content will help you show up as your best self for your audience (29:50) What to do if you can’t manage a whole week of content creation (31:55) How to get to grips with creating systems if you’re not a natural (34:24) Why systems are so great and worth investing the time to get right  (37:20) Resources Tools that Jordan uses: ClickUp Airtable Jordan's podcast: Systems Saved Me Jordan Gill: website Jordan Gill: Instagram Join my masterclass How to create a lunch plan Join my 2021Sorted Club Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) [411] How to become the Number one choice in your industry with Jen Hall (podcast) [438] Five things you must stop doing to build your online audience in 2021 (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you want to BUILD your online audience in 2021? Maybe you've spent tons of money looking for the right course to help you do this? Listen to this podcast episode and find out why chasing the latest shiny object could be delaying you from growing your online audience. You'll learn the five things that you MUST stop doing right now if you want to build your online audience. Find out why spreading yourself too thin is holding you back from building an online audience and why you need to set realistic goals from day one. Discover why having a niche will make it SO much easier to build an online audience (despite what you might think). Plus why you need to build authority to build an online audience and why can't expect to rock up online and be an overnight success. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode (01:37) Why you need to stop looking for the magic silver bullet (01:58) Why you should focus on just one thing and not be everywhere (03:53) Why you should focus on just ONE platform to grow an audience on (04:55) Why you need to publish regular consistent content (05:55) Throwback to one of my earlier podcast episodes (07:33) Why you have to give yourself time to get it right (08:28) Why you need to be a specialist and not a generalist  (11:54) Why niching can make content creation easier (15:37) Why you should stop thinking so big (16:13) Why you need numbers on your email list to sell more (18:02) Why you need to start off with realistic goals (19:20) Why you need to build your authority before you sell (21:41) Why you need to have realistic targets for building your audience (23:17) Why it can take a year to build an online audience (23:45) Why you have to give yourself a chance to build an online audience (24:25) About my Build Your Online Audience programme (25:03) Resources Join my 2021Sorted Club Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) [349] How to find the right niche for your business (podcast) [389] How to find your niche and why you need to with Jo Soley (podcast) [411] How to become the Number one choice in your industry with Jen Hall (podcast) [434] How to set your prices and why it’s an audience issue with Sally Farrant (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Need to create a content plan for 2021 but not sure where to start?  Create your 2021 content plan with my easy-to-follow plan - in just a few hours (or less) This four step plan will take the overwhelm out of content planning - and get you all set for 2021.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   Why most people struggle to create a content plan (01:50) How to create your annual content plan (02:44) What to do if you don't know what's happening in your business in 2021 (04:24) How to plan content if you sell the same product/service all year round (06:06) What to do with your content plan if your business plan changes  (7:29) Why I recommend publishing ONE key piece of weekly content on your website (8:27) How to create your quarterly content plan (10:26) How to repurpose one piece of content into many  (16:11) STEP 1: Create your annual content plan Write down 3-5 important things you will be doing in your business in each quarter e.g. launching a new product/service, attending or speaking at an event, hosting an event/special promotion.  STEP 2: Create your quarterly plan Once you have an overview of your year, you can create your quarterly content plan.  If you have one, you’ll find the Q1 quarterly planning template on page 9 of your 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner.   How to create your quarterly plan: Write down your business focus for each week. If you have a copy of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner, there are templates provided for this (the first is on page 9). What are you going to be selling /promoting each week? This will help you plan and schedule relevant content that makes it natural for you to talk about your products/services. For example if you are launching a 12-week group coaching programme on productivity, it would make sense to schedule content on creating new habits, avoiding procrastination and dealing with distractions around that time.  Schedule a piece of ‘core’ content  for each week e.g. blog, podcast, YouTube video that relates to your business focus. Typically this will be around something your ideal customer/client might be struggling with that relates to your product/service. Committing to a regular publishing day will help keep you accountable. You don’t need firm titles at this stage - topic ideas are fine. Pick out a couple of awareness dates for each week that are relevant to you/your business (there are hundreds listed in my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner but you can find awareness dates online - it might just take a bit of Googling to find relevant ones for you/your business).  Get them on your calendar. Remember not every piece of content you share has to be business related. It’s fine to post content that is just about generating engagement/conversation. In fact this can be a great way to connect with your audience. You will find the awareness days listed at the beginning of each month (alongside a month-per-view calendar).   Listen to this podcast to learn more about how to use awareness days to generate content ideas for your business.  Simply by doing these three things, you can create a quarterly plan (i.e. 12 weeks of content ideas) in a very short space of time. STEP 3: Create your quarterly plan Depending on your personal preference, you might decide your quarterly plan can double up as your monthly plan (adding new ideas as you go).But you might prefer to sit down once a month and create a specific plan for the following month (using the content from your quarterly plan as a starting point).  It’s up to you. Step 4: Creating your weekly/daily content plan If you have a copy of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner, you will also have a planning template where you can map out what you’re going to post on each content platform each day (the first is on page 14). If you don't, you can  So now you’re ready to create your 2021 content plan. Good luck! Resources Join my 2021Sorted Club Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) How to create 30 days of content in 30 minutes (podcast) How to create engaging content if you only sell one product/service (podcast) How to create a content plan you can actually stick to (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you struggle to stick to a content plan for your business? Perhaps you find it hard to be consistent week in and week out? Maybe you start with great intentions every year and then before you know it you’ve missed a week and you’ve fallen off the wagon and you’re struggling to show up again? If any of that resonates with you then you’re going to love this podcast episode with performance and mindset coach Osmaan Sharif. We’re digging deep into how your mindset might be holding you back from sticking to your content plan. Discover practical tips and advice about how to make 2021 your best year yet for content planning and make sure you’re not getting in your own way. Find out why your content plan doesn’t begin with your business goals but with you. And why understanding your values and personality is key to a successful content plan. PLUS what will happen to your content plan if your motivation and values get too far out of synch.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   Resources Osmaan Sharif’s Rapid Transformation website Join my 2021Sorted Club Find out more about the private podcast stream Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [217] How to find your entrepreneurial superpower with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [406] Mindset problems that can slow your audience growth with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [416] Money mindset issues that can slow your audience growth with Catherine Morgan (podcast) [434] How to set your prices and why it’s an audience issue with Sally Farrant (podcast) [435] What’s the difference between marketing a product and a service (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Thinking about joining my Build Your Online Audience Programme? Want to know if it's right for you and your business? If you've been considering joining then listen and discover why now is the best time to join my Build Your Online Audience programme.   You probably have questions like:   What's new in the Build Your Online Audience programme for 2021?  Will I need to pay for any other courses or memberships? What kind of results can I expect if I join the programme (and how quickly?) What exactly is included in the programme and how does it work? Is the programme suitable for a business/brand like mine? What happens if I can't do everything in the programme? Maybe you’re wondering how much time you will need to devote to the Build Your Online Audience programme, whether it’s suitable for your type (or stage) of business. Hint: It's suitable for any business that needs to build an audience of followers, fans and subscribers. Plus you can find out why my Get it Done sessions are so powerful for results and accountability.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} While it’s tempting to start with the features of the programme, I know what you’re really interested in is the potential transformation i.e. what kind of results can you expect if you join.  1. What kind of results can you expect if you join the Build Your Online Audience programme?  As with anything in life you get out what you put in but here’s what some members have achieved:  ✔️ Leadership coach Blaire Palmer generated £42k in sales from one class (Science of Audience Building) Achieved within 90 days.  ✔️ Canva expert Gemma Cormack took her income from £240 a month to £3950.00 per month. She has also added 2k new Instagram followers after completing my Instagram Success Academy course. Achieved within 90 days. ✔️ Fashion consultant Trisha Sakhlecha, used our Get It Done accountability sessions to create a sequence of emails that helped her generate five coaching enquiries and three sales. Achieved within 90 days.  ✔️ Victoria Rose launched a podcast (using the podcasting course), increased her Instagram following by 180% and generated almost £1800 in sales  Achieved within 90 days  ✔️ Claire Gleave launched her Activewear company Natal Active and generated £6.5k in her first month of business (she predicted £1.2k). Also added 2k Instagram followers  But it's not all about money and audience... ✔️ Charlotte Foster a podcaster is taking Christmas off for the first time ever and she puts this down to my Get It Done sessions (more below) ✔️ Sally Farrant worked her way through the programme and nailed her niche. Find out how this helped her build her online audience and her business in this podcast episode   2. Why do you need to build an online audience? You don’t NEED to build an online audience. If you’re getting enough leads/sales online - and/or you only need a small number of clients each year and you can get them via your existing contacts - you don’t need to do anything.  But if you want to sell one-to-many i.e. you want to sell your products/services in the hundreds and thousands. And you don’t want to have to do personal outreach for every sale,  you need an online audience.  To put this into context, the average conversion rate for online sales is just 1-2%. Which means for every hundred people in your audience, only a handful will buy. So if you’re looking to sell at scale i.e. products, online courses, membership...you need a much bigger audience than you think you do.     3. How much does it cost to join the Build Your Online Audience programme?  There are two levels to the programme: Standard and Premium with the choice of a quarterly payment plan: Standard Build Your Online Audience £997 Premium Janet Murray Experience (including 2022Sorted and my 2022 Social media Diary) £1097 * If you’re listening before Jan 4 - can grab a discounted offer for 2020. *Prices correct at time of publishing December 2020   4. What exactly IS the Build Your Online Audience programme? The Build Your Online Audience programme is the only dedicated membership programme aimed at helping you build an online audience i.e. more fans, followers and subscribers.  Because the more of the right kind of people you have in the audience, the easier it will be for you to make online sales.  Key topics covered are:  ✔️ Social media marketing: Twitter, LinkedIn, Facebook, Instagram ✔️ Content planning and creation ✔️ Content strategy (blogging, podcasting, video marketing) ✔️ Email marketing (including how to create a lead magnet and build your email list).  We also focus on the mindset part of building your audience, with weekly group coaching sessions on relevant topics including: money mindset, productivity, motivation, goal-setting, planning and prioritisation and self-confidence. New for 2021Get It DoneGet It WrittenOsmaan Sharif 5. What is included in the Build Your Online Audience programme?  The  standard Build Your Online Audience programme  takes you through the exact steps you need to take to build your online audience - from getting clear on your niche (the all-important first step) to getting more followers on social media, building a loyal following for your blog/vlog, podcast (if you have one) and building your email list.  SESSION 1: Nail your niche  Find the right niche for your business (or refine the one you have) so you can become the market leader.  SESSION 2: Developing your brand voice  Create brand voice guidelines for your business so you never get stuck on what to say about your business (and how to say it). SESSION 3: Creating your visual brand  Create a visual style sheet for your business - or refresh the one you have - so people fall in love with your brand (over and over again)  SESSION 4: Choosing your platforms  Choose the content platforms that are right for your business (i.e. blog, YouTube, podcast, Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn and/or Twitter).  SESSION 5: Creating binge worthy content  Learn how to create content that’s more addictive than your favourite Netflix series. SESSION 6: Unforgettable social media  Create irresistible social media content that attracts new followers and fans - every single day.  SESSION 7: Email marketing 101   Get started with email list building (even if you feel daunted by the tech).  SESSION 8: Email magnetism  Create a compelling email lead magnet (and learn zillions of ways to get new email subscribers). SESSION 9: Nurture and Grow  Learn how to write compelling email marketing copy - including welcome sequences, nurture sequences and email newsletters people actually look forward to receiving.  😮  INCLUDES FIVE DONE-FOR-YOU EMAIL SEQUENCES YOU CAN ADAPT FOR YOU OWN BUSINESS 😮  Also included: ✔️ Bonus classes on the key social media platforms:  Twitter, Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn. PLUS a Canva masterclass.  ✔️ A weekly group coaching call featuring guest experts who focus on the ‘mindset’ side of building your online audience (monthly themes include money mindset, productivity, motivation, goal-setting, planning and prioritisation and confidence) ✔️ Facebook Community where you can get daily help/support from myself and other business owners who are committed to building their online audience  6. What's included in the Premium version of the programme? All of the above PLUS: Acces to my entire advanced Masterclass Library (worth £792)   How to create a coaching/consultancy package How to launch your first online course How to write social media posts that sell How to launch your own planner/journal How to turn your offline services into online offerings How to launch a webinar/masterclass How to create an email nurture sequence How to create passive income in your business How to write delightful emails  How to write engaging copy for your business (Copy Fix) How to get booked to speak on big stages  How to create a content plan for your business  Additional courses/classes (worth £1782) ✔️ Getting started with Pinterest ✔️ Blogging Success Formula ✔️ Instagram Success Academy  ✔️ Getting started with Facebook Ads  ✔️ Getting started with YouTube ✔️ Getting started with live video ✔️ Launching your own podcast  ✔️ Blogging Success Formula ✔️ Getting started with chatbots (NEW 2021) ✔️  Getting started with Canva for graphic design (NEW 2021) ✔️  Creating sales funnels (NEW 2021) ✔️ Private podcast stream of classes (NEW 2021) ✔️ Monthly group mindset calls with mindset coach Osmaan Sharif (NEW 2021) BONUS course: How to create awesome sales copy (worth £497) 🐝 GET IT DONE SESSIONS 🐝 The Premium version also includes my popular Get It Done sessions. These focused co-working sessions where you can work with other members on a specific task/set of tasks (related to your audience building). And NEW for 2021 Monthly Get It Written sessions. 7. Who is the Build Your Online Audience for? The Build Your Online Audience programme is suitable for anyone who wants to build an online audience i.e. more followers, fans and subscribers.  It’s suitable for:  ✔️ Service-based based businesses (including hospitality) ✔️ Product-based businesses ✔️ Online business ✔️ Offline businesses ✔️ New businesses ✔️ Established businesses​  ✔️ Freelancers/sole traders ✔️ Solopreneurs/entrepreneurs ✔️ Small/Medium-sized businesses ✔️ Colleges/universities ✔️ Charities And if you need more reassurance, here’s a list of some of the types of business owners I’ve helped with audience building:  Glamping site owners, genealogists, costume designers, social media managers, accountants, psychologists, personal trainers, coaches/consultants, holiday cottage owners, estate agents, wedding planners, website designers, jewellery designers, artists, writers, vocal coaches, nutritionists, business coaches, universities, cake makers, hairstylists, jewellery designers. 8. Is the Build Your Online Audience programme suitable for product-based business owners? Absolutely yes. The audience-building strategies you use to build an audience for a product-based business are exactly the same as those you’d use for a service-based. Because a service IS a product, right? To put that into context, I use exactly the same strategies to sell a digital product like my Build Your Online Audience programme as I do a physical product like my Social Media Diary & Planner.  Here is a list of some of the product-based business owners I work with:  ✔️ Hand-made jewellery ✔️ Evening dresses and gowns ✔️ Dance costumes ✔️ Face masks ✔️ Vegan handbags ✔️ Subscription boxes ✔️ Personalised baby/toddler gifts ✔️ Recipe kits ✔️ Skincare and makeup ✔️ Books/planners ✔️ Yoga wear and accessories  ✔️ Children’s clothes ✔️ Activewear for mums and mums-to-be  I have lots of product-based business owners who can also apply to join my online Christmas Market in the first week of December. 9. Is the Build Your Online Audience programme just for beginners? Not at all. Whether you’re new in business - or you’re looking to pivot/or create an audience for something new, the Build Your Online Audience programme can help.  10. Is the Build Your Online Audience programme suitable for new business owners?  Definitely. Whether you’re completely new in business - or you’re looking to pivot/or create an audience for something new, the Build Your Online Audience programme can help.  11. What is the format of the classes? Each class is typically around 90 minutes and includes a video tutorial and comprehensive workbook. Many of the classes are taught live, but there is no need to worry if you can’t attend live as all the classes and resources are available in the membership area (usually within 24 hours of the class - often sooner).  Classes are delivered via Zoom video conferencing and are generally very interactive with plenty of opportunities to ask questions and get feedback.   12. When is the right time to join the Build Your Online Audience programme...before I launch my new product/service or afterwards? It’s never too early to start building your audience. And I would recommend joining BEFORE you launch your new product/service. Otherwise, who are you going to sell it to?  13.  How quickly should you expect to see results from the Build Your Online Audience programme?   As with anything in your business, you get out what you put in. As the examples above show, it is possible to achieve considerable results in 90 days or less. But that does depend on the time you've got available to spend. 14. Can men join the Build Your Online Audience programme? Absolutely yes. Here are some of the men who are in the programme (along with some of their results). ✔️ Historic food expert Paul Couchman has added around 1500 followers on Instagram (amongst many other things). ✔️ Accountant Mahmood Reza has launched an awareness day. ✔️ Architectural technologist Jon Clayton generated £600 of sales from Science of Audience Building 15. How much time do I need to spend? This is down to you. I generally teach one or two classes live each week, but go at the pace that's right for you. A minimum of 2 hours a week. Even if you only have a few hours a week, as long as you are implementing what you learn, you WILL make progress. And a few hours a week over a year is better than doing nothing at all, right? Remember you don't have to do everything in the programme. Ready to join the Build Your Online Audience programme? Click here.  Podcast shownotes:   The results people get from my BYOA programme (02:12) How my Get it Done sessions helped Charlotte have Christmas off (04:16) Why do you need to build an online audience for your business (05:10) Why you need to build your audience on your own land (06:30) How much does my Build Your Online Audience programme cost (09:01) What’s included in my Build Your Online Audience programme (10:41) How my Get it Done Sessions get results (11:50) About my NEW Get it Written sessions (14:01) About our NEW mindset coach for 2021 Osmaan Sharif (14:30) Why you should work through the core BYOA programme (16:01) About some of the core BYOA modules (18:03) About the email marketing sequences you’ll learn (20:07) Why success in the membership isn’t doing every single class (22:14) Why there’s always a replay of everything (24:20) About my new private podcast stream (24:50) Why you don’t need to take any other courses in 2021 if you join my programme (25:50) About the masterclasses that are included in the programme (27:03) Why my Build Your Online Audience programme is suitable for any business (28:30) Why it’s suitable for product-based businesses as well as service-based (29:50) Why it’s suitable for any age business whether old or new (33:40) Why you should join my programme before you launch a new product or service (35:31) Why men can join Build Your Online Audience (37:15) Why any progress is better than no progress (38:01) Why I’m really visible in the Build Your Online Audience programme (39:41) Resources Buy 2021 Sorted  Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Find out more about my Janet Murray affiliate scheme Other Podcast episodes [Bonus] How to get the most out of my Build Your Online Audience Programme (podcast) [339] How To Build An Audience for an Online Course or membership (podcast) [342] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [432] How to plan and host your own Christmas market (podcast) [434] How to set your prices and why it's an audience issue with Sally Farrant (podcast) [435] What's the difference between marketing a product and a service (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Is your fear of being trolled or bullied online holding you back from being visible and building your online audience? Maybe you’ve been trolled or had to deal with copycats and you’re not sure how to handle it? If ANY of that resonates with you then this special podcast episode recorded at my LIVE online event 2021 Sorted is a must-listen. You’ll hear from four online business owners: sales expert Jessica Lorimer, blogger Natalie Lue, passive income expert Lisa Johnson and online coach Dan Meredith. They share their experiences of online trolls, bullies and copycats and some of their stories may shock you. Discover practical strategies and tips for dealing with the dark side of online business. Find out what to do if you’re in a difficult situation and you’re being bullied or trolled online or if someone is ripping off your work. You’ll get tips on building your resilience - as well as how to reframe what’s happening to you. And why the content you create can have an impact on people’s reaction to you. Plus tips on how to avoid making a bad situation worse and when you SHOULD get legal.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes Why I decided to create this podcast episode (01:30) About 2021Sorted and the level up sessions (04:08) How Jessica dealt with an online troll (09:42) Natalie’s experience with a stalker and online troll (12:55) Why you should never feed a troll (14:40) How Natalie deals with people who copy her work (15:00) Why you need to be careful about going in all guns blazing (16:39) Why you need to make sure you have your legal paperwork in order (17:29) How Lisa got bullied online and deals with online bullies (18:26) Why getting a troll means you’re being visible (21:29) Why you should get legal advice when there’s slander (21:52) Why you should never hold back being visible for fear of getting a troll (22:48) Why you’ll always get trolls when you’re successful (24:32) How Dan’s online tribe killed off his trolls (25:05) What happens if you share polarising content (26:00) Why Dan doesn’t like to be polarising and stays in his lane (26:22) Why you should focus on the positives and ignore the negative (29:16) Why you have to remember it’s them not you  (31:31) Why you have to be ready to have awkward conversations (34:51)   Resources   Join my 2021Sorted Club Find out more about the private podcast stream Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [311] How to generate passive income in your business with Lisa Johnson (podcast) [384] How to be more yourself in your social media content with Natalie Lue (podcast) [386] The four types of content that will help you make more sales (podcast) [397] How to create content that attracts corporate clients with Jessica Lorimer (podcast)   Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

What’s the difference between marketing a product and a service?  In this podcast episode, I explain why there’s NO difference between selling a product and a service. A And I explain why the belief that there IS a difference can actually hold you back as a product-based business. But this episode isn’t just for product-based business owners. It’s packed full of marketing tips for both product and service-based businesses, including the THREE things you must be able to do to sell a product/service successfully (hint: many small business owners aren’t doing any of them). PLUS why generating desire in your customers/clients is crucial – regardless of whether you sell a product or a service. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   About my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner (02:45) About this podcast episode and why you should listen (05:30) Why there’s no difference in marketing a product or service-based business (08:48) The three things that have to happen if you want to sell your product or service (09:16) Why there’s always emotion involved in any buying decision (10:50) How to create emotional content about a boring product or service (11:30) How to think about your product emotionally (12:57) How to think about your service emotionally (17:10) Why you have to dig deep into the feeling a product or service creates (19:11) Why desire is really important and why it goes beyond solving a problem (22:32) Why desire with a product is a stronger emotional reaction (25:45) Why it’s all about the transformation and tapping into the emotion of a product (30:49) How to think deeply about the emotion and the transformation (37:21) Why you need to create visual content for a service (as well as a product) (39:06) Why it’s powerful to sell a product using emotion (42:43) How to create a lead magnet for a product-based business (44:27) Why sales funnels can be shorter with product-based businesses (49:42) Why you might need to warm up a purchaser for a higher-priced product or service (51:17) Why partnerships are the same regardless of a service or a product-based business (52:22) Why you should build your own audience on your own land (54:35) Resources Nadia Newton Penelope Hope Finula Crowe New Day Originals Tracy Hooper Personal Stylist Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner bundles Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) [386] The four types of content that will help you make more sales (podcast) [416] Money mindset issues that can slow your audience growth with Catherine Morgan (podcast) [421] Seven signs you're ready to start running Facebook Ads (podcast) [434] How to set your prices and why it's an audience issue with Sally Farrant (podcast)   Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you struggle to price your services? Or maybe you live in dread of having THAT conversation about pricing? Maybe you've discounted your prices just to win a client and ended up feeling REALLY resentful?  Or perhaps you’re wondering if you should put your prices on your website? If any of that sounds familiar then you'll love this podcast episode with pricing accountant Sally Farrant. Sally shares practical tips about setting your prices and why being clear on your pricing upfront - can save you tons of time later on. And why you need to focus on the transformation you offer and not just the price. Find out why offering fewer products makes it easier to create content and make sure you’re showing up for the right audience. Discover what people really mean when they say they ‘can’t afford you’ And how to avoid falling in the trap of dropping your prices JUST to win a new client. PLUS how to put your prices up with existing clients without it turning into an awkward conversation (and why you should put your prices up every year). You’ll learn how to deal with with the nightmare of scope creep and why having package prices will help you avoid sticky situations with clients. I’d love to know how you get on with this episode.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   About Sally Farrant and how she helps her clients (02:39) How developing a niche has helped Sally stand out in her business (04:52) How niching can help your business run more efficiently  (09:01) The biggest challenges small business owners have about pricing (10:11) Why you need to factor in everything you do into your pricing (11:52) Why pricing is an audience issue and why free doesn’t get valued (12:46) Why it's dangerous to make assumptions when you're pricing (13:43) Why people have to see the value in something before they buy it (16:28) Why you need to sell the results and the transformation (not just the price) (17:30) Why you should avoid copycat pricing (18:52) Why people need to understand why you are more expensive (23:04) What to do when people can’t afford you (and how to avoid discounting) (25:35) Why you need to be clear on your pricing (28:52) Why prices on your website will save you time and manage expectations (31:51) How to price your packages (and why it’s not all about your hourly rate) (35:02) How to deal with scope creep and ask for more budget (37:48) Tips for renegotiating pricing if your scope changes (38:25) Why you should put your prices up regularly (and how to do it) (39:03) Why boundaries will help you manage scope creep  (42:25) Why you should get people to pay upfront (43:35) Why you need to plan ahead  in case things go wrong (47:28) Why you need to create content about the value that you add (48:41) Resources Sally's website Business Growth by Numbers Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) [389] How to find your niche and why you need to with Jo Soley (podcast) [406] Mindset problems that can slow your audience growth with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [411] How to become the number one choice in your industry with Jen Hall (podcast) [416] Money mindset issues that can slow your audience growth with Catherine Morgan (podcast)   Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to create your own awareness day for your business or industry? Maybe you’ve got a great idea for an awareness day but you’ve got no idea how to create or promote it? Find out why awareness days are one of the BEST ways to make your business stand out from the crowd in this podcast episode with publicity expert Rachel Spencer. Rachel shares the key things that you need to think about when creating an awareness day and how to get maximum publicity for your awareness day. Discover why having your own awareness day is SO powerful and how to create a buzz about your awareness day BEFORE you launch it. Rachel helped me launch my own awareness day Love Your Diary Day and she shares examples of other entrepreneurs that she’s helped to launch awareness days for as well. I’d love to know if this episode has inspired you to launch your own awareness day.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   About this podcast episode  (01:10) About Rachel Spencer and how she helps her clients (06:53) What is an awareness day and what are they for (07:44) Why awareness days are great for creating content for the press (09:45) Why awareness days are really powerful for content creation (12:10) How to look for different angles if you’re using awareness days (14:05) Why you might want to create your own awareness day (14:56) Why I launched my own awareness day and how I promoted it (15:44) Why awareness days are so good for your business  (17:05) How Rachel created a buzz about Love my accountant day (21:10) How an awareness day can help build your authority (23:15) Why you need to think about your aim for your awareness day (24:22) Why your awareness day needs to be easy for people to take part in (26:16) How to create content for an awareness day and make a buzz before you launch (27:55) How to register an awareness day  (and what to do if you get turned down) (29:15) How to get your awareness day trending on Twitter (and why you should) (32:06) How to get in contact with Rachel Spencer (34:35 Resources Rachels website Publicity for Pet Businesses Connect with Rachel on social media Instagram, Facebook, Twitter Love Your Diary Day Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] How to sell your products or services at an online Christmas market (podcast) [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [309] How to go viral on Twitter with Kerry Jordan (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create engaging content about your business (podcast) [431] How much does it cost to host an online Christmas market or virtual pop up (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Want to plan and host your own online Christmas market or virtual pop up? Listen to this podcast I take you through the steps you need to take to create an online Christmas market - but can be applied to any type of virtual or online event. You’ll learn how to take your online sale from idea through to creation and everything I’ve learnt from running my own online virtual events. Including the best tech to use depending on your budget. Get clear on your aim for your sale (and why it’s not always about selling) AND how to map out your event from start to finish. Discover the content that you need to create to make your event a success from email sequences to testimonials. And why planning and creating your content in advance will save you tons of time when it comes to promoting your event. Find out why you need to think about your next online sale - before you finish mapping out your current one. Plus what you REALLY need in place - if you want to charge people a seller's fee or to get sponsorship for your online event. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes   Why you should be clear on your aim for your online sale (02:30) Why you need to consider your audience size before you plan your sale (03:20) How to start small and then go big (05:49) What you need to consider when planning your market (06:32) How to choose the tech for your online event (08:33) Why you need contingency plans in place at your online sale(10:19) Why you need to create a high-quality event if people are paying (11:25) How to map out your online sale from the start (12:17) The content/emails you need to create for onboarding your sellers (13:01) How to get your sellers together before the event (14:44) The functional content that you need to create for your online market (16:25) How to plan out a minute by minute schedule (18:01) What you need to do at the end of your event (19:11) Why you need to think of your next event while you plan your current event (20:15) How to get people to book onto your next event (22:10) How to think about sponsorship and charging a sellers fee (22:43) Why people value what they pay for (23:10) What you need to consider if you want to charge sellers for your event (23:49) Why a warm engaged audience is really valuable (25:30) Resources Listen to this podcast if you’d like to find out how much it will cost to host an online event. Join the waiting list for my Virtual Christmas market in a box Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] How to sell your products or services at an online Christmas market (podcast) [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) Seven podcasts to help you with your email marketing (blog post) [385] How to sell on Instagram Stories without feeling sleazy (podcast) [320] How to host a Christmas sale on Facebook Live (podcast) [426] The ultimate course launch checklist: how to plan and create content for a launch (podcast) [429] How to plan and run a sell-out virtual event (podcast) [431] How much does it cost to host an online Christmas market or virtual pop up (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Thinking about hosting your own online Christmas market or virtual pop up? Listen to this podcast episode and discover how much it really costs to host an online Christmas market or any kind of virtual online sale. I explain what’s possible at three different price points. I’ll talk you through the options and costs as to what you can do - depending on the budget you have. Find out how to go LIVE on a budget of £50 ($70), what you could achieve with a  budget of £500 ($700)  and how to make an impact with a really big budget of £5000 ($7000). I explain the costs for creating and hosting your online sale and everything you need to consider - especially if you want to charge sellers a fee to sell at your online market. Plus the one thing you need to have - no matter what your budget. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} **Scroll down to the show notes and to see other podcast episodes .**   Join my Christmas market as a seller here Podcast shownotes   Resources Join the waiting list for my Virtual Christmas market in a box Join my Christmas market as a seller here Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] How to sell your products or services at an online Christmas market (podcast) [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [385 ] How to sell on Instagram Stories without feeling sleazy (podcast) [320] How to host a Christmas sale on Facebook Live (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you thinking of selling your product or service at an online Christmas market? Perhaps you’re wondering what to sell or how to put your offer together? And how do you make a gift voucher for a service look as attractive as an actual physical product? Listen to this bonus podcast episode I’m sharing everything I’ve learnt from hosting my annual Facebook Live Christmas market. Get my tips and techniques for selling your product or service at a Facebook Live without feeling selly or scammy. Find out how to put your offer together and why it needs to be something that people want AND what could happen if you give people too much choice. I’m sharing tech tips to make sure your Facebook Live is slick and professional and why you must look the part. And the essentials you need to hand - to make sure your Facebook Live runs smoothly. Discover how to share your product or service with your Facebook Live audience and why you should show - but not tell people about your product or service. And why you need to think about the bigger picture - rather than how much money you make on the day. PLUS tips on how to promote your Christmas market on social media and why it's much more powerful to promote your event as team effort.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   **Scroll down to the shownotes and to see other podcast episodes .**   1. Plan  Create your offer  Avoid being random Don’t overwhelm people with choice. Create a focused collection rather than going to broad and confusing people with too much choice. What would make a really great gift? What would people love to open on Christmas day? If you’re a product-based business have a think about your products that go well together and focus on one part of your business. Or perhaps look at your highest selling products. You can still do this with a  service-based business but you just need to think what would make it a really great gift. How can you make a voucher more of an exciting gift. What could you include with it? If you’re a service-based business - it needs to be something people REALLY want. E.g. Bread-making classes - swag to go with it Career coaching - book to go with it? Singing lessons - practise recordings/lead sheets etc Create a dedicated URL or voucher code so you can track sales  One of my clients Beth was able to tell me she’d made £750 on my Christmas market sale last year. Memorise the URL - use bitly to create a memorable link. 2. Prepare  Think about how you can ‘show not tell’. Source any products/props that might be helpful for the broadcast. Even if you’re selling a service rather than a product, showing some of the things you use in your work - or even dressing in your work clothes (if you’re a therapist, baker or personal trainer for example) will help you tell the story of your business in a visual way. Devise and practice your ‘ten-word top line’ for your product/service e.g. ‘pre-picked and gifts for Christmas stockings for two to ten-year-olds’  or ‘style consultations for men who hate shopping’. The more specific you can be about what your product/service is and how it helps people...the more you’ll sell. Make a list of frequently asked questions. Write down every single question you’ve ever been asked about your product/service - or think you might get asked. That way, you’re unlikely to get ‘caught out’ on your Facebook Live. Decide where you’re going to do your broadcast. Things to consider include: lighting (position yourself where you’re facing a window if you don’t have lighting), sound (if you have a lapel mic consider using it. If not, just make sure you’re in a quiet space), make sure you have a good internet connection. Create a backup video - just in case you have a problem with your tech. I’m asking my Christmas market people to do this. 3. Promote  Promote the Christmas market to your followers. Don’t just post about it on social media (if you do, you’re likely to get very little engagement). Instead, think about how you can get your followers involved in the process. For example, you could ask them which product/service you should be selling at the market, what you should wear on the live broadcast, how you might style your backdrop. Make it as easy for people to engage as possible. As a general rule, closed questions generally work better than open. So instead of asking your followers what you should be selling (open question), give them a small number of options to choose from (closed). Instead of asking them what you should wear (open), post a pic of yourself in two possible outfits (seen that somewhere before?!) and ask them which they prefer (closed). Instead of asking for advice on styling your backdrop (closed), ask them if they prefer location A or location B (with pics). Other ways to promote your Christmas market to your social media followers: Instagram stories is great for this kind of content (particularly with the polls/questions option)....so get on there and have some fun! Instagram Reels 30-second video clips Email your list (if you have one) Do a Facebook Live previewing the market - share with your followers what you’ll be doing and when Encourage your followers to accept the join the Facebook event (that way they’ll get reminders nearer the time). Create an Instagram story showing you preparing for the market - people love behind-the-scenes content Remember that your success is not just about what YOU do as an individual - promote others and make it a team effort. Join my Christmas market as a seller here Podcast shownotes   About my online virtual Christmas market (01:41) How the format works for my Facebook Live virtual Christmas market (04:40) Why I’m charging people to sell at my online Christmas market (05:20) How to create the right offer to sell for an online virtual market (08:07) Why you shouldn’t overwhelm people with too many products and offers (09:40) Why your product has to be something that people want to receive as a gift (10:08) How to sell a service-based offer at an online Christmas market (11:55) Why you should create a trackable link/voucher code for your offer (13:28) Why it’s more than just what you sell on the Facebook Live (14:30) Why you need to show people your product and not just tell them (15:17) What you need to consider for your tech for a Facebook Live sale (16:31) How to introduce yourself and tips for selling on a Facebook Live (20:11) How to keep your intro simple and tell people what you do (23:35) Why you should have a list of your frequently asked questions (25:02) Why you should have a backup plan in case there's a tech problem (26:01) How to promote your online sale (and why you need to get involved) (27:01) How to get your audience involved in your Christmas market (28:50) How to promote your online Christmas market to your audience (29:47) Why it’s not selly or scammy selling on a Facebook Live sale (30:55) Resources Join my Christmas market as a seller here Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [385 ] How to sell on Instagram Stories without feeling sleazy (podcast) [320] How to host a Christmas sale on Facebook Live (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you fed up with staring at a blank page and wondering what to write your social media posts about? Would you love to make your content creation easy and fast? Listen to this podcast episode I share three social media content strategies for creating quick social media posts that your audience will love. Discover how to batch 30 days of social media posts in just 30 minutes - and how anyone can learn to create content fast - with my practical tips and techniques. Learn how to stop overthinking your content and just get it done. And why you should NEVER just talk about business in your social media posts. Find out why some of the best social media posts are so simple - and be amazed at how much time they save you. PLUS you can get 12 instant social media posts that you can use for January awareness days. I’d love to know if this helps you. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} I really suggest that you listen to the other podcast episodes below the shownotes if you want to explore different types of content creation. Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode (01:44) Why you need to be social on social media and not just post about your biz (3:01) How to use awareness days to create content for your business (4:42) How to reuse the same social media posts on all platforms (5:59) Ideas for January awareness day posts that you can use (7:14) How to make great social media posts by just about asking questions (10:01) How to curate content and share other people’s content on Instagram (12:57) How to research other people’s content and what to consider (15:50) The three types of caption you can use on your social media posts (17:20) How to create quick niche listicle posts for social media (20:14) Some ideas for creating listicle social media posts (22:36) How to think about creating topics for listicles (23:24) How to create social media posts fast and stop overthinking (24:26) How you can learn to create content quickly (26:30) What to do when you have posts that bomb (27:47) Why you can’t just post and go on your platforms (28:37) Why some engagement is better than no engagement (30:32) What to do if you’re not getting engagement on your posts (31:21) About my Social Media Diary & Planner (32:30) Resources Find out about my Batch like a boss masterclass Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast)[Bonus] How to get the most out of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner (podcast) [343] The three audiences that you must build to create a profitable online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year’s worth of content in one morning (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create engaging content about your business (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [405] The secret to creating bingeworthy content (podcast) [407] How to turn boring topics into engaging content (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you thinking of planning and running an online virtual event? Maybe you’d love to know how much it really costs and if it’s worthwhile doing? Listen to this podcast episode and find out everything I learnt from planning and running a sellout online virtual event 2021Sorted. Discover how I moved my annual LIVE in-person content planning event to a LIVE online virtual event. I share the costs involved and what you need to consider - from event insurance and contingency planning to entertaining people and making sure your event isn't one long dreary Zoom call. I explain the tech that was used to host and run my online virtual event - the essential things you need to have in place and what your team needs to do. Find out how I created a buzz about an online virtual event, sold tickets and why it was worth investing in Facebook Ads. PLUS how I made sure that everyone had the same networking opportunities that they would have at an in-person event. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Scroll down for more useful podcast episodes. Podcast shownotes   About this podcast episode (00:49) About my annual content planning event 2021 Sorted (02:04) How we told the delegates that it was moving online (04:18) Why I decided to move the event online rather than cancel (06:29) How I hired a virtual event producer and planned the event (07:29) How I created networking opportunities for delegates (08:38) How we used Zoom Rooms for networking (09:50) About the Level Up Sessions and the topics I chose (10:50) About the Keynote Speakers and topics (13:10) How much it cost me to run my live online virtual event (14:39) How we did our tech contingency planning for an online virtual event (16:23) How to get virtual online event insurance (18:59) How we kept people entertained at a virtual event (19:50) Other virtual online event and tech costs (21:09) How much I spent on Facebook Ads to promote a virtual event (22:26) Why you need to look beyond the cost of hosting a virtual online event (23:06) The tech that we used to stream the online virtual event live (24:08) How we made sure the speakers were in the right place (25:01) How we warmed everyone up for the individual sessions (26:11) Why we created lots of artwork for the event (27:34) How I sold tickets for my online virtual event 2021Sorted (27:53) How we created engagement and a buzz about the event (29:24) Why I’m creating  a podcast stream for the event (29:50) How to join 2021 Sorted after the event (31:38) Resources Ecamm Live Join my 2021 Sorted Club Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to get the most out of attending my 2021 Sorted virtual event (podcast)[Bonus] How to get the most out of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner (podcast) [250] How to use email marketing to promote live events (podcast) [343] The three audiences that you must build to create a profitable online business (podcast) [421] Seven signs you're ready to run Facebook Ads (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you struggle to create content and stick to a content plan? Would you love to show up online regularly and create great content - but you just can't ever make the time? Perhaps you start with good intentions and you struggle with being consistent or you can't think what to post and it becomes days or weeks before you post anything again. Maybe creating social media content has become just another thing on your to-do list? Or perhaps you spend ages creating BRILLIANT pieces of content and it goes out and NO ONE responds and you just feel like giving up? If any of that sounds familiar you'll love this podcast episode. I explain the seven problems that people have with creating regular content and how to overcome them. Find out what type of content creator you are and what you need to think about BEFORE you create your content. Plus the ONE thing your content must-do if you're going to get people engaging with you. Listen and find out what could be holding you back in your content creation and why you can't rely on your will power alone to make you do something if you're NOTfeeling the love for it. Discover how to make content creation your thing and what to do if you really don't enjoy it. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Scroll down for more useful podcast episodes.   Podcast shownotes   About my content planning event 2021 Sorted (01:30) How to catch up with 2021 Sorted  if you missed it live (02:45) Some background to this podcast episode (04:09) Why you can’t force yourself to stick to a content plan (14:50) Why people find it hard to stick to a content plan (16:23) Why it’s hard to create content if you haven’t got a business plan (17:05) Why you need to figure out your audience before you plan your content (18:05) Why your content isn’t getting any engagement (19:10) Why you have to understand your audiences emotional needs (19:50) What to think about if you don’t know what sort of content to create (20:30) Why you should create content according to the buying journey of your audience (24:08) The three different types of content that you can create (30:06) Why you have to make the time to create content (31:29) How to get accountability to make sure you create content (32:40) Why your social media platform might be holding you back (35:06) Why batching content might work for you (37:45) The three type of content creator (38:40) Why you should delegate the parts of content creation you don’t like (40:54) Why you shouldn’t let other people’s content hold you back (42:42) Why your self-beliefs could be holding you back from creating content (44:35) Why you have to find your thing (47:41) Resources Join my live online event 2021 Sorted Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to get the most out of attending my 2021 Sorted virtual event (podcast)[Bonus] How to get the most out of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner (podcast)   [343] The three audiences that you must build to create a profitable online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year’s worth of content in one morning (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create engaging content about your business (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [405] The secret to creating bingeworthy content (podcast) [407] How to turn boring topics into engaging content (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Have you bought my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner and you’re wondering how best to use it? Perhaps you struggle to create content about your business and you’d love some inspiration about how to think creatively and plan your content? If that sounds familiar then this special bonus podcast episode is for you. Discover how to use my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner to plan an entire year’s worth of content around your business by creating yearly/quarterly/monthly/weekly content plans. I share practical tips about how to get the most out of your diary and how to use your diary to inspire creative sparks that will help you plan and create content - that is REALLY engaging and starts conversations with your ideal clients and customers. You’ll find out the ONE thing that you need to do BEFORE you start planning and creating your content. I share examples of the types of content that you can create - so that you can get maximum results and engagement and why you don’t always have to talk about your business. Find out how to use the awareness days in the diary to create sales points in your business (especially if you sell the same product or service all year round) Haven’t got your 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner yet? Then scroll to the link below. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my live online event 2021 Sorted Find out about my 2021 Sorted Club and upgrade your diary here Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Find out more about my Janet Murray affiliate scheme Podcast show notes   About my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner (02:08) What you need to think about before using your planner (04:03) Why you need to think about your ideal customer clients need from you (05:30) The three different types of audience you need to create content for (07:09) Why you need to create content about objections to your product/service (09:40) What is awareness content and why you should create it (11:31) Why you need to make time to work on your content plan (13:24) Why there’s no right or wrong way to use your 2021 Social Media Diary (15:01) How to start creating your annual plan with a yearly overview (16:32) Why you might need a business plan before you create your content plan (17:53) Why you can’t sell the same product/service the same way all year (19:26) How to plan your year and where you can create peak points (20:07) How to create your own peak points with awareness days (23:40) How to plan your quarterly content (25:45) How to plan a regular piece of content every week (27:35) Why you should time your content with what you’re selling (30:01) Why every piece of content doesn't have to be about your business (32:09) How to create your monthly and weekly content plans (34:20) How to repurpose your core piece of content (35:34) About my 2021 Sorted Club (38:20) Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner (podcast) [Bonus] Should you attend my 2021 Sorted content planning event  (podcast) [343] The three audiences that you must build to create a profitable online business (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create engaging content about your business (podcast) [407] How to turn boring topics into engaging content (podcast) [422] Behind the scenes of my launch how I sold £10K of planners in 24 hours (podcast)

Want to become a better online teacher? And create online classes, that people can’t stop talking about and really make people sit up and listen? Perhaps you've taught a few online classes but you’re worried that people get bored or you worry that you're doing it all WRONG? Maybe you’re thinking of launching some online training or creating a webinar or masterclass? But you're not sure how to plan your lesson and how to engage people? If any of this sounds familiar then this podcast episode is a must-listen. You’ll learn how to create lessons that people can’t get enough of and how to really stand out in the online teaching world. I share the three questions that you need to ask yourself when planning an online class or training session - so that you can give people the BEST learning experience. Find out how to bring your training to life and keep people interested and the most powerful thing that your online teaching can do for someone. I’m sharing practical tips and quick wins that you can use to transform your online classes - which will help you generate MORE online income. PLUS why you must take online training seriously if you're using it to build your authority in your industry. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Scroll down for more podcast episodes and resources that you can use. Podcast shownotes About my annual content planning event 2021 Sorted (01:20) About this podcast episode and why I recorded it (8:09) Why most people need to learn how to be a good teacher (10:09) About my masterclass teacher training for online course creators (12:05) The 3 important questions I ask myself before teaching online (13:04) Why stories can help people relate and bring your training to life (15:20) Why you should use closed and open-ended questions (16:32) How to use closed questions at the beginning/end of a training session (18:24) How to use polls and quizzes to break up the flow of the training session (21:23) Why questions are so important in the learning process (23:01) Why showing and not telling helps people remember things (24:10) Why you need to mix up your teaching for the different learning styles (27:01) How to use groups online or pair work to encourage learning (28:28) Why a transformation in the training session is really important (30:22) Why giving live feedback can change the pace of a class (32:44) Why you should encourage people to share relatable stories (34:50) My biggest fear about guests teachers (39:51) Why you need to take online teaching seriously if you’re building your authority (40:28) How you can see me in action teaching (40:55) Resources Find out more about my masterclass: Teacher training for online course creators Find out more about by masterclass: How To Plan And Create Awesome Teaching Resources For An Online Course Join my live online event 2021 Sorted Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Find out more about my Janet Murray affiliate scheme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to get the most out of attending my 2021 Sorted virtual event (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [418] How long does it take to create an online course (podcast) [419] How to share client testimonials without looking like a show-off (podcast) [423] How to deal with freeloaders by creating a Power Hour (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you planning to launch a course or membership...but feel overwhelmed by the idea of all the content you might have to create? If so, you’ll love this podcast episode: The ultimate course launch checklist: how to plan and create content for a course/membership launch   Here’s what I’ll cover: ✔️ The two different types of content you need to create (and why it’s better to create one before the other) ✔️ My launch checklist (i.e. the essential content I think you need to create for a launch) ✔️ The three different launch phases (and what you should be publishing in each). Discover how you can save time by repurposing content that you create and how much time you'll really need for your launch. PLUS I have a free download where you can get a copy of my launch checklist (scroll to the end for the link) {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Scroll down for more podcast episodes and resources that you can use Podcast shownotes About my launch content intensive one to one (03:46) The different types of content that you need to create for a launch (5:31) What functional content is and why you need to create it (6:14) Why you should write a project overview (and how to do it) (8:23) Why you need to nail your offer or your sell in your sales page (10:30) How to map out sales page content and information you need (14:15) Why you need to spend time getting your testimonials right (16:09) Why you need to have an FAQ section and use this for content creation (20:41) What you need to consider for onboarding emails (24:07) How to repurpose functional content into marketing content (27:01) The types of email needed for a launch and how to save time (30:19) How to repurpose your sales page into social media posts (32:28) How to plan core content strategically around what you’re selling (33:22) Why you need to consider the type of content in relation to the sale you want (34:57) Why you need to give yourself enough time to launch (37:35) How to build authority with content (and why you need to do this) (40:07) How to create content that makes a buzz about a launch (45:25) Why you need to create content about objections (48:16) How to repurpose functional content into consideration content (49:20) How long should you allow for a launch time (51:03) Resources Get a copy of  The ultimate course launch checklist Join my live online event 2021 Sorted Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Find out more about my Janet Murray affiliate scheme Scheduling tools Calendly or Acuity Scheduling Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner? (podcast) [Bonus] How to get the most out of attending my 2021 Sorted virtual event (podcast) [386] The four types of content that will make you more sales in your business (podcast) [414] How much does it cost to launch your own planner (podcast) [418] How long does it take to create an online course (podcast) [419] How to share client testimonials without looking like a show-off (podcast) [422] How I sold £10K of planners in 24 hours behind the scenes of my latest launch (podcast)[423] How to deal with freeloaders by creating a Power Hour (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Attending my 2021 Sorted virtual event and wondering how to get the most out of the experience? Perhaps you haven’t attended a virtual event before and you’re wondering how to get the most out of the experience. Here’s everything you need to know to get the most out of my 2021 Sorted content planning event. If you're not attending my 2021Sorted virtual event and you'd like to know more about it then head to the links at the end. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} 1. Block out Nov 3 and 4 in your diary. Having a couple of days to work on your business rather (than in it) is a gift. So make sure you've got those days blocked out in the diary and have organised childcare. If you can, book a hotel... although make sure you have decent wifi. Timings: 9:30am - 4:00pm both days Virtual bar: 7-10pm 2. Add other key dates to your diary Event briefing: Tuesday October 27 @2pm GMT (30 mins) Content planning masterclass: Nov 26 Coaching calls: Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 3. Connect with other delegates social media before the event. Join the event Facebook group if you haven't already (and go introduce yourself). Follow our Twitter lists for speakers and delegates. Make lists of others attending the event you'd like to connect with. What are you going to sell? Create your own shareable #2021Sorted images with our Canva templates...and start telling people about the event. We also have generic images here. 4. Research the speakers/sessions and connect on social media Day 1 Keynote sessions How to plan, create and launch a podcast in 2021 with Colin Gray aka The Podcast Host Launch a profitable online course in 2021 with Janet Murray Self-publish a book in 2021 with Sacha Black How to launch a membership site in 2021 with Membership Guys founder Mike Morrison Launch or revive your Youtube channel in 2021 with Steve Dotto How to launch a live video show with Ian Anderson Gray Day 1 Level Up sessions Level Up sessions are guide discussions that focus on a range of issues that impact entrepreneurs - but dont always get the attention they need/deserve e. g. mental health, dealing with copycats/trolls, running your business around a family & more. You'll hear from a panel of expert speakers, then break into groups (in Zoom rooms) and talk with other delegates. How to be more inclusive in your marketing Copycats, trolls and other troublemakers: dealing with the dark side of online business How to run a business around your kids How to look after your mental health as an entrepreneur How to set healthy boundaries with customers/clients How to stay focused and get things done Women in podcasting Women in tech Day 2 Keynote sessions How to create consistently good content in uncertain times with Janet Murray How to be brilliant on video (even if you're camera shy) with Janine Cummings How to write super engaging content about your business with Jo Watson Advertainment: How to create entertaining content that drives engagement & sales with Dan Knowlton Day 2 Level Up sessions Women in tech Women in podcasting 5. Research ideas for a blog post/Youtube/podcast Try to find an event angle: For example: Stylist - how to dress for a virtual event Nutritionist - what to eat at a virtual event Social media manager - how to create content for a virtual event Take advantage of event SEO. 6. Update your website You are going to get more people visiting your website, your social media channels - so why not take advantage of the opportunity? Sort broken links, update offers, take down old offers. 7. Plan your social media strategy Most conferences and events have a dedicated Twitter hashtag you can use before, during and after the event (#2021 Sorted) which can be a great way to find and stay in touch with other delegates. Hashtags can get pretty busy during events though, so using an app like Hootsuite or Tweetdeck can help you stay on top of things. Some may also have dedicated geofilters for Snapchat and/or Instagram, so if you're active on those platforms, do ask the event organiser about it. Blogging and/or creating social media content before, during and after the event is a great way to stay top of mind with speakers - and other delegates. 8. Stock up on essentials E. g. snacks, stationery 9. Test your tech Check your Speed If possible, please use a wired internet connection (i. e. plug directly into your router). This can greatly improve the speed and stability of your internet. Check Devices - If possible, check what other devices you have connected to your internet. iPads, games consoles and other computers can use up your internet bandwidth in the background and downgrade the quality of your connection. And tell the kids to stay off Netflix. Reboot your computer - not always needed, but sometimes a reboot makes sure your computer plays nicely Close down apps - Close down as many apps running in the background. If you have apps running in the background, such as Dropbox, Google Drive etc. These can use up bandwidth and slow down your computer Test your microphone Noise Phones/Alarms - Make sure you silence any phones or devices so you don't get interrupted Interruptions - I know this sounds obvious, but if there is anyone else around, make sure you tell them not to disturb you while were recording! Background noise - If possible, switch off fans or any noisy things in the background (and put children and animals in another room! They're cute but distracting! ) Arrive 10 mins before sessions - make a note of all the links you need etc. 10. Schedule in time for follow up It's easy to leave a conference full of brilliant ideas - that's what events are all about. Sadly, it's just as easy to get bogged down the minute you get back to your desk, forget everything you've learned and not follow up on the opportunities you've created. Make sure this doesnt happen to you by blocking out a few hours (ideally as soon as you get back to your desk) to reflect on what you've learned and follow up on the connections you've made. 11. Don't be a wallflower Come to the virtual bar - the socialising is where the best conversations happen. Ask for help if you need it.... we can't help if we don't know. Level Up sessions - perfect for introverts... BONUS: sign up as an affiliate and make back the cost of your ticket! Join my live online event 2021 Sorted  Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Find out more about my Janet Murray affiliate scheme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner (podcast) [Bonus] Should you attend my 2021 Sorted content planning event  (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [400] How to build a large audience for a blog, vlog or podcast (podcast)| [407] How to turn boring topics into engaging content (podcast) [422] Behind the scenes of my launch how I sold £10K of planners in 24 hours (podcast)

Wondering whether you should attend my 2021 Sorted content planning event on Nov 3 & 4?  In this podcast episode (which you can also read as a blog post) I’ll tell you more about the event to help and the kind of results you can expect if you attend. By the time you’ve listened to this podcast episode (or read this blog post), you should be able to make a decision whether to buy a ticket. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   While it’s tempting to start with the features of the event, I know what you’re really interested in is the potential transformation i.e. what kind of results can you expect if you attend.  So first off, I’ll give you a quick overview of the event. Then I’ll share some success stories of people who attended the event last year. About the event 2021 Sorted is my annual content planning event for coaches, creatives and entrepreneurs. The event is taking place on November 3 & 4. The aim of the event is to take the pain out of content planning - by giving you the accountability and support to create your 2021 content plan, live at the event.  It’s also about getting inspired. Which is why the event also features talks/workshops from some of the world’s leading content creators on how to plan and create engaging content that will help you generate sales for your business.  The event - which usually takes place in person - is now in its fifth year. And while it has moved online this year, due to government restrictions on large gatherings, it’s meant we can host more speakers and more sessions (more on that later).  With over £800 of content...investing in a 2021 Sorted ticket offers insane value - and support for the WHOLE of 2021 - and not just at the event. What kind of results can you expect from attending the event? The number 1 reason people keep coming back to my content planning masterclass,  year after year, is because they save tons of time - by getting their content plan created for the year, in just a couple of days. Your 2021 Sorted ticket includes both a physical and digital version of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner. Which is not just a pretty-looking diary. It’s a content planning tool that includes step-by-step instructions on how to create your annual, quarterly, monthly, weekly and daily content plans...and includes templates and checklists to help you stay on track, throughout the year. PLUS hundreds of awareness days and key dates you can use to generate content ideas.   This is what hospitality expert Mark Simpson has to say about the content planning strategies I teach at 2021 Sorted and how they have helped him.  But it’s not just about saving time. Showing up more consistently with your content - content that is well-thought out - rather than rushed out at the last minute - can make a huge difference to the bottom line of your business. Attending last year’s Content Planning event inspired Amy Caiger to launch a podcast. She has now published 30 episodes and it’s helped her land speaking gigs, guest podcast interviews and more clients. This is what she has to say about how the event helped.  Attending last year’s event helped journalist and publicity expert Rachel Spencer launch a membership site and generate recurring income for her business - she’s on target to reach over £20k. Here’s what she had to say about how attending the event has helped her. What’s included in your 2021 Sorted ticket?Your 2021 Sorted ticket includes two days of training.  Day 1 (Nov 3) is all about Inspiration. You’ll hear from some of the world’s most inspiring content creators on how to create engaging content in 2021 and beyond.  Day 2 (Nov 4) is all about Implementation. This is the day when you’ll sit down and create your content plan for the coming year (I’ll literally walk you through it, step by step).  Day 1 keynote sessionsHow to plan, create and launch a podcast in 2021 with Colin Gray aka The Podcast Host Launch a profitable online course in 2021 with Janet Murray Self-publish a book in 2021 with Sacha Black How to launch a membership site in 2021 with Membership Guys founder Mike Morrison Launch or revive your Youtube channel in 2021 with Steve Dotto How to launch a live video show with Ian Anderson Gray Day 1 Level Up sessions Level Up sessions are guide discussions that focus on a range of issues that impact entrepreneurs - but don’t always get the attention they need/deserve e.g. mental health,  dealing with copycats/trolls, running your business around a family & more. You’ll hear from a panel of expert speakers, then break into groups (in Zoom rooms) and talk with other delegates.  How to be more inclusive in your marketing: Copycats, trolls and other troublemakers: dealing with the dark side of online business How to run a business around your kids  How to look after your mental health as an entrepreneur How to set healthy boundaries with customers/clients How to stay focused and get things done  Women in podcasting  Women in tech Day 2 Keynote sessions   How to create consistently good content in uncertain times with Janet Murray How to be brilliant on video (even if you're camera shy) with Janine Cummings How to write super engaging content about your business with Jo Watson Advertainment: How to create entertaining content that drives engagement & sales with Dan Knowlton   Day 2 Level Up sessions Women in tech Women in podcasting  And the support doesn’t stop on the day.  This year, you also get FREE membership of my 2021Sorted Club - which means you get support with your content creation and planning - throughout 2021. This includes a weekly email from me with ideas on how to use the awareness dates in the diary, four quarterly coaching calls (which will give you the accountability to make sure your content plan is in place for the following quarter) and a digital version of the diary.    What’s included in the 2021 Sorted Club? ✔️ Your 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner  ✔️ A ticket for my 2021 Sorted event on Nov 3 & 4 (plus all the recordings if you can’t make that date or buy after the live event)   ✔️ A digital version of the diary (both a pdf version and and file you can use to add the awareness days/key dates to your diary)  ✔️ A weekly email from me with ideas on how you can use the dates in the diary to generate social media posts, blogs, newsletters etc  ✔️ My Content Planning Masterclass on Thursday, November 26  ✔️ Four group coaching calls across the year, to keep you on track with your content creation/planning✔️ Additional resources and templates to help with  your content planning FAQs I’m not sure if 2021 Sorted is right for my business If you need to plan and create engaging content about your business in 2021 and beyond, 2021 Sorted can help (and yes that does include both product and service-based businesses). There is a full list of the types of businesses it can help on the sales page for 2021 Sorted (and examples of the types of businesses who’ve attended in the past) but the bottom line is this. If you need to create and plan content...it will work for you/your business. The only question you need to be asking about this...will you do the work to make it all happen?  I don’t have time to attend 2021 Sorted  Taking a couple of days out of your business to plan out your content will save hours of time in the long run. So the real question here is: do you really have time NOT to?  I’m not in the UK and some of the sessions are a bit early/late for me That’s no problem...as you’ll get all the recordings.   I’ve tried content planning before and it didn’t work Just because you tried something and it didn’t work, that doesn’t mean it will never work. I joined and left five gyms before I found one that suited me (and an exercise habit that stuck). And I’ve seen exactly the same thing happen with people who say that can’t do content planning.   Find out more about my 2021 Sorted  event Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Find out more about my Janet Murray affiliate scheme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner (podcast) [326] The one thing you need to generate a passive income in your business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast)

Want to generate additional income in your business? Affiliate marketing can be a great way to generate additional income in your business - and leverage the audience you already have -  without creating new products/services. But what’s the best way to get started as an affiliate? How do you generate a decent income as an affiliate? And are there any downsides to being an affiliate? Read on and find out. PLUS find out how much you might expect to earn as an affiliate and you can become an affiliate for Janet Murray products/services. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Step 1: Make a list of products/services you already use and love Start by making a list of products/services you already use and love  that - crucially - will also be relevant  to your audience. For example, I am an affiliate for the transcription service Rev, the landing page tool Lead pages and the video editing tool Kapwing - all tools I use regularly in my work. Which makes it easy to create content about these tools for my audience. While you can be an affiliate for any product/service you’ll find it much easier (and quicker) to create content about products you know and love. And yes you will need to create content as an affiliate. When it comes to making buying decisions, social proof is huge. So it’s not enough to say you love a particular product/service. If you want to make decent money as an affiliate, you’ll need to show them how brilliant the products/services you recommend are. And how they could make a difference to their business/life This doesn’t mean you have to create highly-produced trailers or demo videos. Pictures, screenshots and/or simple videos shot on your mobile phone can be enough to show people it’s worth investing in the products/services you recommend. For example, this blog post I created on how to add closed captions to your social media videos using Rev and Kapwing. Step 2: Sign up to be an affiliate  Once you’ve made your list of products/services you’d love to be head over to their websites. Many will have a dedicated affiliate page where you can sign up. If they don’t, shoot them an email to ask if they have an affiliate programme and take it from there. Step 3: Gather resources for your affiliate content  As with anything in business/life, the more you put in, the more you will get out. So putting aside some time to create affiliate content is vital. Some affiliate scheme owners will have dedicated affiliate packs, which will include swipe copy (sample copy) and artwork you can use to create content. If this is available, do use it. Not only will this help ensure you are sharing accurate information about the product/service you are promoting. It will also save you tons of time. If affiliate content is not available, you can create your own: A good affiliate pack will include: ✔️ Email marketing copy ✔️ Social media posts (different word lengths for different platforms) ✔️ Images If you want to increase your affiliate income, you can add: ✔️ Demo videos ✔️ Blog posts, podcast episodes, Youtube videos While there is more effort involved in creating full-on blog posts, podcast episodes and Youtube videos Consider adding bonus content you think might appeal to your audience. For example, I have seen affiliates for Marie Forleo’s B-School offering dedicated Facebook groups, training sessions and even a mastermind day in Paris. But do be careful with this one. For example, last year I noticed someone was selling Power Hours teaching people how to use Janet Murray’s Social Media Diary & Planner. They weren’t even an affiliate. For me this was a big no no, as I don’t currently offer a licence for people to teach my content planning system. If people want to be taught my content planning system, they can purchase my 2021 Sorted Club. So if you are going to offer a bonus, it’s better to offer a complimentary product/service i.e. a resource/class that might also be of interest. If in doubt, run your idea past the business owner first. Step 4: Create your affiliate content (focus on the benefits rather than the features One of the biggest mistakes I see people making with affiliate schemes is focusing on the features rather than how the product/service can help people. So before you start to create your affiliate content, start by making a list of the problems your product/services solves. Let’s use my 2021 Sorted Club as an example. The 2021 Sorted Club is for busy business owners who need help with content planning and creation. Their biggest problems are lack of time, ideas and struggling to stay consistent with their content (which stems from the first two problems). So if I was an affiliate for my 2021 Sorted Club, rather than talk about the features of the product, I would share content that showed how the diary and resources helped me - and others - save time and money. So my content list might include: ✔️ Videos of me showing the inside of the diary ✔️ Photos of how I use the diary to plan (some including me planning with my diary) ✔️ Screenshots of posts I’ve created using the diary/resources - particularly ones that saved me time, made me money and/or got more engagement than usual ✔️ Screenshot of the copy from the weekly Content Inspo email ✔️ Posts about me taking part in the group coaching ✔️ Social media and blog post(s) about how I used the diary  to create content (that saved me time and money) ✔️ Social media and blog post(s) about how I am getting ready for the 2021 Sorted event and what I’ve gained from attending previous events ✔️ Content that tackles peoples’ objections Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Podcast shownotes   About 2021 Sorted my live online content planning event (01:01) About this podcast episode (06:20) What is an affiliate marketing scheme (6:52) How do you get started with affiliate marketing (07:46) Why your affiliate marketing has to be relevant to your business and your audience (08:02) Why you need to create content if you want to make some serious money (9:14) Why your need to create content that has social proof (10:35) How to find out if a product or service has an affiliate scheme (11:54) Why you will need to create some content for your affiliate marketing (12:43) Why you should take time to create really good affiliate content (14:50) How to encourage people to sign up with bonus content (16:28) What your affiliate content needs to focus on (18:01) Types of affiliate content that you can create for my 2021Sorted event (21:57) How to create objection content and why you need to (23:06) How much money can you make from affiliate marketing? (24:36) Why you might need a big audience if you want to sell a big-ticket affiliate scheme (24:59) Why you shouldn’t randomly post about affiliate marketing (26:30) About my new affiliate scheme for my products (28:26)     Resources Join my Janet Murray affiliate scheme Rev Kapwing Buy a ticket for 2021 Sorted Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner (podcast) [324] How to stop talking about video and just do it with Dan Knowlton (podcast) [346] How to look and feel more confident on live video with Ian Anderson Grey (podcast) [347] How to create engaging social media videos (even if you hate being on camera) (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn  

Are you mystified by YouTube? Would you love some clear practical strategies to get people to watch your videos and get more subscribers on your YouTube channel? If so then you'll love this podcast episode with YouTube expert Justin Brown. Justin demystifies YouTube and explains what you really need to do if you want to grow an audience on YouTube and get your videos seen by MORE people. Listen and discover how the YouTube algorithm works (and how you can help te algorithm show your YouTube videos to MORE people). Find out if subscribers are really more important than views and why keywords should be your number one priority on YouTube. If you're just starting on YouTube then listen as Justin explains why your thumbnails are so important (and how to get them right), why optimisation is crucial and the five things that you need to do to make sure people stop scrolling and watch your videos rather than someone else's. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Join my Build Your Online Audience programme Build Your Online Audience programme Podcast shownotes   About my 2021 Sorted Annual Content planning event (01:09) What Justin does and how he became a YouTube expert (7:57) Why you need a budget for marketing your videos (10:49) Where people struggle with creating video (12:06) Why you need to create content that people want to see (13:07) Why you should start your keyword research before you create your video (13:38) The three things your YouTube video has to do (15:20) How to approach a YouTube video strategy based on search (20:40) Why keyword research is important for your YouTube video title (24:30) Why you shouldn’t avoid the popular search terms (26:27) How the YouTube algorithm works (27:55) Why YouTube subscriber numbers are a vanity metric (30:39) Why thumbnails are so important to get views on your video (32:02) The five-step video process that Justin uses to hook people in (33:40) How to create a good video experience for people (36:44) How long should your YouTube videos be (38:17) How to make sure that people stick with your YouTube video to the end (39:40) Why your video needs to be clear and concise (40:20) What kit do you really need and why your audio is most important (41:38) Why your first videos won’t be perfect (and how to make them better) (43:58) Why consistency is important and what you need to remember (45:30) How to use your competitor's YouTube videos to research (46:01) Why the first 24 hours are really important for your YouTube videos (47:29) Why you should have a re-optimising strategy for your older YouTube videos (49:40)   Resources   Justin's website Justin's YouTube channel Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social media Diary & Planner (podcast) [324] How to stop talking about video and just do it with Dan Knowlton (podcast) [346] How to look and feel more confident on live video with Ian Anderson Grey (podcast) [347] How to create engaging social media videos (even if you hate being on camera) (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Do people ever ask if they can pick your brain….but don’t seem to want to pay for it? If that sounds familiar you need to create a Power Hour - an online consultancy session where you give specific advice/guidance...and actually get paid for it. The great thing about a Power Hour is that you can ‘productise’ i.e. turn it into a rinse/repeat process that you go through with every customer who books one (saving you tons of time). You can use a Power Hour as a paid ‘discovery call’ where you deliver value and - if your client seems like a good fit - upsell them another product/service afterwards. And to research ideas for bigger projects e.g. coaching/consulting packages, courses and events. But how do you choose a topic for your Power Hour? What tech will you need to deliver it? And how much should you charge? That’s exactly what I’ll cover in this podcast episode - along with tips on how to promote your Power Hour. And yes, you can create one regardless of whether you have a product/service-based business {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} What is a Power Hour? A Power Hour is an online consultancy session where you give specific advice/guidance...and actually get paid for it. Contrary to the name - a Power Hour doesn’t actually have to be an hour long. It can be as short/long as you need it to be.  You can call it a Power Session if you like (or something else entirely). The important thing is that you get paid for your advice/experience. Why I love Power Hours There are so many reasons why I love Power Hours. Here's just a few: ✔️  They’re a great way to deal with people who ask to pick your brain for free (you can just simply say ‘I’d love to help you with that....here’s a link to my Power Hour’ ✔️ You can use a Power Hour as a paid ‘discovery call’ where you deliver value and - if your client seems like a good fit - upsell them another product/service afterwards. ✔️  You can use a Power Hour to research ideas for bigger projects e.g. coaching/consulting packages, courses and events. For example, when I was launching my Instagram Success Academy course, I did a number of Power Hours so I could understand what I should cover in my course ✔️  You can use a Power Hour as a  downsell people for people who don’t have the budget for your high-end offer but still need your help ✔️  You can use a Power Hour to ‘top-up’ coaching programmes/memberships/courses. For example, if a member is being particularly demanding of your time in a Facebook community, you can invite them to book in a 1-2-1/additional call ✔️  You can turn your Power Hour into a rinse/repeat process that you go through with every customer who books one (saving you tons of time) ✔️  You can book clients in for multiple Power Hours for problems that take longer to solve How to choose a topic for your Power Hour  The important thing is that you get paid for your advice/experience. As with anything in your business, the more specific/niche you can be the better. So while you can offer a general Power Hour (where anyone can ask you anything about your expert topic) you’ll almost certainly get more take up if you hone in on a specific type of customer/client and/or a common problem your customers/clients experience. If you have two or three areas, you can offer a few choices (but not too many). Here are some examples of effective Power Hours, created by my current/former clients: Amy Caiger has a Power Hour that focuses on helping business owners find their niche. Architectural technologist Jon Clayton has a Power Hour for people who are interested in renovating their house. He started charging £195 for an hour on Zoom or £295 for a local home visit. This resulted in £600 of sales immediately. Diversity consultant Leyla Okhai offers a number of different options including diversity, worklife balance and wellbeing. Can you create a Power Hour if you have a product-based business? If you have a product-based business, you can still create a Power Hour. You can either offer something that relates to the problem you solve. For example, I sell a Social Media Diary & Planner. Although I don’t currently do this, I could offer a content planning Power Hour for people who want help creating their content plan. I could offer these sessions to existing diary owners as an upsell.  Or I could open them up to anyone who needs help with content planning and offer the diary as an upsell at the end of a consultancy session. Or you could offer a Power Hour to other product-based businesses on how to do something specific that you are already doing successfully but they might be struggling with e.g. creating a marketing plan, setting up a shop on their website. How to deliver your Power Hour You can use video-conferencing software like Zoom which allows you to share your screen and participants share theirs with you. You can also share documents and chat ‘live’ with participants. And you can send them the recording afterwards in case they want to go over anything again. Zoom starts from £11.99 a month. Alternatives to Zoom: Go To Meeting, Team Viewer, Join.me, Google Hangouts, Meet.me & BlueJeans. If you’re worried your clients will be overwhelmed by the tech, it’s a good idea to send them written instructions and/or a video using a free tool like Loom showing them how to use it (including how to join). How to ensure your Power Hour is productive To ensure the session is productive, I’d recommend you do the following: Create a dedicated page on your website for you Power Hour that includes information about the session and a link to book Use a tool like Calendly or Acuity Scheduling so clients can book straight into your diary Send a pre-call email on how to prepare for the session (including any information they might need to bring to the session) and an outline of how the call will be structured. PLUS  instructions on how to use the video conferencing software from their phone/desktop. I’d recommend sending this information immediately after booking, then at least one reminder email before the call Send a follow-up email within 24 hours of the session, with a link to the recording, a short follow-up report with details of what was discussed and up to three key action points (one side of A4 should be plenty). These emails can be re-used and adapted - saving you hours of time in the long run. In fact, the whole process can be automated so people can book straight into your diary, are delivered the link to join the call and reminders before the call. I include template/swipe files for these types of emails in my online masterclass: how to create and sell a Power Hour for your business. If you’re worried that what you teach/coach can’t be delivered online, I’ve personally worked with a pilates instructor, bread making teacher, psychologist, personal trainer and jewellery- making teacher - all of whom deliver their training/consultancy online. And if they can do it, so can you. How to price your Power Hour Your pricing should reflect the transformation you can create for your client - not how long it takes you to prepare and deliver the session. That’s said, you do need social proof. You can’t charge £500 + VAT an hour for a Power Hour if you haven’t achieved results - or helped others achieve results - that support that. Many of my clients start with £99 to £149 and, as they get more experienced - and get more tangible results - put their prices up. So start by thinking about the transformation you can create for someone and the impact that could have on their life/business. It can help to spell out the return on investment for your clients. So for example, if I could give you some advice on your sales copy that would help 5x your investment, would you think £500 +VAT was expensive? Probably not. It’s all about how you frame it. But you do need to have the experience to match your pricing. You can’t charge £500 + VAT for your Power Hour just because someone else in your industry is doing it (well you can, but you may not make any sales). So if you haven’t yet delivered any Power Hours it can be worth offering a number of discounted sessions so you can gather testimonials. I wouldn’t recommend offering them for free. People generally don’t value what they get for free. Which means they’re more likely to cancel/show up late to the session and less likely to implement your advice. Even a modest fee will ensure they have some skin in the game. How to promote your Power Hour If you already have an email list - great.  Simply email your list, tell them about your Power Hour and (providing you’ve created the right offer for the right audience) you should get bookings. I’d also recommend doing some social media promotion too. If you have a blog/podcast/Youtube channel, it’s also worth sharing information about it there. If you don’t have an email list (or only have a small list) you’ll need to use proactive outreach. That means making a list of people you know (e.g. current/former clients) who might be interested in your offer. PLUS asking for recommendations/referrals from friends/colleagues. If you’re not sure how to get started with proactive outreach, the first module in my Build Your Online Audience programme focuses on exactly that topic (and includes email/message templates you can adapt for proactive outreach). Need help building your email list? Check out: 39 Surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers  I also have an email list building programme inside my Build Your Online Audience programme Podcast shownotes   What is a power hour and why I love them (4:22) Why a power hour stops you feeling like you have to give stuff away (6:08) How a power hour helps you decide if you want to work with someone (7:42) How to use power hours to research ideas for bigger projects (08:03) Why power hours are great if someone hasn’t enough budget for you (09:38) How you can make more money using power hours in a coaching programme (10:31) How to use power hours for a specific project (11:34) How to prep and manage people’s expectations (12:50) How to choose a topic for your power hour (14:12) Why a power hour will save you time (17:31) How to create a power hour for a product-based business (18:28) Video conferencing software for your power hour (21:39) How to map out and plan your power hour (22:40) How to make sure your power hour has a good outcome (24:58) Why you should choose a few specific topics for your power hour (26:15) How to price a power hour and what you should remember (27:09) How to use your testimonials to sell your power hour (29:10) How to promote your power hour (31:03) Resources   Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Join my Build Your Online Audience ProgrammeFind out about my How to create and sell a power hour masterclass    Other useful podcasts   [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast)[386] The four types of content that will help you make more sales in 2020 podcast)[372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [414] How much does it cost to launch your own planner (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you looking to launch a new product or service in your business? Or maybe you’ve tried to launch something in the past and it’s flopped? Find out the secrets of a successful launch in this podcast episode - I’m sharing behind the scenes of my recent launch of my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner and how I made 10K of sales in 24 hours. Discover the five-step process that I've used for the past five years to successfully launch and presell my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner. Discover how I build excitement and desire about my Social Media Diary & Planner and how you can use this process in your business. PLUS why building authority is so important if you want to launch a new product or service and why it really does come back to your content. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Podcast shownotes   About this podcast episode and why I recorded it (05:01) Why people have to want to buy your product (07:08) Why launching a test offer will help you find out if your product is viable (08:25) What you need to ask yourself if you’ve launched a product that’s flopped (10:41) Why you need to build an audience before you launch a product (11:12) Why it takes time to build an audience (14:10) Why your conversion rate will be higher if your leads are warm (15:29) Why you need to build authority with your content (16:40) Why my podcast makes people realise that my paid-for content is worth investing in (18:03) Why people have to know who you are before they’ll invest in you (18:58) Why a launch is a long term thing and you can’t just rock up online (20:00) Why your launch might have flopped in the past  (20:30) Why you have to think long term with a launch (22:35) How I built awareness for my social media diary & planner (23:48) How I got people excited about my Social Media Diary & Planner (28:01) Why you need a really great product to help build social proof (30:44) How to use scarcity to sell more of your product (especially if you’re preselling)(32:58) How I used Facebook ads to create leads (37:18) Why everything comes back to your content  (38:18) Resources Buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner  Find out more about my Getting started with Facebook ads course with Emma Van Heusen  Join my Build Your Online Audience programme here.  Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [Bonus] Should you buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner (podcast) [337] The tools I am using to build my online audience (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast)[386] The four types of content that will help you make more sales in 2020  (podcast)[372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you wondering whether you should buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner? Perhaps you already have a favourite planner and are wondering whether you’d actually use it?  Or maybe you’re a fan of digital diaries and are not sure how you’d get on with a paper planner?  It could be that you’ve bought diaries/planners in the past and haven’t used them as much as you hoped (if at all). Maybe you even bought my Social Media Diary & Planner last year and didn’t use it as much as you hoped. Or maybe you’ve heard about my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner and 2020 sorted In this podcast episode (which you can also read as a blog post) I’ll help you decide whether to buy my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner.  I’ll explain what kind of results you can expect if you invest in my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner.PLUS the difference between my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner and my 2021 Sorted Club. And whether you should invest in the Full On Janet Murray Experience (2021 Sorted PLUS my signature programme Build Your Online Audience programme). By the time you’ve listened to this podcast episode (or read this blog post), you should be able to make a decision whether to purchase. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode and why you might be listening About this special bonus podcast episode  (01:01) About my diary and my other products that you can buy (3:42) How I came up with my social media diary & planner (8:35) How my social media diary & planner can help you (13:17) Examples of social media posts from awareness day (15:12) Why you should be posting personal stories and not business (18:02) How the awareness days will help you create great content quickly (19:21) How the diary can help you think seasonally and plan your content ahead (24:03) How the diary will help you make more money (24:58) Why you have to remember that people want to do business with people (30:01) The specification of the diary (and what it looks like inside) (31:20) About my diary community (and how it can help you with content creation) (35:21) Why you should buy 2021Sorted (34:50) About my special bonus gift (36:22) About my annual content planning masterclass 2021 Sorted (39:01 How much does it cost to invest in my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner (43:03) Why there is no right or wrong way to use a diary or planner (44:50) Why writing things down will help you take action (47:08) Why my Social Media Diary & Planner is suitable for any industry (49:44) Why my Social Media Diary & Planner suitable for product and service-based businesses (51:20) Resources Not a member of my Build Your Online Audience programme but want to join? Join my Build Your Online Audience programme here Thinking about joining my Build Your Online Audience programme? Listen to this podcast [BONUS] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme (podcast) Other podcast episodes [339] How To Build An Audience for an Online Course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast [381] How to use awareness day to create engaging content for your business (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Are you wondering whether you should be using Facebook ads in your business? Perhaps you’re worried it’s too early on in your business. Or you’re not sure what kind of budget you need to get started. It could be that you’ve tried using Facebook ads in your business...but didn’t get the results you hoped for. If any of this sounds familiar, you’ll love this podcast episode (also available to read as a blog). In it, I share seven signs you’re ready to run Facebook ads (and what to do if you’re not). PLUS I also answer some of your burning questions about Facebook ads including - how much do I need to spend on ads to turn a profit and is it worth running a Facebook ‘likes’ campaign. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} 1. You have a product/service to sell  It sounds obvious, but paying for Facebook ads is no guarantee of sales. If you want to make sales from Facebook ads, you need a great product that people actually want to buy.  Which leads me into point 2...   2. You have actually successfully sold that product/service Have you successfully sold the product/service you want to run ads to? If not, what makes you think people will buy it? Remember that when you pay for Facebook ads, you’re paying for traffic - not sales. So just chucking money at ads, is no guarantee of sales. If it’s a poor product and/or you don’t understand how to sell it to your ideal customers/clients, no amount of Facebook ads will help you sell it.   3. You need to understand basic marketing and sales funnels Most people need seven or eight touch points with you before they buy. Which means it’s unlikely they’ll buy from the first ad of yours they see. They’ll need to get to know you first. This means you’ll need to build a sales funnel i.e. you need to map out the steps a new prospect might need to take from not knowing about you to becoming a customer/client. Which might mean running ads to an email lead magnet (a free resource you create to encourage people to join your email list) or hosting a webinar or live challenge in order to help your ideal customers/clients get to know you...then retargeting people who engaged with those ads with your paid offer. This will almost certainly mean split-testing multiple types of ad copy and creative - because you won’t know exactly what will resonate with your audience until you try. It will also mean knowing how to install Pixels (tracking code) on your website so you can track your results.   4. You know how much it costs you to acquire a customer/client  One of the most common questions I get asked about Facebook ads is this: how much will I need to spend to make a profit.  The rather unsatisfactory answer is: it depends.  There are many factors that influence the cost of your Facebook ads - from the price of your product/service to the audience you’re targeting to your geographical location. So if you haven’t done Facebook advertising before, it can be difficult to predict how much you will need to spend to achieve your target sales. Knowing how much it costs you to acquire one customer/client can at least give you a starting point. Knowing how much you’re currently spending to acquire one customer/client can at least give you a starting point on budget. Think you’re not currently spending anything on marketing? Think again. If you’re spending time prospecting leads, reaching out to potential customers/clients and/or hosting discovery calls If you’re spending time creating social media or other content If you’re investing in tools, apps - or even other peoples’ services - to promote your business… ...you ARE investing in sales/marketing Working out how much you’re currently spending to acquire a new customer/client can be tough - because you’re probably using multiple marketing strategies and not paying specifically for each lead. But calculating how many hours you’re spending on acquiring new business and/or your total monthly marketing spend (including tools, apps and outsourced services) can give you a starting point. Dividing these costs by the number of clients/customers you’ve acquired in a specific period can give you an idea of how much it costs you to acquire a single customer/client. And how much you might be willing to spend to acquire similar customers/clients. Don’t forget to include your time (because time is money).   5. You know your ideal customers/clients (and are able to convert them)  If you want your Facebook ads to work, you have to make sure you’re targeting the right people. When I hired a new Facebook ad agency recently, I had to fill out a long questionnaire about my audience - not an ideal customer avatar (i.e. fantasy) but information about the customers/clients who buy from me. To run successful Facebook you need to (a) understand the problem your product/service solves and (b) understand your ideal customers/clients’ pain points. But understanding your customers/clients is not enough. You need to be able to create content that really resonates with them and really speaks to their pain points. So when you’ve successfully attracted them into your funnel (via a lead magnet for example), you’ll be able to create follow up content that will convert them from browsers into buyers.   6. You are already creating engaging organic content  People don’t engage with Facebook ads because someone has paid for them. They engage because the content is ENGAGING. So you can chuck as much money at ads as you like.  But if your content is boring…if you don’t know how to write a decent social media post, select/create engaging visuals and/or shoot a decent video on your smartphone - you may as well burn your cash. And yes, if you have the budget, you can hire a Facebook ads strategist to do all that for you (and make sure you’re targeting the right people). But if you don’t know how to nurture your audience. If you don’t understand about the buyers’ journey and how to turn leads into sales via your content…your ads will not convert. So it’s only when you understand how to create engaging organic content - and make sales from it - that you’ll be able to get a return on investment on your ad spend. So it’s only when you understand how to create engaging organic content - and make sales from it - that you’ll be able to get a return on investment on your ad spend. 7. You need to have a testing budget  Most Facebook ads strategists recommend a ‘testing budget’ (i.e. a sum of money you’re willing to spend with no expectation you will get it back in sales). Most Facebook ads strategists recommend a minimum of £300 as a testing budget. So if you’ve got that budget and you’re willing to blow it on testing, that’s a sign you could be ready to start running ads.   What if you’re not ready to run ads? What if you’ve read this list of signs and feel you’re not ready for ads? You have two options. You can hire a Facebook ads strategist. If you have a good product that you’ve sold successfully...they can look after the rest If you don’t have the budget to hire a professional, invest your time in building an organic audience - particularly in learning how to create engaging content. Then, when the time is right, you’ll be able to invest in Facebook adverts to send more of that kind of traffic your way. Are you ready to build your online audience? Join my Build Your Online Audience programme here.  Podcast shownotes About my Getting Started with Facebook ads course with Emma van Heusen (01:53) Why you have to have a specific product or service to sell if you’re running Facebook ads (8:22) Why you have to have sold your product organically before running Facebook ads (10:14) Why audience interests are really powerful for running Facebook ads (12:10) Why you need 7 or 8 touchpoints before people will buy from you (14:05) Why you need to think about the sales journey when planning your Facebook ads (16:12) Why you need to make sure your website is optimised before running Facebook Ads (18:32) Why you should consider carefully the objectives of your Facebook ads  (20:09) Why you need to understand how much it costs to acquire a lead (before you run ads) (22:06) How to work out how much it costs to acquire a new customer or client (23:10) Why you need to understand the cost of your conversions (29:31) Why you need to know your ideal customer or client really well  (33:40) Why your organic content needs to be really good before you run Facebook ads (37:45) Why you need to feel comfortable with an initial testing budget (39:21) What to do if you haven’t built your audience to run Facebook ads to yet (40:08) Why understanding Facebook Ads will make it easier to outsource in the future (42:50) About my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner and #2021sorted (05:00) Resources Find out more about my Getting started with Facebook ads course with Emma Van Heusen Get on the waitlist for my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner Other useful podcasts [Bonus] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast) [366] What to post on your Facebook page to get more engagement (podcast) [371] How to develop a Facebook page strategy (podcast)[386] The four types of content that will help you make more sales in 2020 Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you easily distracted? Do you feel like you could get SO much more done if you just could settle down and focus ONE thing.  And it’s not just about the little everyday distractions, like social media, email, and text messages.  Sometimes you get distracted by the BIG things - like opportunities/projects that take you away from the core focus of your business. If this sounds familiar, you’ll love this podcast episode with productivity expert Mike Vardy. In it, he talks about how to deal with distractions in your business. He also shares his unique approach to productivity - time crafting - and how this can help you do more in less time.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Podcast shownotes   About my 2021 Social Media Diary & Planner and #2021sorted (05:00)  The difference between distractions, disruptions and diversions (and why it’s important)  (12:00) Practical ways to prevent distractions (13:30) How ‘theming’ your time and mode-based can help you avoid  - and deal with distractions (16:04)  How long it takes to regain focus after you’re distracted (18:25) Why awareness is the key to managing distractions (23:41)  Why there is no one size fits all approach to productivity  (26:36) Why you should add new productivity strategies all at the same time (30:48) How time blocking can help you be more productive (35:10) Why you should change up your productivity strategies from time to time (36:27) The problem with being too rigid with your time management (40:25) How external accountability can help you be more productive (41:27) How themes and ‘modes’ can help you be more productive (41:18)  Resources Mike Vardy website Mike Vardy’s $5 guarantee  Other useful podcasts [Bonus] How I discovered my ADHD superpower (podcast) [406] Mindset problems that can slow your audience growth with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [413] How to get more done in less time and build your audience faster (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Have you recently joined the Build Your Online Audience Programme and want to make sure you get the most out of the programme? Or perhaps you’ve been in the Build Your Online Audience programme for a while and want to make sure you get the most out of your membership? Maybe you’ve haven’t joined yet and just want to get a sense of what’s involved (all fine). If so you probably have questions like: What is the best way to use the resources to get the results I need? How much time will I need to devote to the programme to get the results I need? How will you communicate with me about upcoming events/classes? What exactly is included in the programme and how does it work? What should I do if I get ‘stuck’ or feel I’m not making progress Find out why your mindset is important and the content that’s included in the programme and the differences between the two versions of the Build Your Online Audience Programme. Plus the support that you will get inside the membership from myself and my team. If you're not a member - you might want to start this podcast - Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} While it’s tempting to start by listing out  features of the programme, I know what you’re really interested in is the potential transformation i.e. what kind of results can you expect if you join. Which is why I’m going to start with getting into the right mindset.  Managing your mindset  While the Build Your Online Audience programme includes some fantastic resources and support….what will really make the difference to your progress is the mindset with which you approach things. With that in mind, here are a few things you need to bear in mind. 1. Being successful in a membership programme isn't about how much time you spend in it.  People use membership communities in different ways. Some like to work through all the resources, show up to live calls and post in the Facebook group every day. Others prefer to dip in and out as and when they need help. Either is fine. Getting a return on investment is NOT about how much you ‘use’ the membership i.e. how often you log into the membership area, how many live calls you attend, how many masterclasses you watch (in fact that can be a form of procrastination!). For example: ✔️Leadership coach Blaire Palmer generated £42k in sales from one class (Science of Audience Building). Even if she never watched anything again, I think she’d say she got a return on investment. ✔️Canva expert Gemma Cormack took her income from £240 a month to £3950.00 per month. She has also added 2k new Instagram followers after completing my Instagram Success Academy course. Again, even if she never accessed another resource, I think she’d say she got a great return on investment. ✔️Camille recently launched a membership and generated 8k in sales - adding 100 new members (she’d predicted 50) ✔️Fashion consultant Trisha Sakhlecha, used our Get It Done accountability sessions to create a sequence of emails that helped her generate five coaching enquiries and three sales ✔️Victoria Rose launched a podcast (using the podcasting course), increased her Instagram following by 180% and generated almost £1800 in sales ✔️Claire Gleave launched her Activewear company Natal Active and generated £6.5k in her first month of business (she predicted £1.2k). Also added 2k Instagram followers It’s about results. So while there’s tons of useful content in the membership, you may find that there’s just ONE thing that delivers the biggest investment for you. It could be one piece of advice (from me or something else in the group), one recommendation, one relationship, one conversation or one collaboration. 2. You will need to be patient Forget about the ‘get rich quick’ stories. It takes most people a good year to build an engaged audience online. At LEAST. Which means you’ll need to keep showing up, consistently, and publish high-quality content. You’ll need to focus on building your email list - however frustrating it might feel. And you’ll need to keep tweaking and testing until you learn what works. And keep tweaking and testing some more. Because NO ONE gets it right first time. And doing it wrong (or even just ‘ok’) is how you learn how to do it right. The good news is, you’ve got my support - and the support of the Build Your Online Audience community - to keep you going, even when it feels hard. To ensure you have money coming in during that time you have the Science of Audience Building class. 3. You may need to be courageous  If you’re not used to putting yourself/your business out there…you may need to be courageous and try things you haven’t done before. But just think what it will do for your confidence. 4. You will need to take responsibility  The Build Your Audience Programme has all the resources and support you need to succeed including our fab Get It Done sessions - focused co-working sessions that will help you get things done. Ultimately though, it’s up to you to take action. That’s the only bit I can’t help you with. If you don’t do the work, you won’t get the results. It’s that simple.  You will need to prioritise But make sure you reach out to Sam our Community Manager. 5. You will lose your mojo  I can tell you right now...there will be times when you need to take time out from the membership programme: when your workload gets crazy, you have family issues to deal with or over the holiday period, for example. At times like this, you may feel like you’ve lost your mojo, and wonder how you’ll ever get it back. If you’re feeling like this, rest assured this is perfectly normal. Life gets in the way for all of us from time to time. The key thing is to get back on track as soon as you can. Whatever you do, don’t beat yourself up about it. We’ve all bought resources or signed up to online training programmes we haven’t used as much as we’d like to. Sometimes life or business (or both) just gets in the way. That doesn’t mean you can’t or won’t be able to. Remember, getting value out of a membership programme is NOT about how many classes you watch If you’ve had to take a break from your membership community - or are struggling to keep up - you may experience a range of emotions: embarrassment, frustration or even anger, for example. You may feel annoyed at yourself that you’ve paid for something you’re not using or isn’t getting you the results you hoped for. When you feel like this, it’s tempting to ‘hide’ and hope no one notices your absence, but the longer you leave it, the harder it will be to make a comeback. So be brave and let us and know how you’re feeling. Drop us a line on janet@janetmurray.co.uk and we’ll do our best to help. Finally...people join membership communities for the content and stay for the community. So don’t underestimate the power of being part of a supportive business community. The content in my Build Your Online Audience Programme What is included in the Standard programme?  The standard programme takes you through the exact steps you need to take to build your online audience - from getting clear on your niche (the all-important first step) to getting more followers on social media, building a loyal following for your blog/vlog, podcast (if you have one) and building your email list. SESSION 1: Nail your niche  Find the right niche for your business (or refine the one you have) so you can become the market leader. SESSION 2: Developing your brand voice  Create brand voice guidelines for your business so you never get stuck on what to say about your business (and how to say it). SESSION 3: Creating your visual brand  Create a visual style sheet for your business - or refresh the one you have - so people fall in love with your brand (over and over again) SESSION 4: Choosing your platforms  Choose the content platforms that are right for your business (i.e. blog, Youtube, podcast, Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn and/or Twitter). SESSION 5: Creating bingeworthy content  Learn how to create content that’s more addictive than your favourite Netflix series. SESSION 6: Unforgettable social media  Create irresistible social media content that attracts new followers and fans - every single day. SESSION 7: Email marketing 101 Get started with email list building (even if you feel daunted by the tech). SESSION 8: Email magnetism  Create a compelling email lead magnet (and learn zillions of ways to get new email subscribers). SESSION 9: Nurture and Grow  Learn how to write compelling email marketing copy - including welcome sequences, nurture sequences and email newsletters people actually look forward to receiving. 😮  INCLUDES FIVE DONE-FOR-YOU EMAIL SEQUENCES YOU CAN ADAPT FOR YOU OWN BUSINESS 😮 Also included: ✔️Bonus classes on the key social media platforms:  Twitter, Instagram Facebook, LinkedIn and Canva ✔️A weekly group coaching call featuring guest experts who focus on the ‘mindset’ side of building your online audience (monthly themes include money mindset, productivity, motivation, goal-setting, planning and prioritisation and confidence) ✔️Facebook Community where you can get daily help/support from myself and other business owners who are committed to building their online audience What is included in the Premium version of the programme? All of the above PLUS: ACCESS TO MY ENTIRE ADVANCED MASTERCLASS LIBRARY Includes the following classes (worth £792) How to create a coaching/consultancy package How to launch your first online course How to write social media posts that sell How to launch your own planner/journal How to turn your offline services into online offerings How to launch a webinar/masterclass How to create an email nurture sequence How to create passive income in your business How to write delightful emails How to write engaging copy for your business (Copy Fix) How to get booked to speak on big stages How to create a content plan for your business PLUS additional courses/classes (worth £1782) ✔️ Getting started with Pinterest ✔️ Blogging Success Formula ✔️ Instagram Success Academy ✔️ Getting started with Facebook ads (coming later in the year) ✔️ Getting started with Youtube (coming soon) ✔️ Getting started with live video (coming later in the year) ✔️ Launching your own podcast ✔️ Blogging Success Formula BONUS course: How to create awesome sales copy (worth £497) 🐝 GET IT DONE SESSIONS 🐝 The Premium version also includes my popular Get It Done sessions. These focused co-working sessions where you can work with other members on a specific task/set of tasks (related to your audience building). What is the format of the classes? Each class is typically around 90 minutes and includes a video tutorial and comprehensive workbook. Many of the classes are taught live, but there is no need to worry if you can’t attend live as all the classes and resources are available in the membership area (usually within 24 hours of the class - often sooner). Classes are delivered via Zoom video conferencing and are generally very interactive with plenty of opportunities to ask questions and get feedback. Making the most of Office Hour  Our weekly Office Hour takes place on Mondays  - alternating at 11am/4pm (GMT/BST).  If you want to check the time for your specific time zone, you can do that here.  It takes place online (we use the video conferencing software Zoom) and is a chance for members to ask questions about any aspect of their marketing and get feedback from myself and the rest of the group. At the start of the call, I also update the group about membership news e.g. upcoming events and/or challenges. Occasionally the time of the Office Hour might change - for example, if I am speaking/travelling. If this is the case we will let you know via our member bot. We will attempt to give you plenty of notice, but please be aware this may not always be possible. Attending the weekly Office Hour call is not only a chance for you to ask questions, but it’s also an opportunity for you to get to know other members, build your support network and create opportunities for collaboration. How to prepare for Office Hour  You don’t need to prepare anything for the call - apart from making a note of any questions you would like to raise. However, when you join the call, you may be asked to introduce yourself to the rest of the group in ten words or less (on video), so it’s a good idea to craft your ‘ten-word top line’ before you get on the call e.g. ‘I sell gift boxes for new mums’ or ‘I’m a business coach, specialising in working with introverts’. Due to time constraints this really does need to be a ten-word top line...and the more specific you can be the better. If people are confused about what you do, they’re far less likely to remember you/your business. A replay of the call, along with summary notes (which are time-stamped so you know what has been discussed) will be available in the membership area and Facebook group afterwards. This should be uploaded within 24 hours - often much sooner - but you may need to bear with us at busy times. What's not included in the Build Your Online Audience programme 1-2-1 calls with me Personal responses to your questions via social media messaging (Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, Twitter) or phone Personal responses to your questions via email (please use the Facebook group to ask questions) If you feel like you need more personalised attention, drop us a line on janet@janetmurray.co.uk to find out about upgrading your membership to one of our coaching programmes The support you get in the Build Your Online Audience programme About Team JM  As you can imagine, I have hundreds of clients and there’s only one of me...so I rely on these guys to look after you so I can focus on the content/teaching. But I’m lucky enough to be supported by a fab team and here’s what they can help you with. Sam Hill, Community Manager Sam helps look after the Build Your Online Audience Community. This includes: creating the show notes for our weekly Office Hour, supporting me on online classes and events. She also helps with moderation in the Facebook group (including directing you to relevant resources and connecting members’ with common interests). She can also help if you can’t log into your account (just tag her into a post in the Facebook group). Julie Williams, Tech Support  Julie manages the Janet Murray inbox and provides technical support. So if you’re locked out of your account, have ordered something from the website that hasn’t come through or are struggling to access the learning resources on the members’ site, Julie is your first port of contact. Lisa Crossland, Events Manager Lisa handles the financial side of the business and looks after the fulfilment of all of the physical products (books, diaries etc), She is the person to speak to if you have a query about a payment, are looking for a VAT invoice…anything money related really. Lisa also deals with all my event logistics - from booking the venue, to managing the speakers (including booking their hotels/travel) to arranging the printing of the workbooks. So if you have any logistical questions e.g. ‘where’s the special lunch I ordered?’ ‘what time is the group dinner this evening?’ or ‘can I have an invoice/receipt?’ she’s the person to talk to. Tracey Tester, Design & Creative Tracey is the creative brain behind the Janet Murray brand. She is responsible for all the on and offline visual branding, including my popular Social Media Diary & Planner. Tracey also works closely with me on the development of content ideas, including online courses, publications and live events. Kim Willis, Social Media Kim helps me with social media management - primarily relating to the promotion of my podcast. Sarah Mulcare, Messenger Bot Sarah builds and manages our member messenger bot which is the main communication tool we use in the Build Your Online Audience programme. The bot will remind you about all our upcoming classes/coaching sessions. If you think you don’t like messenger bots...I’d urge you to give ours a try. It really is the most convenient - and least intrusive way - to keep you up to speed with everything that’s going on. We’re all mums combining our roles with bringing up school-aged children, which means we sometimes keep slightly unusual hours (e..g evenings and weekends) and tend to work less during school holiday periods. Occasionally this can mean we take a little bit longer to get back to you…but we do surprisingly well, considering. If at any time you have a question - or need some help or advice, please do tag myself, or Sam into your Facebook posts or send an email to janet@janetmurray.co.uk which will be picked up by someone in the team. Key Information  WORKING HOURS 1. My working hours are 9-5pm (BST/GMT) Mon-Fri although this may vary when/if I am travelling. This means if you email/post a question relating to the programme during those hours, you can expect to receive a reply within 24 hours if it’s a working day (longer if it’s the weekend). You may receive a reply from myself or from one of my team members. 2. My team members keep the same hours…so please respect their right to have an evening/weekend. This includes private messaging them on their personal Facebook accounts. If you do want to contact the team via Facebook please go via my page but we really do prefer email. If you send your message to janet@janetmurray.co.uk one of the team can pick it up there. RESPONSE TIMES 1. Due to the high numbers of students enrolled in my online programmes, I am not able to answer individual questions via email. If you would like to book a 1-2-1 consultation with me please email janet@janetmurray.co.uk for fees and availability. 2. If you have a question, please tag me in and I will reply within 24 hours if it’s a working day (working hours listed above). Please appreciate I get a LOT of notifications so if I miss your post, it is not intentional - so just re-tag me and or nag one of my team members starting with your community manager Sam Hill. YOUR PARTICIPATION This Build Your Audience Programme contains all the information you need to build your online audience. If anything is unclear you can also ask me questions in our dedicated Facebook community.  But ultimately the only person who can do the work is YOU. So if you don’t use the membership materials and/or use the Facebook community to get support, the only person you can blame if you’re not successful is YOU. To that end, you must take personal responsibility for your own learning. Which includes asking for help if you need it. Not a member of my Build Your Online Audience programme but want to join? Join my Build Your Online Audience programme here Thinking about joining my Build Your Online Audience programme? Listen to this podcast    Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode and why you might be listening (01:45) Why you don’t have to spend hours in the membership to be successful (4:35) Different member success stories and why everyone is different (06:10) Why everyone’s outcomes are different as they have different objectives (10:22) Why you’ll get a return on investment (as long as you do the work) (12:15) Where to start in the Build Your Online Audience programme ( 12:48) Why you shouldn’t worry if you don’t do everything in the programme (14:31) Why you have to be patient (and why it takes time to build an online audience) (15:29) About the science of audience building class (and why you do it first) (17:16) Why you’ll have to push yourself out of your comfort zone (19:02) Where to start in the programme if you feel overwhelmed (22:56) What to do when you lose your mojo or you get  stuck (24:14) The different modules and what’s included in the standard version (27:40) About our weekly group coaching call office hour (32:30) What’s included in the premium version of Build Your Online Audience (32:56) About the Get It done Sessions in the premium version  (34:18) About our weekly office hour coaching calls and the guest experts (35:34) What’s not included in Build Your Online Audience (36:20) About the Build Your Online Audience team behind the scenes (36:50) About my messenger bot and why it’ll help you stay organised (38:26) Working hours that the membership team are available (38:30)   Resources [BONUS] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme (podcast) Other Podcast episodes [339] How To Build An Audience for an Online Course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you ever struggle promoting your business success and telling everyone how great you are? Perhaps you'd love to be one of those people that tells everyone how amazing they are - but you don't want to come across as an arrogant braggy show-off - so you just keep quiet and hope everyone will just notice you? If that sounds familiar then this podcast is for you. I explain why you must shout about your success and how to show potential clients how fabulous you are - without using contrived website testimonials. Find out how to use your client success stories to showcase your highlight reel and why you need to think carefully about the problem you solve - before you rush off to pitch to a client. I explain the steps you need to take to make sure you get a great testimonial from a client that has clarity and impact  - rather than just a load of meaningless wimpy words. Plus how to make sure your testimonials show how brilliant you are - rather than just tell. And why testimonials aren't just for potential clients or customers but why you current clients and customers need to hear how great you are too. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode (10:10) How to sell more by explaining how you help people (13:27) Why your clients (and potential clients) need to hear how good you are (15:28) What makes a great testimonial and why it's not just words (17:39) Why your transformation doesn’t have to be big (19:01) How to use your stories to share your transformations (20:01) Why you must think about the problem you solve for your clients (22:30) Why your client success stories will make potential clients want to work with you (23:44) Why original raw testimonials are better than fancy images (25:30) Why you should get specific numbers from clients (26:35) Why you should share testimonials with existing clients/customers (28:13) Why it’s not just about the money when you write in a testimonial (30:40) Why impact is really powerful when talking about transformations (31:15) Why pictures of people using your product are really powerful (34:01) Why you have to ask clients to promote your product or service (36:18) How to use a case study as a testimonial (and why it’s valuable) (37:01) How to get testimonials from your clients by asking them to share their knowledge (38:20) Resources   Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme   Other useful podcasts [337] The tools I use to build an online audience (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [BONUS] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to launch an online course - but you're not sure how long it will take or you may be wondering how long it will take you to create the resources and get it online? There are so many factors to consider. For example: How well do you know your subject? (and do you already have content you can repurpose?)  How long will your course be? (i.e. how many modules/lessons) Are you are planning to do everything yourself (or outsource some tasks) Will your classes be live or pre-recorded? Have you created an online course before?  Do you have previous teaching experience?  This podcast episode (which you can also read as a blog post) will take you through the key things you need to consider to estimate how long it will take you to create your course. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} 1. How well do you know your subject? The first and most important decision you need to make about your course is the topic. Choose a topic you know well and/or have already created content on as this can vastly reduce the amount of time needed to create your course - and get it to market. For example, my first course, Soulful PR for Starters was a beginners course on how to do your own PR. I had already created a cluster of blog posts on this topic. For example: What kind of ideas are journalists interested in? How to write a press release for a journalist How to write an effective pitch for a journalist How to find journalists’ contact details What to do if a journalist says ‘no’ to your pitch So I was able to use the blog posts I had already created (which were tried and tested ideas) to quickly create an outline for my course. Had I been starting from scratch it could have taken HOURS of research.   2. How long will your online course be? This will have the biggest impact on your time as the longer your course, the longer it will take you to create the materials. According to Teachable, a starter course might be just five – 20 lessons and cover a smaller aspect of a wider topic e.g. How to create a high-converting lead magnet or it may cover it at a beginner’s level of detail e.g. Soulful PR for Starters. A typical price to sell a starter course might be $50 – $200. A flagship course like Build Your Online Audience might be 20 – 100 lessons and cover all aspects of a topic in lots of depth with plenty of additional resources and maybe a community aspect to the programme too. It could sell for $200 – $2000+. Bonus tip If it’s your first course, try a starter course as part of a funnel. A tripwire. Then you can measure how long things take you.   3. Are you are planning to do everything yourself (or outsource some tasks) As a minimum, most online courses contain: Video tutorials Workbooks/printables (e.g. templates, checklists, cheat sheets, swipe files) Slides Some course creators also provide audio versions of their courses (which is a great idea for accessibility) and transcripts. This means that at a very minimum you will need to: Plan the lessons Record/edit video tutorials Create slides and printables If you are planning to do it all yourself, you may need to factor in time to learn about video editing, design. However, I really recommend using a professional designer and perhaps even an audio editor. I’d recommend outsourcing if you can. Bonus tip: Don’t forget to factor in time learning new skills or costs for outsourcing.   4. Will your classes be live or pre-recorded? It’s typically quicker to create live content (as you have to do it all in one ‘take’) but depending on how perfect you want your content to be - you may want to edit your content afterwards and cut out any unnecessary bits. But see point 6 - it can be quite nerve-wracking teaching online (or teaching at all if you haven’t done it before). For a masterclass that’s 90 mins - 2 hours long it takes me: 6 hours to prepare for a class. Plus a day to create a workbook with help from my designer. If you’re a confident, competent online teacher, go for it live.   5. Have you created an online course before? As with anything in life, you tend to get quicker. When I first started creating online courses, it could sometimes take me up to three hours to create an online class. Now I do it all in one take. I don’t even edit out mistakes unless they are REALLY big. While I don’t advocate creating your course upfront before knowing if anyone will buy your course. Creating one session to see how long it takes you might be an idea. OR try a masterclass or webinar first before you launch a course to see how long it will take you. Bonus tip: Start with a masterclass or webinar first before you launch a course. Make sure you presell before you create.   6. Are you experienced in teaching? I am - so it takes less time but what about you? If you’ve never taught anything before it will take you longer than someone who is experienced in teaching. Make sure you research the different learning styles that people have - some people learn visually others from listening or reading. It’s important to mix up your styles so that you reach different people at different times. Bonus tip: Do some research on different learning styles on how people learn etc. Think about the accessibility of your course.   7. How to sell your course (without outlaying too much cost) Make sure you presell your course before you create it. This way you'll know if it's got legs. The worse that can happen is that you have to refund people as you haven't had enough interest. If you haven't got a big online audience to sell to - you might consider starting small with a webinar or masterclass to build interest from and then build your online audience. Ready to know more? Join my How To Plan And Create Awesome Teaching Resources For An Online Course Podcast shownotes About my How to plan and launch online masterclasses (01:47) About this podcast episode (07:32) Why I can’t give you the exact amount of time it will take  to create a course (08:21) Why knowing your subject really well will help you create your course quickly (11:25) How to save time if you already have some popular content to turn into a course (13:12) Why creating a niche mini-course is a good place to start (15:02) Why you need to test your concept before building a flagship course (16:28) The three main resources that you might need to create for your course (19:25) What you need to think about when creating your resources for your online course (20:47 Why you need to remember that everyone has different learning styles (21:34) How to make your classes interactive (and why you should) (23:40) What you need to consider when you create your resources (25:10) Why you might want to consider outsourcing and why design is so important (28:40) Why your course materials need to look professional (30:10) Why live classes can save you time rather than prerecording(31:40) When you might prerecord your classes (33:20) Why you should start with a masterclass or webinar and build from there (35:02) Why you should presell your course before you create it (36:50) How to find out if people will buy your course (38:39) What to do if you don’t have time to build a big online audience to sell to (40:01) How to get an idea of how long it will take you to create your course (43:20) Resources Join my How To Plan And Create Awesome Teaching Resources For An Online Course Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme Teachable Rev.com Affiliate link with $10 off for new customers   Other useful podcasts [337] The tools I use to build an online audience (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [BONUS] Should you join my Build Your Online Audience Programme? (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you considering joining my Build Your Online Audience programme but aren’t sure whether it’s right for you?  If so you probably have questions like:   What kind of results can I expect if I join the programme (and how quickly?) What exactly is included in the programme and how does it work? Is the programme suitable for a business brand//like mine?  Maybe you’re wondering how much time you will need to devote to the Build Your Online Audience programme, whether it’s suitable for your type (or stage) of business and the difference between the Standard/Premium versions of the programme.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} While it’s tempting to start with the features of the programme, I know what you’re really interested in is the potential transformation i.e. what kind of results can you expect if you join.  1. What kind of results can you expect if you join the Build Your Online Audience programme?  As with anything in life you get out what you put in but here’s what some members have achieved:  ✔️ Leadership coach Blaire Palmer generated £42k in sales from one class (Science of Audience Building) Achieved within 90 days.  ✔️ Canva expert Gemma Cormack took her income from £240 a month to £3950.00 per month. She has also added 2k new Instagram followers after completing my Instagram Success Academy course. Achieved within 90 days. ✔️ Fashion consultant Trisha Sakhlecha, used our Get It Done accountability sessions to create a sequence of emails that helped her generate five coaching enquiries and three sales. Achieved within 90 days.  ✔️ Victoria Rose launched a podcast (using the podcasting course), increased her Instagram following by 180% and generated almost £1800 in sales  Achieved within 90 days  ✔️ Claire Gleave launched her Activewear company Natal Active and generated £6.5k in her first month of business (she predicted £1.2k). Also added 2k Instagram followers  2. Why do you need to build an online audience? You don’t NEED to build an online audience. If you’re getting enough leads/sales online - and/or you only need a small number of clients each year and you can get them via your existing contacts - you don’t need to do anything.  But if you want to sell one-to-many i.e. you want to sell your products/services in the hundreds and thousands. And you don’t want to have to do personal outreach for every sale,  you need an online audience.  To put this into context, the average conversion rate for online sales is just 1-2%. Which means for every hundred people in your audience, only a handful will buy. So if you’re looking to sell at scale i.e. products, online courses, membership...you need a much bigger audience than you think you do.   3. How much does it cost to join the Build Your Online Audience programme?  There are two levels to the programme: Standard and Premium. Standard: is £240/£36 pcm Premium: is £440/£66 pcm  As a monthly member - no minimum numbers of months.  4. What exactly IS the Build Your Online Audience programme?  The Build Your Online Audience programme is the only dedicated membership programme aimed at helping you build an online audience i.e. more fans, followers and subscribers.  Because the more of the right kind of people you have in the audience, the easier it will be for you to make online sales.  Key topics covered in the Standard programme are:  ✔️ Social media marketing: Twitter, LinkedIn, Facebook, Instagram ✔️ Content planning and creation ✔️ Content strategy (blogging, podcasting, video marketing) ✔️ Email marketing (including how to create a lead magnet and build your email list).  We also focus on the mindset part of building your audience, with weekly group coaching sessions on relevant topics including: money mindset, productivity, motivation, goal-setting, planning and prioritisation and self-confidence. 5. What is included in the Standard version of the Build Your Online Audience programme?  The standard version of the Build Your Online programme takes you through the exact steps you need to take to build your online audience - from getting clear on your niche (the all-important first step) to getting more followers on social media, building a loyal following for your blog/vlog, podcast (if you have one) and building your email list.  SESSION 1: Nail your niche  Find the right niche for your business (or refine the one you have) so you can become the market leader.  SESSION 2: Developing your brand voice  Create brand voice guidelines for your business so you never get stuck on what to say about your business (and how to say it). SESSION 3: Creating your visual brand  Create a visual style sheet for your business - or refresh the one you have - so people fall in love with your brand (over and over again)  SESSION 4: Choosing your platforms  Choose the content platforms that are right for your business (i.e. blog, Youtube, podcast, Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn and/or Twitter).  SESSION 5: Creating binge worthy content  Learn how to create content that’s more addictive than your favourite Netflix series. SESSION 6: Unforgettable social media  Create irresistible social media content that attracts new followers and fans - every single day.  SESSION 7: Email marketing 101   Get started with email list building (even if you feel daunted by the tech).  SESSION 8: Email magnetism  Create a compelling email lead magnet (and learn zillions of ways to get new email subscribers). SESSION 9: Nurture and Grow  Learn how to write compelling email marketing copy - including welcome sequences, nurture sequences and email newsletters people actually look forward to receiving.  😮  INCLUDES FIVE DONE-FOR-YOU EMAIL SEQUENCES YOU CAN ADAPT FOR YOU OWN BUSINESS 😮  Also included: ✔️ Bonus classes on the key social media platforms:  Twitter, Instagram Facebook, LinkedIn. PLUS a Canva masterclass.  ✔️ A weekly group coaching call featuring guest experts who focus on the ‘mindset’ side of building your online audience (monthly themes include money mindset, productivity, motivation, goal-setting, planning and prioritisation and confidence) ✔️ Facebook Community where you can get daily help/support from myself and other business owners who are committed to building their online audience  6. What is included in the Premium version of the Build Your Online Audience programme? The Premium version of the Build Your Online Audience programme includes: All of the above PLUS: ACCESS TO MY ENTIRE ADVANCED MASTERCLASS LIBRARY Includes the following classes (worth £792)   How to create a coaching/consultancy package How to launch your first online course How to write social media posts that sell How to launch your own planner/journal How to turn your offline services into online offerings How to launch a webinar/masterclass How to create an email nurture sequence How to create passive income in your business How to write delightful emails  How to write engaging copy for your business (Copy Fix) How to get booked to speak on big stages  How to create a content plan for your business  PLUS additional courses/classes (worth £1782)  ✔️ Getting started with Pinterest ✔️ Blogging Success Formula ✔️ Instagram Success Academy  ✔️ Getting started with Facebook ads (coming later in the year) ✔️ Getting started with Youtube (coming soon)  ✔️ Getting started with live video (coming later in the year) ✔️ Launching your own podcast  ✔️ Blogging Success Formula BONUS course: How to create awesome sales copy (worth £497) 🐝 GET IT DONE SESSIONS 🐝 The Premium version of the Build Your Online Audience programme also includes my popular Get It Done sessions. These focused co-working sessions where you can work with other members on a specific task/set of tasks (related to your audience building).   Who is the Build Your Online Audience for? The Build Your Online Audience programme is suitable for anyone who wants to build an online audience i.e. more followers, fans and subscribers.  It’s suitable for:  ✔️ Service-based based businesses (including hospitality) ✔️ Product-based businesses ✔️ Online business ✔️ Offline businesses ✔️ New businesses ✔️ Established businesses​  ✔️ Freelancers/sole traders ✔️ Solopreneurs/entrepreneurs ✔️ Small/Medium-sized businesses ✔️ Colleges/universities ✔️ Charities And if you need more reassurance, here’s a list of some of the types of business owners I’ve helped with audience building:  Glamping site owners, genealogists, costume designers, social media managers, accountants, psychologists, personal trainers, coaches/consultants, holiday cottage owners, estate agents, wedding planners, website designers, jewellery designers, artists, writers, vocal coaches, nutritionists, business coaches, universities, cake makers, hairstylists, jewellery designers. 7. Is the Build Your Online Audience programme suitable for product-based business owners?  Absolutely yes. The audience-building strategies you use to build an audience for a product-based business are exactly the same as those you’d use for a service-based. Because a service IS a product, right? To put that into context, I use exactly the same strategies to sell a digital product like my Build Your Online Audience programme as I do a physical product like my Social Media Diary & Planner.  Here is a list of some of the product-based business owners I work with:  ✔️ Hand-made jewellery ✔️ Evening dresses and gowns ✔️ Dance costumes ✔️ Face masks ✔️ Vegan handbags ✔️ Subscription boxes ✔️ Personalised baby/toddler gifts ✔️ Recipe kits ✔️ Skincare and makeup ✔️ Books/planners ✔️ Yoga wear and accessories  ✔️ Children’s clothes ✔️ Activewear for mums and mums-to-be  8. Is the Build Your Online Audience programme just for beginners? Not at all. Whether you’re new in business - or you’re looking to pivot/or create an audience for something new, the Build Your Online Audience programme can help.  Is the Build Your Online Audience programme suitable for new business owners?  Definitely. Whether you’re completely new in business - or you’re looking to pivot/or create an audience for something new, the Build Your Online Audience programme can help.  9. What is the format of the classes? Each class is typically around 90 minutes and includes a video tutorial and comprehensive workbook. Many of the classes are taught live, but there is no need to worry if you can’t attend live as all the classes and resources are available in the membership area (usually within 24 hours of the class - often sooner).  Classes are delivered via Zoom video conferencing and are generally very interactive with plenty of opportunities to ask questions and get feedback.   10. When is the right time to join the Build Your Online Audience programme...before I launch my new product/service or afterwards? It’s never too early to start building your audience. And I would recommend joining BEFORE you launch your new product/service. Otherwise, who are you going to sell it to?  11.  How quickly should you expect to see results from the Build Your Online Audience programme?   As with anything in your business you get out what you put in?  You get out what you put in. Shared success stories of 90 days  12. Can men join the Build Your Online Audience programme? Absolutely yes. Paul Couchman (great growth in his Instagram 1500 new followers) historic food, Mahmood Reza accountant (helped launch an awareness day) Jon Clayton architectural technologist (£600 of sales from Science of Audience Building).  13. How much time do I need to spend? Minimum of two hours a week. You don’t have to do everything Resources Join my Build Your Online Audience programme here Other Podcast episodes [339] How To Build An Audience for an Online Course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [380] How to set goals for audience growth in 2020 and why you should (podcast) [386] The four types of content that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [417] How much does it cost to launch your own planner (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Would you love to make more sales from your website? Maybe you'd love to know the type of content to create to attract more people to your website? Find out how to attract more website visitors and increase your sales in this podcast with online marketing consultant and website optimisation expert Vicki Jakes. Vicki explains the key things that your website must-do if you’d like to sell more of your product or service. Including the four main website pages that any website should have and why your call to action needs to be really obvious. Find out why your website content and the language you use is more important than using fancy pants keywords - and how to make Google really fall in love with you and show your content to a bigger audience. Vicki shares simple, practical tips to get your website do the hard work for you. And the key things to consider when optimising your website to make it rank higher in search. Discover the three main Google Analytic metrics that you must monitor and how to keep people on your website longer. PLUS why knowing your best performing content will help you save time creating new content. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Podcast shownotes About my Build Your Online Audience programme (01:25) About Vicki and how her business has evolved (4:09) Why it's important to have a website and not just rely on social media (08:11) Why you need a website to create a predictable revenue stream (11:30) The four key pages you need to have on your website (13:34) Why you should have a blog page on your website (and why it’s not a diary) (15:44) Why you have to write as people think to get your content found on Google (18:43) Why you have to start with your content and not with keywords (22:16) The key things Google is looking for on your page (23:08) How to find out what your customers are searching for (24:50) Why you need to be realistic about being on the front page of Google (25:30) Why you have to have a clear Call to Action on your website homepage (26:47) Why your website needs to get to the heart of what you do (29:26) How to make the most of your meta description and your word count (32:50) Key things you can do to make sure your website is optimised (38:04) Why you should know the best-performing pages on your website (41:40) Key Google Analytics to track and why this will improve your marketing (42:14) Why you should rewrite your best performing website content (46:38) How to show Google that you’re an expert and the ideal length of a blog post (50:05) Why you should create a blog post to go with your podcast or YouTube video (51:25) Why you shouldn’t be afraid of creating link posts (52:25) Why you don’t have to reinvent the wheel with every piece of content (53:35) About my Blogging Success Formula course with Vicki Jakes (54:58) Resources Vicki Jakes website Find out more about my Build Your Audience Programme Keywords everywhere website How to write a blog post every day 21 tips to get you started (blog post) Why you need Other useful podcasts [236] Why you need a blog for your business (podcast) [330] How to write awesome sales copy for your business (podcast) [336] How to make sales from your business blog (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [380] How to set goals for audience growth in 2020 and why you should (podcast) [386] The four types of content that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Does your relationship with money hold you back in business? Perhaps you struggle with pricing your goods or services or you’re too quick to discount. Or you always undercharge because you feel guilty charging the full price? If this resonates with you then you’ll love this podcast episode with financial coach and planner and host of the podcast 'In her Financial Shoes' Catherine Morgan. It’s a deep dive into how money mindset issues can really hold you back from growing your audience and building your business. Find out how those little phrases from your childhood like ‘money doesn’t grow on trees’ and deep-rooted beliefs and preconceptions that have been passed down the generations (even if they're not true!) can really affect your relationship with money. Catherine reveals the three most common types of relationship people have with money. Find out what type you are and how this impacts how you show up in business. Discover why people get so addicted to taking courses and why over-giving is really common in online entrepreneurs. And what prevents some people from spending ANY money in their business. PLUS what this means for the content that you create in your business. Catherine shares two steps that you can take right now - to start understanding your relationship with money - and how you can take your mindset from scarcity to abundance. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Podcast shownotes About my BYA programme and Money Mindset month (01:24) How Catherine helps people improve their emotional relationship with money (06:30) How your beliefs and thoughts about money come from messages when younger (07:16) How your mindset can trigger scarcity messages in your brain (10:26) How a scarcity money mindset can drive your business forward (11:00) How social influences and beliefs can influence our thoughts about money (13:00) Why you need to think of the emotion that you attach to money (14:48) The three most common types of relationship people have with money (16:02) How a giving relationship with money can affect your business (16:43) Why you need boundaries in your business to stop yourself over giving (18:29) Why setting up a treat fund will help you get into an abundance mindset (19:40) How to get into the mindset of spending money on outsourcing (21:21) How over planning and overthinking can stop you taking action  in your biz (22:03) How a personal development pot of money can help you grab opportunities (25:07) Types of content you can create for spontaneous spenders (27:20) Why you need to understand the emotional trigger of spending (28:42) How to get financially naked and why you need to stop burying head in the sand (34:27) Why you have to avoid comparing your business with someone else's (36:56) Resources Catherine Morgan website Catherine Morgan Money Personality Quiz Catherine Morgan podcast In her Financial Shoes Find out more about my Build Your Audience Programme Other useful podcasts [Bonus] How I discovered my ADHD superpower (podcast) [217] How to find your entrepreneurial superpower with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [406] Mindset problems that can slow your audience growth with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [413] How to get more done in less time and build your audience faster (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Wondering if TikTok is right for your business? But not really sure if it’s your ‘thing’? Perhaps you think it’s just for teens and you’ve got no idea where to start? If that sounds familiar then this podcast episode with marketing expert Sam Bearfoot is a must-listen. Sam explains exactly how you can use TikTok to build your online audience and promote your business. Find out the best type of content to create on TikTok and why being authentically 'you' - will help you create content for TikTok and help you stand out amongst the crowds. Discover how you can use TikTok to get people into your messages and grow your other social media platforms like Instagram. Even if you’ve never used TikTok before - Sam explains how to get started with TikTok and how you can get inspired and begin creating content for TikTok (and why it doesn’t have to just be dancing!). Plus how you can save time by repurposing the content you create on TikTok on your other social media platforms. Sam shares so much value in this episode - I’d love to know if you’re inspired to start. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Podcast shownotes About my Build Your Audience programme and my Get It Done sessions (1:36) About Sam and how she helps businesses grow (4:38) How Sam has shifted her business from just being the ‘Instagram girl’ (6:52) Why it’s harder to work with people if you don’t show up authentically (8:22) Why you’ll stand out more if you are authentically you (12:54) How TikTok compares other social media platforms like Instagram (15:15) How to create your Tok Tok videos and decide on your content (16:29) How TikTok has grown  and why it isn’t just for teenagers anymore (18:08) How to make sure you have the right audience on TikTok (19:20) How to get inspiration on TikTok and why you need to use music (20:43) Why you need to curate TikTok so that see what you want 21:27 Why it doesn’t have to be music that you use on TikTok (22:02) How Sam approaches content creation on TikTok (23:10) Why TikTok is great for video editing (25:41) How to use hashtags on TikTok (and how it’s similar to Instagram) (28:10) Why you should repurpose your TikTok videos on other platforms (29:58) Why TikTok will take you out of your comfort zone (but you should just do it) (31:31) How to get inspiration from TikTok and how to start on TikTok (33:45) How to use TikTok to talk to people - even if they don’t follow you  (36:11) Why being yourself online really works (39:45) Resources Find out more about my Build Your Audience Programme Sam Bearfoot Instagram Sam Bearfoot Website Sam Bearfoot TikTok TikTok accounts recommended by Sam Jerabean It's Lauren Edge The Matthew Hussey Other useful podcasts [347] How to create engaging social media posts even if you hate being on camera (podcast) [377] How to write super engaging copy about your business with Jo Watson (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast)  [373] How to get more followers on any social media platform (podcast) [384] How to be more yourself in your social media content with Natalie Lue (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

With sales of planners and organisers topping $386 million last year, we're clearly a generation obsessed with planning.  And since I launched my Social Media Diary & Planner, back in 2017, I get asked tons of questions from people who want to launch their own.  So in this podcast episode, I answer your burning questions, including the number one question: how much does it cost to launch a planner?  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} How much does it cost to launch your own planner? The rather unsatisfactory answer to this is: it depends on a number of things, including   How many pages you want  The size (e.g. A4, A1)   Type of printing   Weight and type of paper   Finish (e.g. gloss/matt)   Type of binding e.g. spiral or perfect bound  If you don’t have all of this information to hand, you won’t even be able to get a quote from a printer. So if you want to launch your own planner, one of the first things you need to do is sit down and plan out exactly what you will include on every page of your planner - even down to how many pages you want for each month of the year. This is generally known as a flatplan. I include flatplan templates in my online masterclass: How to launch your own planner. This is important because you can only print a perfect bound book (and, essentially, your planner is a book)  in multiples of four pages. This means that if you decide to add or take away content at a later stage, it could have a big impact on your project (and your budget). If you go for spiral bound, you can add or take away pages in multiples of two, but if you don’t plan out your content thoroughly beforehand, you could still create problems for yourself further down the line.  it’s difficult to estimate how many pages you will need without knowing how your planner will be laid out.  Sites like Canva and Creative Market have planner templates you can browse for inspiration. Pinterest is also a great place to look for inspiration.  At this stage, you also need to do some research on the correct paper weight for your planner and best method of binding. If you want to create a product people can use (and possibly carry around with them) for a full year it needs to be hardy. The last thing you want is people complaining/asking for refunds because the pages are ripped and/or the ink is seeping through. So the best thing you can do at this stage - is to create a flatplan of your planner, then contact a number of printers for a quotation.  Most printers will be happy to advise you and/or send through paper samples. It’s important to touch/feel the paper yourself before you get anything printed. I’d also suggest buying some different planners so you can compare size, binding and layout plus how easy they are to use.  There are instructions on how to create a flatplan for your planner (and flatplan templates), a checklist of information you need to supply a printer with in order to get a quote and a list of all the printing terminology you need to know in my online masterclass on how to launch your own planner.  How do I price my planner?  Once you’ve got quotes from printers (I’d suggest getting a minimum of three).While it may be tempting to outsource your printing overseas this may not be the best practical solution. While it can be cheaper, if there is a problem with the printing, it’s much more difficult to fix if your printer is in China. This is definitely something to bear in mind if you want to launch a seasonal planner i.e. one that runs from January to January.  Not only will you need to allow additional time for the initial print and delivery, if you are unhappy with any aspect of the printing, it could take weeks (or even months) to fix. This is not to say it is a bad idea, but for your first planner, it may be best to stay local. Once you have some printing quotes, you can estimate how much it will cost you to produce each copy of your planner. Then, based on how much profit you want to make (and research on similar products on the market) you can decide on the price of your planner.   When costing out your planner, remember you also need to include things like: Packaging (and postage, although you may want to add this on to each order) Fulfilment i.e. getting the planner packaged up and sent out  Stripe/PayPal fees Design  Proofreading and editing  Marketing  Your own time  There is a checklist of all the costs you need to consider in my online masterclass on how to launch your own planner.  If you don’t want the hassle of organising your own printing, there is the option of using a print-on-demand service like Createspace, Lulu or Ingram Spark. With this option, you upload your artwork file for your planner to their website and, every time someone orders a copy, it is printed and sent to them. This cuts down on packaging and fulfilment costs, but you will still need to pay for design, editing and proofreading.  While print-on-demand is often less expensive per copy, you also have less control over the process.  So if something goes wrong, it can be much more difficult to fix. Many people mistakenly think that using a large, established platform means you have a ready-made audience to buy their planner. This couldn’t be further from the truth. You will still need to work really hard to market your planner.  There is a detailed comparison of DIY printing versus print-on-demand in my online masterclass on how to launch a planner for your industry.  Do I need to build an audience before I launch my planner? Ideally yes...otherwise who are you going to sell your planner to?  Most online sales convert at just 1-2%, so if you’re hoping to sell hundreds or thousands of copies of your planner, you will need a large enough audience to sell to. You can use my audience calculator to see if you have enough people in your audience right now to make your target sales.  If you don’t have a big enough audience, you have two choices. You can either focus on building your online audience to the size you need to launch a planner. This may take at least a year but could save you a lot of time and money in the long run. Here’s how to build an audience.  Or you can explore the idea of doing a short print run to test your idea. This will almost certainly reduce your profit, as shorter print runs are generally more expensive. But it will also reduce the risk of you making a loss on your planner (and ending up with a stack of planners gathering dust in your loft/garage). At this stage, you should also ask yourself some tough questions about whether you have the authority to launch a planner on your chosen topic. For example, if you want to launch a planner for yoga teachers, but you’re currently working in banking, you may find you don’t have the credibility to make enough sales. In this case, it would be better to spend some time building your audience before launching a planner.  Can I presell my planner before I launch it? Absolutely yes. In fact, if you don’t want a stack of planners you can’t sell (and a hefty printing bill) I would absolutely recommend it.  The reality is, you can carry out tons of research, but won’t know for sure if anyone wants to buy your planner until you ask people to pay you money for it.  This is why I believe you shouldn’t print your planner until you have made enough sales to at least break even.  This is why I recommend creating a test offer. This is where you get a designer to create an image of your diary, create a simple landing page (a web page where people can only do one thing i.e. order your diary) and invite people to pre-order their planner at a reduced cost on the understanding that they may need to wait a bit longer for their planner.  I share my test offer strategy (including a checklist of the steps you need to take and the resources you need) in my how to launch a planner masterclass. Do I need to hire a designer? Or can I do it myself?  Unless you are a designer yourself, I really wouldn’t recommend it.  If you want your planner to look professional, I believe you need to use a professional - ideally someone who has a background in book/magazine publishing.  Not only will this ensure your planner has a professional look and feel, they should also be able to advise you on any potential problems with the design. For example, a professional designer will be able to advise on font size/type, what type of content is best on right and left-hand pages, potential problems with user experiences (e.g. left-handers). You only know that stuff if you’ve worked in publishing. Sites like Canva and Creative Market have planner templates you can browse for inspiration. Pinterest is also great for inspiration. But, unless you are a designer, I would use it just for that - inspiration. How do you decide on a topic for your planner  This isn’t actually on my list of frequently asked questions, but I’ve included it because it’s something people generally don’t give enough thought i.e. they create a planner they want to create - rather than something people actually want to buy.  Remember, nice-looking stationery is all very well, but if your planner doesn’t solve a problem for people, you’ll struggle to sell it.  Let’s take my media diary as an example. It’s an A4 desk diary that features key dates and awareness days that can help you plan out your content for the coming year. It also has planning templates that help you create annual, quarterly, monthly, weekly and daily content plans. So the media diary solves two key problems for the people who buy it: not being able to think of any/enough content ideas and not having a clear content plan to follow. Not publishing regular content can decrease your visibility, authority and credibility - which can have an impact on the bottom line of your business.  Remember that your planner doesn’t necessarily have to solve a practical problem e.g. not being able to think of ideas. It can also solve an emotional problem/need, such as wanting to look stylish around your peers.  But it does need to solve a problem...otherwise it won’t sell.  I have a planner viability test in my how to launch a planner masterclass. Podcast shownotes The top questions I get asked about launching a planner (01:37) About my new masterclass how to launch your own planner (02:55) Why I’m recording my podcast during my ‘Get it Done’ session (04:27) Why I can’t tell you exactly how much it will cost to print your planner (6:09) What you need to know before going to the printers for a quote (06:45) Why you need to know what you want before you go to the printers  (10:20) What costs you need to consider when pricing out your planner  (11:45) Why you should have your diary printed locally (and not in China) (12:38) Other costs you need to work out before pricing your diary (14:08) Why you should do some market research before pricing your planner (17:10) Why you need to build an audience if you want to sell a lot of copies (17:23) Why you need to have authority in your space if you want to sell (20:04) Why you should presell your planner before you print (21:49) What you should do if people don’t buy your planner on your presale (23:39) Why you should use a professional designer to design your planner (25:22) How to decide on a topic for your planner (27:13) Why your planner has to solve a problem for someone (30:20) Resources Audience Calculator: Work out the audience size you need that you need with my audience calculator Graphic design with Canva Self publish with Amazon Create Space Self publish with Lulu  Self publish with IngramSpark [326]  The one thing you need to do to generate passive income for your business (podcast) [339] How To Build An Audience for an Online Course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast)  [355] How to create and launch a planner for your industry (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Hands up...I’m not the most organised person in the world. But I AM insanely productive - publishing hundreds of podcasts, blogs and social media posts every year - and rarely missing a deadline.  My recent ADHD diagnosis made me question how I’d managed to stay so productive - despite being disorganised.  If you haven’t heard of it before, that stands of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) - a disorder that affects the functioning of the brain and includes symptoms such as inattentiveness, hyperactivity and impulsiveness. Problems with memory, forgetfulness, organisation.  And it made me realise I’d actually developed coping strategies to stay productive - which I share with you in this episode.  They’re actually really good strategies that can help anyone who struggles to get things done (which we all do at times). {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Here are five things that help me stay productive.  Time blocking. I keep my mornings free and don’t do any external meetings/teaching/coaching until midday. As I get up at 5 am, this means I can often get around six hours of solid work in before lunchtime.  Repetition. If you’ve ever tried to quit smoking or lose weight, you’ll know that changing bad habits can be tough. The same goes for good habits. Which is why, if you can get into the habit of doing good things every day, these habits can be as difficult to break as having a cigarette or a chocolate bar after every meal.  This is why I do the same thing at the same time every day. For example:  Sending a Daily Email to my list at/around 7 am Posting on Instagram every day around 7.30 am  Publishing a podcast [add hyperlink] every Friday Experts believe it can take as little as 21 days to adopt a new habit. So if you can get into the habit of posting your blog post on a particular day and/or planning your social media posts at a particular time each week, this can be really powerful for your productivity.  90-day planning. I plan my content in 90-day cycles - around the products/services I’m launching in my business. Which also means I can plan my content to coincide with key launches in my business.  For example, this month (July 2020) I’ve launched a Pinterest course in my membership programme Build Your Online Audience. Knowing it was coming up, meant I could schedule a relevant week of content ahead of the launch, including a podcast on getting started with Pinterest , a cool messenger bot quiz on whether Pinterest is right for your business and tons of relevant social media posts.   Public accountability. I make my plans public e.g. writing a daily email, publishing a podcast episode every Friday - which means I can’t back out Body Doubling. This is a term used to partnering with others to get specific tasks done. For example, I’ve recently started using a fab tool called Focusmate a virtual co-working tool that allows you to work, side-by-side, with a partner, remotely - over video - in structured 50-minute sessions.  However, I’m hyper-aware that some people might find working with strangers of the internet kind of awkward. So this week I’m trialling my own ‘Get It Done’ sessions for members of my Build Your Online Audience programme.    Podcast shownotes How I use time blocking to stay productive (6:43) How I produce three pieces of great work by midday (8:22) Why you need a good chunk of time at a time of day that works for you (10:20) How repetition and creating good habits can help productivity (11:10) Habits that I have in my business to get things done (12:30) Why consistent habits will build your online audience (15:22) How 90-day content planning will make you more productive (16:37) How planning ahead will help you focus on peak points in your business (17:48) How public accountability will help you be more productive (23:10) How body doubling can help you increase your output  (24:50) How Focusmate helps with accountability and productivity (26:40) Get it Done sessions in Build Your Audience programme (30:02) Resources Focusmate Sign up for my Daily Email Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme and get access to my NEW Pinterest course Other podcast episodes [Bonus] How I discovered my ADHD superpower (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast) [406] Mindset problems that can slow your audience growth with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [409] How to use Pinterest to grow your online audience with Kate Beavis (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Ever worried that you're annoying your subscribers by sending too many emails? Want to know how many emails are enough and how you can keep your email subscribers happy? Then you'll love this podcast episode with email marketing experts and hosts of The Email Marketing Show Rob & Kennedy. They share four things that you can do to make sure your email subscribers are your biggest fans. Find out why managing expectations is key to happy subscribers and how your subscribers can get to know you. Discover tips and tactics if you think your email subscribers have fallen out of love with you and how you can win back sleepy subscribers. They explain why you shouldn't overthink email segmentation. And why you mustn't be afraid to delete people from your email list. PLUS how you can sell in your emails and still give value. It's full of really practical advice and takeaways that you can apply straight away in your own business. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode (0:20) How Rob & Kennedy got started with email marketing (03:03) Why you should stop worrying about sending too many emails (04:42) How often Rob & Kennedy email their subscribers (06:28) How to start your email relationship with a new subscriber (08:39) Why it’s good to set up expectations in your intro emails (10:30) Why it's important that people understand your personality (13:45) How you can use your own experiences to make your messaging interesting (15:26) Why you need to segment different parts of your audience (16:55) How to start segmenting your list and why you should start simple (19:17) Why you need to look at the outcomes that people need when you segment (21:29) How to win your subscribers back if they’ve stopped engaging (24:45) How often you should run a re-engagement and what to do if you get no reply (27:16) How to avoid sending your emails to the spam and junk folder (27:43) How to create content that sells and still give people value in emails (28:30) About Rob & Kennedy and my Build Your Audience programme (31:50) Resources The Email Marketing Show Podcast Rob & Kennedy’s Facebook Group Join my Build Your Audience programme Find out about my Pinterest Course Other podcast episodes [333] 39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [350] How to use surveys to increase your online sales with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [395] How to write addictive email copy with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [401] How often should you email your list (podcast) [404] Five compelling reasons to email your list every day (or least more often than you do now) (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

I was recently diagnosed with ADHD. At the grand old age of 45. If you haven’t heard of it before, that stands of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) - a disorder that affects the functioning of the brain and includes symptoms such as inattentiveness, hyperactivity and impulsiveness. I’ve found it uncharacteristically difficult to talk/write about, but I’m sharing it here in the hope it might be of help (even just as a reminder that everyone has their ‘things’ to deal with). In this special podcast episode, I share the story of how I discovered I had ADHD and why I believe it's my secret superpower as an entrepreneur. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} By the time you get to the end of this post, there’s a good chance you’ll be thinking one of three things (or maybe all three). But I do those things too But you don’t seem the slightest bit ‘hyperactive’ Janet ADHD isn’t real...it’s just your personality type So, to put it into context...yes we all do some of the things I share with you here sometimes. What makes the difference with ADHD is (a) the frequency with which the symptoms occur (b) the extent to which it affects your life. It’s also worth mentioning that ADHD shows up differently in different people….particularly in girls and women (which is why it’s often missed). For example, the hyperactivity and/or restlessness can be mental rather than physical (as in my case). And while educational/professional achievement in people with ADHD is often lower, it can show up in high achievers too. In fact the ability to 'hyperfocus' - to zone in on a particular area of interest and block out everything else - can be EXACTLY the thing that helps you to become a high achiever (another reason why ADHD can get missed). I always felt there was something a bit ‘different’ about how my brain worked - but like many people - I associated ADHD with hyperactive teenage boys, so never imagined I could have it. Then I stumbled across an article about women and ADHD and thought…’oh my God, that’s ME.’ I spent the next year or so reading and researching, which is what, eventually, led to me getting tested and getting a diagnosis. My ADHD symptoms To put my symptoms into context, here are some of the questions I’ve grappled with pretty much all of my life 👇: ✔️ How can I be such a high achiever at things I find interesting but suck SO badly at those I don’t (which is VERY apparent from my school reports)? ✔️ Why can I concentrate for hours on things I’m interested in - to the point where I lose track of time - but struggle to pay attention to anything that doesn’t? ✔️ Why am I so bad at ‘life stuff?’ Paying bills, booking/cancelling appointments, ordering groceries, cooking…. ✔️ Why do I get so excited about new things….then struggle to finish them? ✔️ Why am I so bad at friendship? Remembering friends' birthdays, sending baby gifts, asking after them when they’re sick, turning up to social things…well maybe not bad, just inconsistent... ✔️ Why am I such an impulsive spender (but never seem to learn from my mistakes)? ✔️ Why am I so brilliant with words...but frequently get muddled up with numbers and dates? ✔️ Why do I leave everything until the last minute? In fact, why does leaving it to the last minute sometimes feel like the ONLY way to get it done? ✔️ Why do I struggle so much with detail? To the point where starting a project with lots of moving parts or instructions to read feels PHYSICALLY painful? ✔️ Why can’t I hold down a job or even stick working in an office with other people for more than a few weeks at a time? ✔️ Why do I get so BORED of everything so quickly: meetings, relationships, social events, small talk, projects...? ✔️ Why do I sometimes make such impulsive decisions? Decisions that can blow up relationships (friendship/work/family)...often on a whim? ✔️ Why am I SO damn sensitive? To the point where a cross word/brush off from a colleague/friend can put me in a dark place for weeks on end… ✔️ Why am I a compulsive workaholic who works longer hours than anyone else I know (often to achieve the same results)? ✔️ Why don’t I enjoy holidays/days off like other people seem to? ✔️ Why can’t I SWITCH MY DAMN BRAIN OFF? 🤯 All of which I now realise are symptoms of ADHD. Why you don't have to be hyperactive to have ADHD If you’ve worked with me and/or are a friend, you may be surprised by me sharing this. Because I probably come across as pretty calm, right? I generally don’t pace the floor, interrupt people when they’re speaking and/or talk incessantly (well, only sometimes 😂 ) or any of the other stereotypical symptoms of ADHD. The only thing you might have noticed is that sometimes I talk a bit fast. And - if you’ve worked with me, you’ll also know I THINK fast. Which can make it hard to keep up at times... But I wasn’t bouncing off the walls as a child/teenager (and nor do I do that now). So I had no reason to believe - and nor did anyone else in my life - that the things I describe above were anything more than personality quirks. Relationships is the area where I struggle most. While I LOVE people, I find navigating the unwritten rules of friendship - and particularly female friendship groups - nigh on impossible. Maintaining female friendships often involves doing things you don’t want to do - or that bore you - just to be accepted. Which I’ve learned doesn’t work for the ADHD brain. I’ve been dropped from numerous female friendship groups over the years for not playing by the ‘rules’ (or at least it feels like I have - but that might be down to Rejection Sensitivity Dysphoria, which comes hand in hand with ADHD, but I’ll save that for another post!). Which means life can feel a bit lonely at times. 😢 While I have tons of acquaintances, I only have a handful of really close friends. Generally driven, ambitious women like me. Or men. Because both are unlikely to get offended when I forget to message them back, say/do the wrong thing or disappear for a few months because I’m engrossed in work or a new hobby. Because that’s all I can manage without messing things up. Until recently, I saw my inability to maintain deep and long-lasting friendships with women as a character flaw. In fact, I’ve spent countless hours pouring my heart out to my mum about it over the years. Now I realise this is probably down to having a different kind of brain... which kind of helps a bit. Coping Strategies Work-wise, I’ve completely leant into my zone of genius (writing, communicating, creating content) and outsourced the things I find hard. And I love what I do, which means I rarely have problems paying attention to work stuff. Life wise...I kind of bumble along, trying - and often failing - to create systems to keep me organised. But I still get far too many fines/charges for forgetting to pay things. I’m still impulsive with money, but because I earn more these days, it’s less of a problem. Which means I no longer have any debt. Although, if my income changed, I know that’s something I’d have to watch out for. I’ve learned that the ADHD brain only has two modes: ‘now’ or ‘not now’ - which means you can’t draw on a previous experience like most people do (for example, getting charged for going over your overdraft limit because you bought something you couldn’t afford). Which is why you keep repeating the same mistakes - over and over again - much to the frustration of family/friends/colleagues. Relationships are the area where I struggle most. While I LOVE people, I find navigating the unwritten rules of friendship - and particularly female friendship groups - nigh on impossible. Maintaining female friendships often involves doing things you don’t want to do - or that bore you - just to be accepted. Which I’ve learned doesn’t work for the ADHD brain. I’ve been dropped from numerous female friendship groups over the years for not playing by the ‘rules’ (or at least it feels like I have - but that might be down to Rejection Sensitivity Dysphoria, which comes hand in hand with ADHD, but I’ll save that for another post!). Which means life can feel a bit lonely at times. While I have tons of acquaintances, I only have a handful of really close friends. Generally driven, ambitious women like me. Or men. Because both are unlikely to get offended when I forget to message them back, say/do the wrong thing or disappear for a few months because I’m engrossed in work or a new hobby. Because that’s all I can manage without messing things up. Until recently, I saw my inability to maintain deep and long-lasting friendships with women as a character flaw. In fact, I’ve spent countless hours pouring my heart out to my mum about it over the years. Now I realise this is probably down to having a different kind of brain, which kind of helps a bit. Next steps This is all quite new to me, so I’ll leave it here (and I’m also a bit bored now). I’m just starting out on this journey, so I still have a lot to learn. I spent the first few weeks wondering whether the test was ‘wrong’ and worrying about whether people would think I was jumping on to some kind of trend/bandwagon (ADHD is really common in entrepreneurs). Once I’ve got my head around it, I’m sure it’s a topic I will revisit again - especially once I’ve explored different treatment options. But I wanted to share this with you in case it was helpful in any way. And it goes without saying that while living with a restless, racing mind isn’t always easy (in fact, it can feel unbearable at times), it is almost certainly responsible for some of the things I’ve achieved in my life/business. Over and out. Podcast Shownotes Why I recorded this bonus podcast episode (1:35) My ADHD symptoms that led to my ADHD diagnosis (5:49) Why I always just accepted my symptoms as personality quirks (9:15) How ADHD has affected my ability to form close friendships (11:01) Why ADHD symptoms show up later in women (12:24) How I struggled at primary school with sensitivity (14:01) How I lost interest in certain subjects at school (18:08) How I started enjoying school when I could focus on the subjects I was good at (20:43) Why I found university boring and it didn’t do much for me (22:50) Why I struggle with small talk especially at events (23:59) How I couldn’t stop spending money when I was younger (25:54) When I realised that teaching wasn’t right for me (28:50) Why freelance journalism was a really good fit for me (30:48) How I got interested in entrepreneurship and online businesses (34:02) How I struggled with being a mum and making connections with other mums (36:12) How ADHD leads to hyper-focus and can make you lose interest in things (39:53) Why I decided to find out if I had ADHD /  I started to question why I couldn’t enjoy time off (40:22) Why it’s about the frequency of symptoms in an ADHD diagnosis (42:18) How I’ve managed my business around my symptoms (43:05) How ADHD hyper-focus has really helped my business (45:16) Resources to understand more about ADHD (47:10) Resources Tracy Otsuka Podcast  Jessica Macabe How to ADHD  A Radical Guide for Women with ADHD  Taking Charge of Adult ADHD    Sign up for my Daily Email Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme and get access to my NEW Pinterest course  Other podcast episodes [217] How to find your entrepreneurial superpower with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [406] Mindset problems that can slow your audience growth (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to be the market leader in your industry - the go-to specialist? If so, you'll love this podcast episode with business coach, best-selling author and host of the Expert Unrivalled Podcast Jen Hall. Whether you have a product or service-based business Jen explains the three things you must-do if you want to become a market leader. Discover why you must ditch 'niche fear' and why not niching could be the biggest mistake you make in your business. Jen explains why differentiation and messaging are key and why you must nail your USP. Find out why size and fame don't matter if you want to become a market leader in your industry. And how you can stand out in a crowded market - even if can't think of any new ideas. PLUS why becoming a market leader is the BEST thing you can do for your business and your bottom line. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast Shownotes About my Pinterest course (0:50) About Jen Hall and her business and how she helps people (4:11) The benefits of becoming a market leader in your area (6:44) Why size doesn’t matter if you want to be a market leader (8:45) Why you need to niche before you can become a market leader (10:18) Why you need to ditch niche fear (12:12) Why passion will help you niche (14:20) Why you’ll never get anywhere if you don’t niche (15:06) How to use your messaging and articulate what you do to help you niche (17:43) Why you should avoid overcomplicating your messaging (20:44) Why you’ll hold your business back if you don’t specialise (22:19) Why differentiation is key to becoming a number one choice (25:02) Why you need to create your USP rather than look for it (30:05) Why you need to look at your competition to help innovate  (33:06) The difference accumulated benefits and that one killer thing you do (34:25) Why you need to bring your ideas to market (37:14) How to differentiate yourself in a crowded market (38:53) How to stand out by using technology to be personal (41:04) Why you need to be personal to your audience become a market leader (43:02) Why content planning is so much easier if you’ve specialised (43:43) Why your messaging will help you become a market leader (45:45) Resources Jen Hall The Expert Unrivalled Podcast Sign up for my Daily Email Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme and get access to my NEW Pinterest course  Other podcast episodes [349] How to find the right niche for your business (podcast) [389] How to find your niche and why you need to with Jo Soley (podcast) [406] Mindset problems that can slow your audience growth with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) [409] How to use Pinterest to grow your online audience with Kate Beavis (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

If you've been wondering how you can promote positive messages about inclusion and diversity, a good place to start is with your marketing materials. In this fascinating interview, marketing expert and confidence coach Ramat Tejani explains how to spot unconscious bias in your marketing and how to be more inclusive. Find out how you can make a difference from the way you write your content and the tone of voice you use - through to the guests that you might invite on your podcast or Facebook Live. Ramat also recommends resources that you might find helpful to understand this more. I'd love to know if you find this helpful. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast Shownotes About Ramat and her business (1:43) How unconscious bias works in our minds (3:13) Why we can be uninclusive in our marketing (4:17) Why we all have an unconscious bias (7:18) How to view your business for diversity, inclusivity and unconscious bias (10:54) Why being inclusive in your marketing will make a difference to your sales (14:47) Why you should keep your language and tone of voice clear and simple (17:30) Why you should be conscious of the audience you're writing for (20:08) Why anyone should be able to understand your content  (25:25) How to be less bias in your content creation and bring in new voices (26:55) Why you need to keep adapting your marketing to ensure inclusivity (31:18) Why you will have to take your time with any changes you make (35:17) Why it’s ok to say you’re taking the time to learn about racism (41:17) How everyone can make a difference even if its small (44:08) Books and resources that Ramat recommends (45:50) Resources It's about Damn Time Arlan Hamilton Sway: Unravelling Unconscious Bias Dr Pragya Agarwal The Other Box Ramat Tejani Website Ramat Tejani Instagram - The Inspiration Box Ramat Tejani Instagram Ramat Tejani Twitter Sign up for my Daily Email Join my Instagram Academy Course here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme Other podcast episodes Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme Other relevant podcast episodes [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [384] How to be more yourself in your social media content with Nat Lue (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest, Facebook and LinkedIn

Want to learn how to use Pinterest to grow your online audience?  If so, you need to listen to this podcast episode with Pinterest expert Kate Beavis. Kate explains why Pinterest is a visual search engine - and not a social media platform - which makes it a powerful tool to build your online audience.  She shares expert tips for setting up your Pinterest boards, what kind of content you should be sharing - and how often - and how to make use of the latest Pinterest features. Kate also explains why Pinterest isn't just for product-based businesses and why it's ideal for service-based businesses too. PLUS how you can create tons of content fast and what you need to understand before you start creating content for Pinterest.  There's so much value in this podcast episode. Even if you're already using Pinterest in your business I guarantee you'll find something useful. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About my new Getting Started with Pinterest Course with Kate Beavis in my Build your Audience Programme (1:02) About Kate’s business and how she uses Pinterest in her business (2:50) What Pinterest is and why it's not a social media platform (4:05) How to use Pinterest as a visual search engine and how it compares to Google (5:29) Why you need to understand your audiences pain points when planning your content (9:23) Why Pinterest is great for a product-based business (9:57) Why Pinterest is really powerful for a service-based business (11:30) How to set up Pinterest for your business and why keywords are vital  (16:08) How to set up your Pinterest boards and how many boards you need (18:01) Why scheduling is key on Pinterest and how often you should be pinning (21:50) How to share other people content on Pinterest (23:30) What to consider when it comes to visuals/text/images on Pinterest (27:18) How to make sales if you are a product-based business on Pinterest (30:07) How to quickly create lots of content for your Pinterest boards (32:01) Where to push your content if you don’t have a blog or website (34:34) Using Pinterest Stories and tips on linking your videos to TikTok   (36:14) How to use Pinterest to promote your podcast or YouTube channel (38:30) What metrics are important to track on Pinterest (39:28) Kate's website The Indie Practice TheIndiePractice Pinterest TheIndiePractice Facebook Resources Join my Instagram Success Academy here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme Other relevant podcast episodes [163] How to get high profile media coverage in your business with Kate Beavis (podcast) [319] Why you should be using Pinterest in 2019 with Eve Tokens (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you ever have those days when you feel like you're all out of ideas for Instagram Stories? Or you've been posting Instagram Stories but you feel like your ideas are a bit stale and you'd love to shake them up a bit? Maybe you've got a product or service launch coming up and you’d love to know some new innovative ways to talk about what it is that you do and promote your product or service? Then listen to this podcast episode where I share 11 Instagram Story ideas to generate more sales in your business. With three of them I go into more depth and explain how you can construct the entire Instagram Story from beginning to end. Discover how you can use Instagram Stories to start conversations and generate sales. Plus why getting people into your DM’s is key. I’d love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About my Instagram Success Academy (01:54) Why Instagram stories are so powerful for sales conversations (2:42) The difference between your Instagram grid and your Instagram Story (3:22) Why asking for opinions/using polls on Instagram stories is great for making sales (08:21) How to use your publicity shots in Stories and use voting polls (10:46) How to create content about your behind-the-scenes on Instagram Stories (11:33) How to use  behind-the-scenes on Instagram Stories for product or service businesses (12:15) Examples of using before and after content in Instagram Stories (14:29) How to use the grenade post as a video in Instagram Stories  (16:44) How to use awareness days in your Instagram Stories (18:13) The ideal length for an Instagram Story and how to keep people viewing & engaged (19:30) How to ask for opinions to generate loads of engagement (20:46) How to construct a day in the life Instagram story and examples of what to post (24:10) How to avoid frustrating your Instagram story viewer (26:57) What to put in a getting to know you Instagram Story and what you must include (27:21) How to create an Instagram Story to promote and get people in your DM’s (29:52) Why you should get people to DM you rather than send them to your website (32:58) About my Instagram Success Academy (34:25) Resources Join my Instagram Academy Course here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme Other podcast episodes [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K fast (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [385] How to sell on Instagram Stories (without feeling sleazy) (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you ever have a series of social media posts or marketing emails to write and find yourself wondering how you heck you can make the topic interesting?  In this podcast episode, I share my secret strategy for turning 'boring' topics into super engaging content.  It’s so simple, you’ll wonder why you didn’t think of it yourself.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast Shownotes Resources Sign up for my Daily Email Join my Instagram Academy Course here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [333]  39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [405] The secret to creating bingeworthy content (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook

Ever felt that something in your mind is holding you back from growing your business and your online audience? Then you’ll love this podcast episode with performance and mindset coach Osmaan Sharif. Osmann explains the common struggles that affect our mindset as entrepreneurs and how this can get in the way of building our audience. Discover why you need to know your entrepreneurial super power and how this will help you identify the parts of your business that you should be focusing on and what you might need to let go. Find out how aligning your values with your business goals will motivate you and help you achieve your goals and what happens to your mindset when they get too far out of synch. He shares practical advice that you can apply in your business to deal with overwhelm, procrastination and perfectionism. Plus how 90 day goal setting can help us move forwards in business. As always I'd love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast Shownotes About this podcast episode (3:12) About Osmaan and how he helps entrepreneurs with mindset (4:27) Why mindset is so important to business owners (6:49) Why a past corporate background can hold people (9:15) Why big goals can overwhelm you and hold you back (10:44) Why expecting too much of yourself can overwhelm you (13:08) Why perfectionism will hold you back and (14:22) About the different entrepreneurial superpowers and how it can affect your strategy (17:11) Why you need to focus on the parts of your business that you are good at (20:08) What procrastination is really telling you about your business (21:40) Why the wrong mindset can really affect your business (24:15) Why being clear on your goal will stop holding you back  (28:03) How ninety-day goals will help you move forward and focus (33:15) Why shorter goals are better and flexibility is key for achievable goals (36:00) How accountability will help you stay focused (37:15) Why we need to align our values with what drives us forward (40:01) How knowing your values and your goals will help you make decisions in your business (44:38) Why we can struggle with what we think we should do and what we actually do (47:57) Resources Osmaan Sharif’s Rapid Transformation website Find out more about your entrepreneurial superpower in this podcast episode: [217] How to find your entrepreneurial superpower with Osmaan Sharif (podcast) Sign up for my Daily Email Join my Instagram Academy Course here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [333]  39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [405] The secret to creating bingeworthy content (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Want to know how to make content so good that it’s like your favourite show on Netflix where one show is never enough? The sort of content that people just can’t get enough of and they want to binge on it. Listen to this podcast episode where I explain how you can make your content bingeworthy and make people crave your content so much that they just can’t stop consuming it. I explain why Netflix is SO addictive and how we can learn so much from it by applying the same principals. Discover how you can make your regular content be it email, podcast, YouTube or blog just as addictive as Netflix and people can’t wait to get their eyes (or ears) on it. I share practical tips and tactics about how to make your content bingeworthy and why it’s so powerful if your content can do this. Find out why our brains crave familiarity and how you can make your content irresistible. As always I’d love to know what you think. p.s Warning you might want to go on and listen to other episodes after this one. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} My daughter and I have a serious Netflix habit. We sit down at 10pm every night with a chocolate covered Oreo and cup of tea to get our ‘fix’. Over the past few  months we’ve watched: Tiger King Spinning Out Anne With An E The Marvellous Mrs Maisel Over the past few years we’ve watched the entire seven series of The Gilmore Girls - including the revival - several times. And I think we’re on our third time through Call The Midwife, which has seven series. At 11pm we often end up bickering because my daughter wants to watch another episode. And it’s hard to play the responsible parent because I’m DYING to see the next one. If you think 11pm is late for a 14-year-old to go to bed, by the way…well I’ll tell you about that tomorrow. From a behavioural science point of view, our behaviour follows a classic pattern of habit formation. There is a cue (the time - 10pm) There is a routine (the cup of tea and the chocolate Oreo) There is a reward (the enjoyment of the show) This is followed by a craving for the next show. The reason Netflix shows are so addictive is because they flood us with the feel-good hormone dopamine, leaving us ‘hungry’ for the next show. And there is so much we can learn from Netflix on how to make our own content more ‘binge worthy’. For example, I’ve been publishing a new podcast every Friday for the past four years (cue). People often tell me they plan their dog walk/gym visit around this (routine). I know that if people have enjoyed the episode (reward) they’ll want to listen to others on a similar topic (craving). Which is why I often mention other relevant episodes on the show (and include them in the show notes). And since I’ve been publishing my daily email on/around 7am each day (cue), people have started telling me it’s the first thing they read each day over their coffee (routine). If they’ve enjoyed the email (reward) they’ll be looking forward to the next one (craving). Which is why I sometimes hint at what I’m going to cover in the next one. What does this mean for you? If you can make your content part of someone’s routine, you’ll find it much easier to build an engaged online audience. So how do you do this? A cue can be created by deciding on a regular day/date/time. For example, if people know you put a new podcast out every Friday, they can plan their activities around it. My podcast, daily email, podcasts, Boris A routine can be established through a familiar format. Even this podcast has one. As human beings we like to know what to EXPECT. We can learn a lot from the news/magazine shows. Radio 4 - news on the hour, half hour, 15. People watch Newsnight - Emily Maitlis reads the news, then there’s a few interviews So my Daily email works because it’s the same every day. The reward mostly comes from the enjoyment/value of the content. But there are other ways to reward people who engage with your content - for example reading out reviews/doing shout outs. When people feel seen, heard and appreciated, they’re far more likely to keep engaging with your content. You can create cravings by telling people what’s coming up in the next post/show. Or referring to other related content they might find interesting. Teasers or trailers e.g. daily emails - gave them the title...what is it going to be about? On a platform like Youtube you can actively encourage people to binge on your content by creating playlists of videos on similar topics. On a blog, you can create round-up posts of blogs on similar topics. On a podcast you can record ‘seasons’ on specific topics to encourage people to listen to a bunch of episodes at once. In psychology this is known as clustering.  People have a limited amount of space in their short-term memory. In fact, most people can only remember around seven pieces of information at a time. So planning/organising your content in this way can make it easier for people to consume (and binge) on your content. Clustering doesn’t only apply to how you plan your content - but also how you present it too i.e. how you design and lay out your content to increase memory retention. One way to do it is by grouping similar topics together -- either under numbered bullet points or with different header sizes. Besides being much easier to scan, your content will be much easier to remember and recall down the road -- especially if you’re creating long form content. In BYOA we look at other psychological principles Reciprocity Social Proof Paradox of choice Podcast Shownotes About my Build Your Online Audience programme (02:10) Why routines, cues and rewards are so important when creating bingeworthy content (3:55) How we can learn a lot about our content from Netflix (06:05) Why it’s so powerful to crate content that becomes part of someone's routine. (08:03) How my daily email has become a part of people’s routine and sparks conversation (09:52) How you can create bingeworthy content in your business (10:36) How to create a cue and make people expect your content (11:23) Why you need to create familiar content to create a routine for people  (12:41) Why our brains love familiarity and how you can use this to get people to love your content (15:20) How to create the reward in your content by making it good and using shout outs (17:45) How podcasters reward their listeners (18:50) How to get people to crave your content (20:14) How to use teasers to get people to crave your content (21:09) How to create make your content bingeworthy on YouTube (22:36) How to use clustering to make people consume more of your content (23:09) Why you should plan your content in groups or seasons to encourage bingeing (23:30) Tweaks you can make to your  content to see if it is bingeworthy (24:37) About my Creating Bingeworthy Content Class (25:42) Resources Sign up for my Daily Email [395] How to write addictive email copy with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [401] How often should you email your list (podcast) Join my Instagram Academy Course here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [333]  39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

If you’re like most business owners I know the idea of emailing your list each day might seem crazy. Won’t people get sick of hearing from you every day? Won’t you lose all your subscribers? I recently started sending a daily email to my list and, in this podcast episode, I share the surprising results. Even if you have no intention of sending a daily email to your audience, this episode will give you ideas and inspiration for what to write in your emails so you can build a closer relationship with your audience. This is probably one of my most personal podcasts and I share a lot of my business and what inspires me to write. I’d love to know if it inspires you. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Here's five great reasons to email your list regularly with practical tips on how to get into the habit of writing every day and why it will make you a better writer. 1.You’ll develop a daily writing habit (which will help you get better at writing) People often tell me they struggle with writing copy for their business. Writing an email newsletter, sales pages - or sometimes even a simple social media post - can paralyse them for weeks. And this isn’t just newbies. I hear this from experienced business owners too. But like everything, writing is about practice. And the more you do it, the easier it gets. My friend Kennedy started sending a daily email to his list because he’s dyslexic and wanted to get better at writing. He’s been doing it for two years now. But if you read his stylish, entertaining emails, you’d NEVER guess (and, yes, it was Kennedy who gave me the idea for MY daily email). Which is why developing a daily writing practice is such a powerful thing to do - even if (like me) you're already a confident writer. I get up at 5am and make coffee. Then I write my daily email, then my Instagram post, followed by any social media copy, email marketing copy, Facebook ads I have to write. And - apart from a daily team meeting at 10.45am - I don’t do any meetings or coaching calls until midday. I just write/create content. Why do I do it this way? Because I believe it’s easier to write when you first wake up - when your mind is uncluttered by the worries of the day and - crucially - there are no interruptions. And while I never suffer from writer’s block (which is what 18 years in journalism does for you), I do write better copy when I’m feeling inspired. Now I’m not saying you should get up at 5am every day and write a daily email, like me and Kennedy (who’s also an early riser). But developing a writing routine - where you write and/or journal at a certain time of day (ideally first thing) is one of the most powerful ways to improve your writing and/or creativity in general. 2. You’ll develop a bank of content you can repurpose into other things Since I started my Daily Email in April 2020,  I’ve racked up a cool 13,000 words of copy that can be repurposed into social media posts, email marketing copy and Facebook ads. I recently created a whole series of Facebook ads for my new Instagram course from ‘daily email’ copy - and a bunch of marketing emails. And I’d much rather have a bank of good writing to draw from, than force myself to write an eight-part email marketing sequence when I’m not feeling it. In fact, I actually repurposed some daily email copy to create this podcast episode and blog post. 3. You’ll develop a deeper relationship with your audience Since I’ve been sending my daily email I’ve been getting tons of emails back from people who resonate with the stories/experiences in my emails. Being more vulnerable and sharing some of the downsides of being an entrepreneur has resonated particularly strongly. For example, when I shared the contents of the email below, I got a flurry of emails in return from people who'd also had shirty emails from clients - so they could relate to my story. Your emails are constant. Quite annoying. And very pushy. I buy your social media diary because it is helpful. I do not expect to be literally bombarded daily. And some of them are highly inapproriate, very 80's salesy (not how the world works these days) and even for someone who is all about the business and all about marketing and sales, verging on rude in their tone and somewhat patronising/look at me how wonderful I am, at times. Feedback I hope is useful. I will buy the diary again but please remove me from mailing and marketing lists. 4. You’ll sell more of your products/services When I invite people to sign up for my daily email, I make it clear that I might mention relevant products/services. In fact I put a link to a product/service in pretty much every email. And people buy. 5. It’s a form of therapy  I also see writing as a form of therapy. So while writing the daily is (I hope) helpful for my audience. It’s also a way of helping me process my experiences and emotions. Some people journal...I write my daily emails. If you have kids or other responsibilities, it’s easy to tell yourself that you don’t have time. Or that it would be ‘impossible’ to find 15 minutes to write each morning. But where there’s a will there’s always a way, right? Podcast shownotes About my Instagram Success Academy (01:26) What inspired me to start a daily email (3:55) How to develop a daily writing habit and why it’ll make you a better writer (5:55) How to find the right time for your writing  and why you should make it regular (8:40) How you can batch create your content for your emails (9:28) Why you'll get better responses if you write about current events (12:15) Why you don’t have to get up at 5am to be successful (13:38) How to create social media content by repurposing your daily emails (14:21) How I organise my content/topics and themes for my daily email (15:40) Why you can’t force your writing (18:25) How I’ve used my daily email copy in this podcast (19:28) How sending a daily email can deepen your relationship with your audience (20:25) Examples of daily emails that have created a conversation (22:05) How sharing content that makes people feel something will connect with them (25:28) How my daily emails have prompted  engagement in my paid membership group (30:11) Why sending a daily email will help you sell more (31:32) Why writing every day can be great therapy (32:33) Tips for getting your daily emails right  (34:54) Why you should always check your email open rates (37:35) Resources Sign up for my Daily Email Rob & Kennedy Podcast [395] How to write addictive email copy with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [401] How often should you email your list (podcast) Join my Instagram Academy Course here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [333]  39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to know how you to build your audience using competitions and giveaways? If you've ever wondered how to run a competition or giveaway and how you can use this to build your audience on social media - then you'll love this podcast episode - with Mark Simpson founder of Boostly and worldwide Facebook group the Hospitality Community. Mark explains step by step how you can build your online audience by using giveaways and competitions on Facebook and Instagram Discover how you can use competitions to get people from your Facebook page and onto your email list. He explains how to make your competition post go viral with clever copy and posting tactics. And how to make sure you don't fall foul of Facebook regulations by using the right copy. Find out how you can use competitions or giveaways to build an audience in any industry and how you can use them to create a buzz when you're launching a new product or service. Mark shares so much in this podcast episode including his tried and tested 5-day formula for creating and running successful competitions and giveaways on Facebook and Instagram. Plus he shares the exact copy for Facebook and Instagram competition/giveaway posts so that you don’t have to create it yourself. I hope you're as excited by this podcast as I am and I'd love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode (4:35) How Mark’s business evolved and how he started his business (8:02) Background to Mark and his Facebook group (13:02) Why competitions help the Facebook algorithm (18:23) Why building Facebook followers through giveaways works (20:32) Key things you have to do when running a Facebook competition (21:57) Why the image is really important in a Facebook competition (22:30) Why the first few lines of your copy are really important in your competition post (22:56) Why you must get your giveaway T&C’s right (24:12) How to be clever with your copy and get people to share your post (24:50) How to choose a competition prize (and why it doesn’t have to be your product/service) (30:40) How to think creatively about images (even if you don’t have a beautiful product) (35:30) Why you must be present on social media after you launch (39:01) How to get more eyes on your competition posts (and how much you should post) (41:09) Marks 5-day formula for running a competition and what you should do daily (44:08) How to get people onto your email list from your competition (47:58) How to use peoples competition excitement to make a sale (49:23) Why the competition strategy will work for building your audience (53:20) How to use a competition/giveaway to launch a product or service (55:24) How to access the dropbox folder with the competition templates (57:24) Resources Connect with Mark on Instagram Mark's Boostly podcast Access Marks FREE 5 day competition copy here: boostly.co.uk/janetmurray Join my Instagram Academy Course here Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [400] How to build a large audience for your blog, vlog or podcast (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you feeling frustrated with your Instagram growth? In this episode, I share the surprising reason your account isn’t growing (even though you’re posting consistently, using relevant hashtags and/or spending time engaging on other peoples’ accounts). And show you how to fix it.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} If you’re struggling to attract new followers to your Instagram content, you may think it’s because you haven’t nailed your strategy. You need to post more often/consistently. You need to find the right time of day to post. You need to find the right hashtags to attract your ideal/clients. But while honing these strategies can help, there is one fundamental thing you have to be able to do to grow your following. If you can’t do this, you’ll struggle to grow your audience - regardless of any strategies you try. So what is this magic thing you must be able to do? You have to be able to connect emotionally with your audience. Your content needs to make people stop in their feed, And it needs to make them feel something. For example: Empathy (because they’ve had a similar experience) Amusement (because you’ve made them laugh) Anger/frustration (because they disagree with you) If you want people to take the time to stop and read your post. If you want people to hit ‘save’ or ‘share’ - or leave you a comment - it has to hit them right in the heart. It if doesn’t, they’ll just keep on scrolling. So how do you know your content is hitting the spot? More people will be liking, commenting on and sharing your content for sure. But what will really show your content is hitting the spot is when people leave comments like: ‘This really resonates with me.’  ‘I feel like you’re inside my head.’ ‘I was just thinking this earlier.  So how do you create this kind of content? Keep reading and you’ll find out. 1.Study your competitors’ content Take a look at the account of some key competitors that are getting good engagement and growth on their account. How are they engaging their audience emotionally? Natalie Lue - everything we do is about making us feel better. So if we can make our audience feel better about themselves they’ll love us for it. Lifestyle envy (personal/work) -  Hannah Otto, The Annaedit, Brand Stylist Humour:  Alyssa Limperis, Simon Holland, Glitterbeards, Paul Flaart Empathy: Matt Haig, Jamie Tworkowski (Jamie T), Helen Marie Reassurance/encouragement: Boss Babe, me Challenge: polarising content - don’t see so much on Instagram People need to SEE themselves in your story - even if they haven’t had that exact experience. 2. Look at what’s done really well for you (and do more of it)  For example, I have a recent post: Don’t take criticism from people you wouldn’t take advice from. In the caption I talked about how people email me with ‘advice’ on email marketing - even though they don’t have 1,333 likes 1086 shares 640 saves 3. Curate content  I’ve just been looking at my top ten performing Instagram posts of the past year. My best performing post got: 2,663 likes 5,920 shares 28,933 impressions PLUS it’s been saved 2,495 times, landed me 912 new followers and 90% of people who saw the post weren’t even following me in the first place. Pretty mind-blowing, right? Well here’s the interesting thing. Only ONE of my ten best-performing Instagram posts was actually created by ME (number 10 as it happens). The rest of the posts (including this one) were originally created by other people. I was simply resharing them. In the last six months I’ve more than doubled my Instagram following from 6.5k to over 15k and content curation (sharing other peoples’ content) has been a big part of my strategy. The way I see it, there is so much great content out there already - created by people who are more eloquent, funny and/or talented than I could ever be. So instead of dishing up my rather mediocre content, why not introduce my audience to the best of the best? That way I can focus on giving them exactly what they need: funny, inspiring, poignant, polarising...whatever it is they need to hear at any given time. Without having to come up with a single idea myself. And in doing so, I’m not just growing my own Instagram account. I’m helping to grow other peoples’ too. Which is a win-win all round, right? Of course there is an art to content curation (including how to credit those whose content you share). Which is why I’ve devoted a whole section to it in my new Instagram course, which starts in May. But not only can content curation save you tons of time...it can also help you improve the quality of your content. Which is why I’d love you to give it a try (tip: it doesn’t just work on Instagram)   Podcast shownotes About my Instagram Success Academy (01:54) Why you have to hit people emotionally with your content on Instagram (4:08) Why your Instagram content needs to make people feel something to stop them scrolling (6:11) Why your Instagram feed needs to look visually appealing (8:55) Questions to ask yourself about your Instagram feed (9:50) What your Instagram content needs to make people feel (10:56) Why engagement is more important than a large following on Instagram (11:55) When you’ll know that your Instagram posts are hitting the mark (12:20) How to research the right content by looking at your competitors (13:47) Why making your audience feel better will make them want to follow you (15:45) Five ways you can engage your Instagram audience emotionally (16:40) How to use aspirational lifestyle posts to make people stop and look (16:42) How to use humour to connect with your audience (19:03) Examples of how to use empathy to reassure and encourage people (21:54) How to think about the content from your audience's point of view (24:31) Why you need to be flexible in your Instagram content (25:27) Why you might need to be careful with challenging content or content that shames (26:07) Why people need to be able to see themselves in your content (29:40) Why you should have a look through your content and see what has done well (30:04) Why using other people’s content will grow your followers (and save you time) (34:53) Why your content and emotional connection is at the heart of everything you do (37:09) Resources Join my Instagram Academy Course here  Natalie Lue Instagram Janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K fast (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [400] How to build a large audience for your blog, vlog or podcast (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

‘How often should I email my list?’  This is probably one of the most common questions I get asked about email marketing.  The rather unsatisfactory answer is ‘it depends’ - on all sorts of factors, including how often you usually email your list, what’s going on in your business at the time and what your goals are.  But what I can tell you is that you are almost certainly emailing your list less than you should - and missing out on sales as a result. In this podcast episode, I tackle the question of how often you should be emailing your list - and share the key email sequences every business owner should have.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   1. The 'delivery/welcome' sequence  This is the sequence of emails you send someone when they join your email list. If they have signed up via a free lead magnet (i.e. a resource you create specifically with the intention of getting people to join your list), I’d suggest sending a series of 3-5 emails where you break down the content of your lead magnet and give additional value. I generally refer to this as a ‘delivery sequence’. So for example with my 23 Social Media Ideas lead magnet, I send five follow up emails (across four days). The first - which should land immediately after they subscribe to the lead magnet - is to deliver the lead magnet. The second - sent around 24 hours later - asks subscribers to email back and let me know if they received the email ok. This can help troubleshoot any potential problems with spam (once a new subscriber emails me back, their email provider recognises us as ‘friends’ - which means my content is less likely to end up in spam). The next three delve deeper into the problem the lead magnet solves (not being able to come up with engaging content ideas). I share three types of post (one each day): the question post, the ‘story’ post and the ‘grenade’ post.  In this email I make a sales offer to a product/service that feels like the natural ‘next step’ to the lead magnet. This may or may not lead into a sales sequence. I may also make a ‘soft’ sales offer in the p.s. of the second or third email (or both). If people are joining your list for another reason i.e. you just have a general ‘sign up’ email, I’d recommend a 3-5 email ‘getting to know you’ sequence where you talk a little bit about what to expect from being on your list and help people get to know you better. You should also create a welcome sequence for people who buy one of your products/services. For a coaching/membership programme - where you’re going to be working with people over a longer period of time - I’d recommend a 3-5 day ‘tour’. In my Build Your Online Audience Programme, you get a ‘tour’ of the membership (including the site/resources and team). For an online course, masterclass or playbook I’d generally keep it shorter. 2. The ‘sales sequence’  This is the sequence of emails you send someone to promote a paid product/service. This can be anything from an online masterclass to a playbook to an online course. The length of your sales sequence really depends on the product/service you’re selling, but, personally, I wouldn’t recommend sales campaigns that run for longer than 5-7 days - with some kind of scarcity built in - otherwise people can start to zone out. I’d recommend sending at least one email every day, with at least 2-3 emails on the last day. I’d also recommend creating a ‘looked not bought’ sequence - which you send to those who have clicked on the link to purchase (more on that later). However, the length of your campaign can depend on the product/service you’re selling. For example, I have a four day email sequence I use for online masterclasses, which I generally start three days before the day of the masterclass. If I start to promote any earlier, I find people forget about the masterclass. 3. The ‘looked not bought’ sequence One of the biggest mistakes I see people making with their email marketing, is not asking people why they didn’t buy. While it can be uncomfortable to ask, it can also be an opportunity to convert someone who might otherwise have walked away. The reasons people don’t buy are varied and complex. Some people have unanswered questions, but for whatever reason they don’t ask. Others have a fundamental misunderstanding about the product/service - which can be down to missing/misleading information on your sales page, for example. A few have decided the product/service is not for them based on an incorrect assumption. For example, lots of my customers/clients convince themselves my services are not suitable for product-based businesses - even though I do my best to stress this in my marketing and use relevant testimonials. In many cases, when you provide subscribers  with the information they need, they will decide to buy.  Even if they don’t, at least they’ve had all the information they need to make a decision (which means they may still buy at a later date). But if you’re not brave enough to ask the question, you’ll never know. Which means you’re almost certainly missing out on sales. This is why it’s vital to have a Looked Not Bought sequence in every email campaign you create where you simply say something like: I noticed you’d been checking out x product/service but haven’t yet bought. Let me know if you have any questions. Sometimes people can feel nervous about voicing their concerns. This is why it can be helping to give a list of typical reasons people have given for not buying. I don’t have the budget right now I’m worried I don’t have the time I’m worried it’s too early on in my business If you would like to see my Top 10 podcasts then head to my Podcast Finder and my messenger bot will make some suggestions.    Podcast shownotes About my daily email (2:45) About this podcast episode (4:07) How to send a delivery/welcome email sequence when someone joins your list (5:02) How to use lead magnets to get people to sign up to your email list (5:24) Why a sign-up box on your website won't get people to join your email list (7:41) How to follow up with an email delivery sequence after sending a lead magnet (8:03) How to make sure that people have got your download and avoid the spam folder (09:50) How to get people to email you back and build a relationship (11:45) Why you need an email structure and set templates (13:50) How to move people onto your sales sequence email list (15:20) How to use scarcity in your email marketing and why it focuses peoples minds (16:26) How often you should email people in an email sales sequence (19:38) How to make sure people don't unsubscribe from your whole list (21:09) Why I only have a four day lead-in for sales for my masterclass (23:12) The 3 types of email that you can put in your email sales sequence (23:37) Why emailing people who have looked but not bought will help your sales (25:15) Examples of how to follow up with people if they haven’t bought from you (28:21) Why you need to become part of peoples routine (31:04) Resources janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to generate passive income in your business Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [333] 39 surprisingly easy ways to build your email list (podcast)[334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [359] How to create an email newsletter that people look forward to receiving (podcast) [360] How to get people to open your emails (podcast) [375] How to get your first 1K email subscribers (podcast) [395] How to write addictive email copy with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [400] How to build a large audience for your blog, vlog or podcast (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Instagram Engagement Playbook  Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Publishing regular content on a blog, vlog or podcast can be a great way to build your online audience.  My podcast The Janet Murray Show gets around 35k downloads per month, consistently ranks top of the UK podcast charts for marketing and is the biggest driver for leads and sales in my business. Which is why I’ve invested a huge amount of time and resources into building my podcast audience since I launched in 2015.  But just having a blog, vlog/Youtube channel or podcast isn’t enough. People won’t automatically find your content, just because it’s out there. You need to invest time and resources building an audience for that content.  And while the platforms might be different, the audience-building strategies will be the same - regardless you have a blog, Youtube channel, Facebook Live Show or podcast.  Which is why, in my 400th episode of the podcast I want to share my top audience building strategies with you.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} 1. Consistency Show up regularly Make a public commitment Become part of peoples’ routine Promotion strategy  Promote every episode more than you think  It sounds obvious, but showing up regularly is key. I launched my podcast The Janet Murray Show back in 2015 and I’ve never missed an episode.  I started out publishing a new episode every Friday. For a few years I published two episodes a week (one solo show midweek and one interview episode first thing on a Friday). So on the odd occasion my podcast has gone live later than usual, people have actually messaged me to ask me where it is.  If you struggle with consistency, I’d recommend making a public commitment to posting your new episode/post on a particular date/time e.g. Friday. This gives you accountability (if you’ve promised something publicly, it’s much harder not to do it). It also helps get your audience familiar with your publishing schedule, which means consuming your content can become part of their routine. For example, my podcast listeners often tell me they listen to the latest episode of my podcast on the school run, when they’re cleaning their house on a Saturday or out for a run on a Sunday morning.  Becoming part of peoples’ routine is a sign you’re building an engaged and loyal audience.  Consistency also matters when it comes to the promotion of your blog/vlog or podcast. Most content creators I know vastly underpromote their content. They publish a new episode/post, make a few ‘announcement’ posts about it on social media, then move onto their next piece of content. If you want to build an audience for your blog/vlog/podcast, you need to treat every new post/episode as a launch, which means creating a promotion strategy that you rinse and repeat every time (and add to as time goes on). For example, when my podcast goes live on a Friday I email my list, create some kind of announcement on my Facebook messenger and do an Instagram Story. This is followed up with multiple pieces of social media content across the week. We also regularly promote episodes from my back catalogue. This means finding different ways to talk about the same episode (more on that later).  While there is always more you can do (there’s still lots more I could do to promote each episode) a good rule of thumb is this: promote each episode way more than you feel comfortable with and you’ll probably have it about right.  2. Collaboration  Invite people onto your podcast, FB Live, Youtube, guest blogs Don’t be fooled about the big cheese - smaller often better Get on other peoples’ podcasts etc Speaking, guest teaching, press  One of the quickest ways to build your own audience is to get in front of other peoples’. This is why inviting guests on your podcast, Facebook Live or Youtube show - or inviting people to guest blog on your website - can be a great way to build your audience. When you do this, they are likely to share that content with their own audience, which means people will want to find out more about you.  It’s often assumed that collaborating with people with bigger audiences than your own is the best strategy. Personally I’ve found that collaborating with people with smaller, engaged audiences can often be more effective than the big names in my industry. This is because people who already have a large audience may not have the time - or inclination - to share your podcast episode/Youtube interview. Whereas someone with a small, but engaged audience will share the heck out of your content - and do it with so much enthusiasm -you may find you get better results.  Creating guest content for other peoples’ platforms - those with similar audiences to yours - is another great way to build an audience for your own content. Here’s how to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (these tips apply to pitching yourself for anything). Speaking at live events, teaching guest classes and taking part in virtual summits or webinars can be another great way to grow your audience. Although I would not recommend paying to be part of virtual summits - unless there is a very compelling reason to do so (and evidence that you will get a return on investment).  Getting press coverage can be another great way to build your audience - as long as your call-to-action sends people to your blog/vlog or podcast (more on that later).  3. Conversation Post and flee Want to get people talking in public about your content Start conversations then give link Different angles  Tagging  Make time to engage One of the biggest mistakes I see bloggers, vloggers and podcasters making is what I refer to as ‘post and flee’ i.e. they post a few announcement posts about their blog/vlog or podcast on social media then and do nothing else until the next one comes out. Recommendations are powerful. Public recommendations are even more powerful. So, if you can generate public conversations about your content, people are much more likely to want to check it out.  So instead of posting announcements about your latest blog, vlog or podcast, ask questions that relate to the topic of your podcast. For example, if I have a new podcast episode coming out on how to get more engagement on Instagram I will start by asking questions to pre-qualify people who might be interested in listening to that podcast e.g. how would you rate your engagement on Instagram, are you interested in learning strategies on how to increase your Instagram engagement. Then I will share the link with people who have demonstrated an interest in the topic.  While that might seem like more work, it’s more effective because you’re getting that content into the hands of people who actually need it. And those people are far more likely to share.  I might also post some polarising content - for example asking people if they believe the algorithm is to blame for poor engagement on Instagram or poor content.  If you don’t know what the algorithm is, by the way, it’s the complicated - and super top secret - mathematical equation Facebook uses to determine how many people your content is shown to).  Across the course of a week, I will find different ways to talk about that same piece of content - looking at different angles/subtopics in different formats e.g. audiograms, posts, memes, videos.  Tagging people in - for example, people you’ve mentioned in your blog/vlog or podcast - can be another great way to get engagement. When you mention people, they’re often happy to comment, like and share.  Using a social media scheduler is fine, but if you don’t make time to engage with your followers, your audience will not grow.  4. Grow your audience on social media You might not want to hear this, but the more followers you have on social media, the easier it will be to grow the audience for your blog, vlog or podcast. The more of the right followers that is. Which is why it’s important to focus on growing your following - and your engagement - on at least one social media platform.  You can join my Build Your Online Audience programme here 5. Give one call-to-action  If you want to grow your audience for a blog/vlog or podcast, another powerful thing you can do is issue a single call-to-action. So every time you write a guest blog, do some guest teaching, are interviewed in a podcast, send people to your blog/vlog or podcast. Add a banner to all your social media channels, put it in the email signature on your emails - in your messenger bot. Everywhere if you can. [331] What it really takes to build an audience with John Lee Dumas (podcast) 6. Help people find your content If you’re publishing a regular blog/vlog or podcast - with the aim of promoting your business - you should be creating content that solves your ideal customers’ problems. Which means, if you’ve got your topics right, people will actually be looking for content on the topics you cover.  Which means you need to make it as easy as possible for people to find your content. This means you need to use effective titles that use the words and phrases people are actually searching for, rather than things that sound clever.  A lot of this is down to common sense and simply involves thinking about the kind of things your ideal customer/clients will be searching for online. But using keyword tools can help you refine your terms. I have a full explanation of how to do keyword research  in this post on how to make sales from your business blog (episode 336 of the podcast) but you can start  by using Google autocomplete  Type in your topic title and take note of the suggestions that come up under the search box — that’ll give you a great idea of the kinds of things that people are searching for relating to that subject. You can apply the same trick to Youtube and Pinterest too. The key is to find search terms that are popular, but not so popular it would be impossible for your content to come up first in search. So a term like ‘how to write a press release’ is a popular but broad term, but how to write a press release for your small business is more niche. Which is why my blog post on that topic comes up on the first page of Google.   Other tools I use for keyword research.  Keywords Everywhere  Answer The Public  Google Ads Keyword Finder  There is quite specific keyword research you can do on Youtube and you can optimise your content to make it more easily found. Three of my most successful blog posts [333] 39 surprisingly easy ways to build your email list  [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows  [338] Why you feel afraid of selling  If you would like to see my Top 10. Then head to my Podcast Finder and my messenger bot will take you through What about paid ads?  Contrary to popular belief, putting money behind something doesn’t mean it will necessarily perform well. If you don’t know how to create engaging content that would encourage people to take action (even if it wasn’t an ad) you’re generally wasting your time. PLUS most people don’t buy from cold ads - unless you’ve got your targeting really spot on.  [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville  (podcast)   janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder   Podcast shownotes About this episode and why I recorded this podcast (3:30) The podcasts that launched from my Get Your Podcast Live in 60 days course (7:59) Why I’d still start a podcast even if I was starting again (10:27) Why sharing regular valuable core content will keep you in mind (12:26) Why consistency is key when creating core content (13:49) How to promote your podcast and why you need a regular promotion cycle (18:09) How to build an audience by collaborating (and why big names can be a red herring)  (22:22) What you need to think about before you pitch to go on a podcast  (26:06) How you can build your audience for your content by speaking at events (32:42) Why you should focus on just one main type of core content (34:18) How to create a buzz about your content using social media posts (34:37) How to get more engagement on your social media posts  (37:37) Why you need to build your audience on social media to get your content seen (40:53) Why you need to have one clear call to action to your content (42:19) How to make it easy for people to find your content with the right keywords (44:00) Three of my best performing blog posts (49:33) Why you need good organic engagement before spending money on paid ads (51:24) About my Build Your Online Audience programme (55:01) Resources janetmurray.co.uk/podcastfinder Colin Gray   Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Podcasting episodes [080] Three must-do tips for pitching yourself as a podcast guest (podcast)[190] How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (and why you must do) (podcast) [253] How to land guest appearances on podcasts with Nicola Holland (podcast) [263] Why I changed the name of my podcast (podcast) [376] Lessons learned from 1 millions downloads of my podcast (podcast) [383] How to get your podcast live in 60 days (podcast) Other podcast episodes [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville  (podcast)[331] What it really takes to build an audience with John Lee Dumas (podcast)[333] 39 surprisingly easy ways to build your email list (podcast)[334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast)[336] How to make sales from your business blog (podcast)[338] Why you feel scared about selling (podcast)[343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [399] How to build your online audience during a global crisis (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (blog) Seven compelling reasons to start a podcast in 2020 (blog post) How to create an editorial calendar for your business(blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Instagram Engagement Playbook  Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you wondering how you can build your online audience during the Coronavirus crisis? Perhaps your online audience is really small and you'd like to make it bigger? Or maybe you’re thinking what's the point in building an audience during a global pandemic? Especially if you can’t actually sell your product or service at the moment? In this podcast I explain exactly why there’s never been a better time to build an online audience.  And I give you practical tips and examples that you can implement right now to build your online audience. I explain why your content is at the heart of your audience building and how to lean in and find the angle that you can talk about in relation to your product or service.  And why you MUST talk about Coronavirus and not just sweep it under the carpet. I also share why you can't just rely on using paid ads to sell because your audience needs a genuine connection before they will buy. I give you examples of businesses that have adapted and are creating great content about their products and services.  Plus why you must keep showing up; and how you can connect with your audience by demonstrating your expertise - even if you can’t sell your product or service at the moment. So that as soon as you can start selling your audience knows who you are and can't wait to buy from you. I’d love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About my Build Your Audience programme (3:38) About this episode and why you need to build an online audience (7:49) Why you need to build a relationship and you can’t rely on ads to get sales (9:54) Why the content you create is at the heart of your audience building (10:34) Why you mustn’t shy away from building your audience and you need to be visible (11:51) How live video will help you build your audience (with examples)  (12:57) Why there’s never been a better time to build your audience (14:50) Why you must look after your existing audience and paying clients (15:01) Why you have to talk about Coronavirus (and why people want to hear about it) (16:54) Why you need to be prepared to change your content strategy (21:20) How to make your audience remember you by creating helpful content (22:15) Examples of businesses that have been creating helpful content for their audiences (24:24) Why you should show up and share your expertise even if you can’t sell (26:49) Resources Matt Haig Instagram Join my Build Your Online Audience Programme My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [377] How to write super engaging copy about your business with Jo Watson (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast) [395] How to create addictive email copy with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [398] What sort of content should you create during a global crisis (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Instagram Engagement Playbook  Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Struggling to know what sort of content you should be creating during the current global crisis and worried about saying the wrong thing? Wondering how to create content about your business and keep selling during the Coronavirus pandemic? With things changing on a daily basis - it's hard to know what to say - let alone how to plan your content. In this podcast I share practical advice and guidance about how to navigate your way through the current global crisis and how to go about thinking about your content during this pandemic. I explain why you mustn’t be afraid to lean in and talk about the C-Word. Plus why you should definitely switch off the scheduler. I explain why you mustn’t assume that people aren’t buying and why you must keep selling - and how to do it without appearing insensitive or spammy. Plus how to position yourself so that people understand WHY you are selling to avoid those ‘neggy’ comments. I also tell you why adapting and selling now will put your business in a much stronger position for when the crisis is over. I'd love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About this episode (1:24) Why you should switch off your content scheduler (5:30) Why you must lean into the C-word and not avoid it (6:56) How to think about your content and what to create (8:20) Why you need to create content that solves an immediate problem (10:04) Why you shouldn’t be afraid to be selling and how to set out your position (11:28) How to sell without it looking insensitive (or look like you’re cashing in) (14:42) What people are still buying and why you mustn’t assume that no one is buying (16:16) Why you should explain that you are selling and why you need to be upfront (17:40) Why selling now will future proof your business and put you in a stronger position (18:59) Examples of clients that have moved their business online (20:09) How to create relevant timely offers that help people with their problems (22:38) Why you should be flexible about pricing and reward loyalty not slash prices (26:27) How to help people that don’t have the budget right now (28:34) Why you need to think about the problem your product solves not the product (30:01) How to use other peoples content and why it doesn’t have to be businessy (31:40) Resources Matt Haig Instagram Joe Wicks YouTube My Emergency Response Plan Masterclass - How to plan sell and launch an online Webinar or Masterclass for your business  Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast) [395] How to create addictive email copy with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Instagram Engagement Playbook  Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Ever wondered about adding to your income stream? Maybe you’ve considered selling to corporate organisations but you’re just not sure how to do it? Or what content to create to attract them? In this episode sales coach Jess Lorimer explains how to create content that attracts the right sort of corporate clients. Jess who helps online business owners sell to corporate organisations and is host of the Selling to Corporate podcast explains why you really should consider adding a corporate revenue stream to your business. She explains what it means to be selling to a corporate organisation and the steps you can take to start selling. Jess shares the exact type of content that you need to be creating to sell to a corporate organisation and how to use LinkedIn the RIGHT way to attract corporates without just waiting for them to discover you from scrolling through their LinkedIn feed. Plus the two types of content that you NEED to be creating to attract corporates and why you MUST remember that corporates aren’t robots and people need to feel a connection. And why you should never be afraid to show your personality when you create your content - even when creating for corporates. This episode is full of valuable and practical tips from Jess that you can implement immediately to start creating content that converts and attracts . I’d love to know what you think {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About Jess and how her business has evolved (3:01) What is a corporate and advantages of having a corporate revenue stream (6:01) Why you should add a corporate revenue stream to your business (07:28) Steps to take if you want to sell to corporates and how to find the low hanging fruit (13:41) The two types of content that you can create to sell to corporates (19:45) Types of proactive content that you can create (19:45) How to use the two different types of content on different audience platforms (20:39) The difference between proactive content and broadcast content (23:12) Examples of different types of proactive content (24:07) Examples of different types of broadcast content (24:42) Why you need to make sure you have the right audience for your content (26:42) Why you need to create content that makes corporates remember you (31:00) Why you should create broadcast content that shows corporates your personality (38:05) How to create content that can alert a corporate to a problem they might need to solve (44:37 How you can create content that starts discussions and demonstrates your expertise (46:42) Resources Connect with Jess on Instagram Listen to Jess' podcast Selling to Corporate Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast) [395] How to create addictive email copy with Rob & Kennedy (podcast) [Bonus] How to turn your in person services into online offerings (podcast) [Bonus] How to generate income fast by creating a power hour for your business (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Instagram Engagement Playbook  Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Why not create a Power Hour: an online consultancy session, where people pay a one-off fee to pick your brain/get advice about a topic you have expertise in?  In the short-term - where you may not be able to physically deliver in-person services due to the Coronavirus pandemic - it can help you continue to serve your ideal customers/clients. In the longer-term, it can be a great way to generate additional income for business - without having to leave your desk/studio.  It can also be a great way to deal with people who ask for help - but don’t seem to want to pay for your time. So the next time someone says: ‘I’d love to pick your brain about xxx,’ you can invite them to book a Power Hour.  But how do you choose a topic for your Power Hour? What tech will you need to deliver it? And how much should you charge?  That’s exactly what I’ll cover in this podcast episode - along with tips on how to promote your Power Hour.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} As with anything in your business, the more specific/niche you can be the better. So while you can offer a general Power Hour (where anyone can ask you anything about your expert topic) you’ll almost certainly get more take up if you hone in on a specific type of customer/client and/or a common problem your customers/clients experience.  Here are some examples of Power Hours created by my current/former clients:  So for example, Facebook ads expert Laura Moore has a power hour that focuses on increasing ad conversions. Virtual assistant Catherine Gladywyn offers a power hour for VAs who are stuck on something in their business.  Architectural technologist Jon Clayton has created a power hour for design and architecture Amy Caiger has a Power Hour that focuses on helping business owners find their niche.  If you have a product-based business, you can still create a Power Hour. You can either offer something that relates to the problem you solve. For example, I sell a Social Media Diary & Planner. Although I don’t currently do this, I could offer a content planning Power Hour for people who want help creating their content plan. I could offer these sessions to existing diary owners as an upsell.  Or I could open them up to anyone who needs help with content planning and offer the diary as an upsell at the end of a consultancy session.  Or you could offer a Power Hour to other product-based businesses on how to do something specific that you are already doing successfully but they might be struggling with e.g. creating a marketing plan, setting up a shop on their website.    How to deliver your Power Hour You can use video-conferencing software like Zoom which allows you to share your screen and participants share theirs with you. You can also share documents and chat ‘live’ with participants. And you can send them the recording afterwards in case they want to go over anything again. Zoom starts from £11.99 a month.  Alternatives to Zoom: Go To Meeting, Team Viewer, Join.me, Google Hangouts, Meet.me & BlueJeans. If you’re worried your clients will be overwhelmed by the tech, it’s a good idea to send them written instructions and/or a video using a free tool like Loom showing them how to use it (including how to join).    How to ensure your Power Hour is productive To ensure the session is productive, I’d recommend you do the following:  Create a dedicated page on your website for you Power Hour that includes information about the session and a link to book  Use a tool like Calendly or Acuity Scheduling so clients can book straight into your diary  Send a pre-call email on how to prepare for the session (including any information they might need to bring to the session) and an outline of how the call will be structured.. PLUS  instructions on how to use the video conferencing software from their phone/desktop. I’d recommend sending this information immediately after booking, then at least one reminder email before the call  Send a follow-up email within 24 hours of the session, with a link to the recording, a short follow-up report with details of what was discussed and up to three key action points (one side of A4 should be plenty).   These emails can be re-used and adapted - saving you hours of time in the long run. In fact, the whole process can be automated so people can book straight into your diary, are delivered the link to join the call and reminders before the call.  I include template/swipe files for these types of emails in my How To Turn Your Offline Services Into Online Offerings masterclass.  If you’re worried that what you teach/coach can’t be delivered online, I’ve personally worked with a pilates instructor, bread making teacher, psychologist, personal trainer and jewellery- making teacher - all of whom deliver their training/consultancy online. And if they can do it, so can you.    How to price your Power Hour  It can be tempting to base your pricing on what others are charging in your industry. But this can lead to you vastly undercharging - or even overcharging - for your services.  Your pricing should reflect the transformation you can create for your client - not how long it takes you to prepare and deliver the session. So if you can share information/advice/guidance that can save them tons of time, money and/or help them generate income in their business - because you’ve spent years honing your craft - your price should absolutely reflect that.  I’ve generated over a million pounds in sales from the copy I’ve written for my website, sales pages, email marketing and social media. And the reason I’m able to create engaging content is because I spent the best part of 20 years writing and editing for national newspapers. PLUS I’ve invested huge amounts of time (and money) learning about copywriting - specifically for online business. This means I can look at a sales page, social media post or marketing email and immediately see what needs to be changed. Which is why I charge £500 + VAT for a Power Hour - not £50+ VAT. That said, I haven’t always charged that fee. I started at around £99 + VAT and gradually scaled up as I got more experienced and gathered more testimonials.  So start by thinking about the transformation you can create for someone and the impact that could have on their life/business. It can help to spell out the return on investment for your clients. So for example, if I could give you some advice on your sales copy that would help 5x your investment, would you think £500 +VAT was expensive? Probably not. It’s all about how you frame it.  But you do need to have the experience to match your pricing. You can’t charge £500 + VAT for your Power Hour just because someone else in your industry is doing it (well you can, but you may not make any sales). So if you haven’t yet delivered any Power Hours it can be worth offering a number of discounted sessions so you can gather testimonials. I wouldn’t recommend offering them for free. People generally don’t value what they get for free. Which means they’re more likely to cancel/show up late to the session and less likely to implement your advice. Even a modest fee will ensure they have some skin in the game.    How to promote your Power Hour If you already have an email list - great.  Simply email your list, tell them about your Power Hour and (providing you’ve created the right offer for the right audience) you should get bookings. I’d also recommend doing some social media promotion too. If you have a blog/podcast/Youtube channel, it’s also worth sharing information about it there.  If you don’t have an email list (or only have a small list) you’ll need to use proactive outreach. That means making a list of people you know (e.g. current/former clients) who might be interested in your offer. PLUS asking for recommendations/referrals from friends/colleagues. If you’re not sure how to get started with proactive outreach, the first module in my Build Your Online Audience programme focuses on exactly that topic (and includes email/message templates you can adapt for proactive outreach).  Need help building your email list? Check out: https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/39-surprisingly-easy-ways-to-increase-your-email-subscribers/ I also have an email list building programme inside my Build Your Online Audience programme Buy My Emergency Response Plan Podcast shownotes The context for this bonus podcast episode (01:44) Find out about my Emergency Response Plan (4:32) What is a power hour and how you can use it in your business (06:50) Why power hours are great for getting rid of the tire kickers (8:37) Why you should choose a niche topic for a power hour (09:04) Examples of successful niche power hours (12:57) How to create a power hour for a product-based business (14:11) How you can use a power hour to upset and get future business (16:15) How to use a power hour to decide if you want to work with someone (17:57) How to deliver a power hour and apps you can use to deliver (19:30) How to make sure your power hour is productive and take payment (22:10) Tools you can use to make it easy to schedule a power hour in (23:04) How to prepare people for the power hour (and why you need to) (24:54) How to follow up a power hour and what you should include (27:10) How to plan out a power hour call and manage expectations (29:29) How to price a power hour and think of the transformation you offer (30:04) Why you need good testimonials (and how to get them) (32:42) How to promote a power hour (and what to do if you don’t get a response) (34:25) How to promote a power hour if you don’t have an email list or audience (36:09) Resources Video Conferencing Software Zoom Go To Meeting Team Viewer Join Me Google Hangouts Meetme Blue Jeans Actuity Calendly Presenting software Screenflow Mac Thinkific Teachable Wistia Vimeo YouTube Audacity Soundcloud Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [333]  39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [375] How to get your first 1K email subscribers (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast) Bonus podcast Get my  Instagram Engagement Playbook  How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Have you ever wondered how to grow a really engaged Facebook group? Where there is a real sense of community - and people genuinely engage? If you’d love some strategies for growing your own online community or you’re thinking of starting a Facebook group then this podcast with video and audio producer Steve Folland is a must-listen.  Steve who is also the host of the Being Freelance podcast shares how he grew his online community and Facebook group from his own podcast. He explains how he started his Facebook group after growing his podcast audience and how he links the content in his Facebook group back to his podcast - even down to the questions that he asks when people join the group. Steve explains how important it is that your Facebook group is genuine and why you have to show up and set the tone of the group with your own face and personality. Plus why you must create really good quality consistent content. He shares the strategies that he’s used to engage his community and grow his Facebook group.  Find out why having a specific niche for his Facebook group has made his community really successful and buzzing. Plus how Steve has used his Facebook group to increase his online presence and his podcast audience. I'd love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes How Steve started the Being Freelance podcast and then his Facebook group (2:11) How Steve uses his podcast to get people to join his Facebook group (3:23) Why you need to set the tone of a group for people to connect with you (7:48) Why having a niche Facebook group helps with engagement and content (9:27) How Steve creates a buzz and makes people feel part of the community (10:14) Why you need to set out what you will genuinely use the group for at the outset (16:20) How Steve set his group rules and the questions he asks when people join (18:13) How Steve gets people involved and links the group back to the podcast (22:44) How Steve repurposes content in the group to use on other platforms (24:14) How Steve uses his podcast to drive people to his Facebook community (27:40) Why your personality, consistency + content will help attract people to your group (30:11) Why you should niche your Facebook community as much as possible (34:49) How Steve’s Facebook group has enabled him to monetise his podcast (35:57) How having an online community has helped Steve with his online business (39:19) Resources Steve's website Being Freelance Get my 31 post ideas for your Facebook group Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [327] Why I am closing my 13.5K Facebook Group (podcast) [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook group without annoying your members (podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook Group from ghost town to garden party with Bella Vasta (podcast) [361] 15 post ideas for your Facebook group (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast [Bonus] How to turn your inperson services into online offerings (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Instagram Engagement Playbook  Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

If you deliver in-person consultancy, training or coaching in your business you will almost certainly have been affected by the Coronavirus outbreak. Perhaps you’ve had client meetings cancelled. Or maybe you’ve had workshops/consultancy gigs postponed or put on hold. It could be that you’ve had to cancel live events/workshops of your own. All of which is likely to have an impact on the bottom line of your business. Health always comes first of course. But with little sign of the crisis abating, it’s sensible to consider how you might offer online alternatives to your offline services.  Not only is this sensible in the midst of a worldwide flu epidemic, it’s also a way to start generating passive/semi-passive income in your business - which means you can stop trading time for money (or certainly do less of it)). In this special podcast episode, I’ll show you four ways you can start turning your offline services into offerings.  Delivering in-person coaching online  Turn your coaching/consultancy programmes into online courses/memberships Turn in-person workshops into webinars/online masterclasses  Launch a playbook/ebook {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Delivering in-person coaching online  Booked to deliver 1-2-1/group coaching in-person? This can easily be delivered online, using a free video-conferencing software like Zoom which allows you to share your screen and participants share theirs with you. You can also share documents and chat ‘live’ with participants. And you can send them the recording afterwards in case they want to go over anything again.  Alternatives to Zoom: Go To Meeting, Team Viewer, Join.me, Google Hangouts, Meet.me & BlueJeans. If you’re worried your clients will be overwhelmed by the tech, you can send them written instructions and/or a video using a free tool like Loom showing them how to use it (including how to join).  To ensure the session is productive, I’d recommend creating a sequence of emails that includes: Information on how to book in a 1-2-1 session with you (they can use a tool like Calendly or Acuity Scheduling to book straight into your diary)  Information on how to prepare for the session including information on any information on what they might need to bring to the session. PLUS how to use the video conferencing software from their phone/desktop.  Information on what to do after the online session (this might include a link to the recording), any action points agreed and follow up work  These emails can be re-used and adapted - saving you hours of time in the long run. In fact, the whole process can be automated so people can book straight into your diary, be delivered the link to join the call and reminders before the call.  I include template/swipe files for this sequence of emails in my How To Turn Your Offline Services Into Online Offerings masterclass [xxx].  If you’re worried that what you teach/coach can’t be delivered online, I’ve personally worked with a pilates instructor, bread making teacher, psychologist, personal trainer and jewellery- making teacher - all of whom deliver their training/consultancy online. And if they can do it, so can you.  Turn your coaching/consultancy programmes into online courses/memberships Booked to deliver in-person training or a workshop? This can be delivered live, using a free video-conferencing software like Zoom (or one of the other examples mentioned above) which allow you to share your screen, share documents and chat ‘live’ with participants.  With a bit of tweaking, it’s possible to make online sessions really interactive. Not only can you use the ‘chat’ function to ask and answer questions, but you can also share your screen with participants and they can share theirs with you, which means you can give feedback on literally anything. So if you’re a tennis coach, you can give feedback on technique. If you’re a pottery or sewing teacher you can check peoples’ creative work. And if you’re a singing teacher you can advise on pitch and tone. With the right technology, pretty much anything is possible.  And you don’t have to deliver the training live. You can record the sessions in advance using video conferencing software like Zoom and/or a screencasting software like Screenflow (for Mac) or Camtasia for (PC) which allow you to talk over your slides  You can host your video tutorials free using a site like Teachable or Thinkific. But you don’t need dedicated software to host video tutorials/or an online course. You can upload them to a video hosting site like Wistia or Vimeo or simply add them as unlisted/private videos on Youtube. Any digital downloads e.g. workbooks, cheat sheets, checklists can be stored in a file hosting service like Dropbox or Google Drive (you can just paste a link under the relevant video tutorial). This is exactly what I did for the BETA launch of my online podcasting course: Get Your Podcast Live in 60 Days.  You can use these resources to create audio files/podcasts (or use a digital recording app like Audacity). These can be hosted on any of the platforms above or you can upload them to Soundcloud.  Think what you teach can’t be delivered online? Check out an online course site like Udemy where you’ll find digital resources on everything from surfing to singing to gastric bypass surgery.  Want to learn more? I cover how to launch an online course/workshop in my online masterclass How To Turn Your Offline Services Into Online Offerings masterclass [xxx].  Turn in-person workshops into webinars/online masterclasses  Run your own live workshops/events? This can also be delivered live, using free video-conferencing software like Zoom (or one of the other examples mentioned above) which allow you to share your screen, share documents and chat ‘live’ with participants.  While I’d recommend promoting live events/workshops at least 12 weeks ahead, you can promote webinars/online classes less than a week before the event. In fact, promoting them too far in advance can mean you actually get fewer people showing up (people just forget about it).  To ensure your webinar is productive, I’d recommend creating the following sequences of emails:  A four-day promotion sequence - promoting the webinar to people and telling them what will be covered A sequence of reminder emails  - reminding people about the webinar and any preparation they might need to do (setting a pre-webinar task can be a great way to keep people engaged before the session) A sequence of follow-up emails that deliver the recording, slides, handouts (and any other resources shared during the session) and offer and upsell to another product/service I include template/swipe files for this sequence of emails in my How To Turn Your Offline Services Into Online Offerings masterclass [xxx].   Don’t have an email list? Read: 39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers. You should also promote the webinar/online masterclass across your social media channels. I included samples of the kinds of posts you might create in my How To Turn Your Offline Services Into Online Offerings masterclass [xxx].   Once your webinar is recorded you can turn it into an automated, on-demand webinar using a tool like Ever Webinar.  Launch a playbook/ebook Launching a playbook/ebook can be a great way to turn your knowledge/expertise into a valuable resource you can sell - without leaving your home office. A playbook/ebook is a digital download, typically of around 3-5000 words that solves a very specific problem for a very specific type of client.  I go into much more depth in my how to launch a playbook for your business online masterclass.  There is some work up front in writing the download. You may also need to invest time and/or money (if you don’t have the expertise yourself) for professional-looking design.  But once you’ve created your playbook/ebook - and automated the purchase/delivery process - you can (quite literally) sell it in your sleep. In the first few weeks of launching my Instagram Engagement Playbook, I sold almost 300 copies.  While you’re unlikely to make millions from a playbook/ebook (unless you already have a large audience) it can be a great way to attract qualified leads you can upsell to more high-ticket products.services.  Ideally, you’ll sell your ebook via your website (which means you can track who is buying from you and, crucially, get their email address for upsells/cross-sells) using a resource plug-in like Woocommerce or Shopify. To deliver the playbook/ebook, you’ll need to integrate this with your email marketing software. Converting the naysayers If you are taking services online that you have previously delivered offline, you may come up against some resistance from clients who don’t believe online training/coaching/consultancy can be as effective as offline.  It’s a good idea to create content that educates your clients on the benefits of online learning PLUS how it works (often resistance is based around fear e.g. of not being able to use the tech), Demo/sample videos can also help (once people understand what an online class might be like, they’re usually happy to get on board). Finally, gathering testimonials from your clients will also help a lot. If you can get testimonials in which they explicitly talk about how they were concerned about online learning, but their fears were totally unfounded that is ideal. Podcast shownotes About this bonus podcast episode (01:04) The four different ways you can take your business from offline to online (5:23) How to deliver your in-person workshop or consultancy online (6:46) Software to use for video conferencing and explaining the tech (7:49) How to streamline and automate the booking process of your online course (9:55) How to follow up your online sessions and what people need to know (12:01) Why you can deliver any type of training online (14:09) How to turn your in-person coaching/consultancy into an online course (14:49) How you can use video to give people feedback on online (16:30) Apps for presenting your content online and how to keep it simple (17:30) How to turn your in-person workshops into webinars/masterclasses (21:57) Why you don’t need a big lead time for promoting online webinars (23:52) Emails that you can send to promote your online webinar (24:50) Using your follow up emails to upsell (25:44) Why you need to have people on your email list (26:20) How to resell your webinar and use it in your sales funnel (28:49) How to generate sales and leads by creating a playbook or ebook (29:40) How to convert clients who don’t think it will work online (32:20) Resources Video Conferencing Software Zoom Go To Meeting Team Viewer Join Me Google Hangouts Meetme Blue Jeans Actuity Calendly Presenting software Screenflow Mac Thinkific Teachable Wistia Vimeo YouTube Audacity Soundcloud Masterclass - How to turn your in-person services into online offerings Masterclass - How to launch a playbook for your business Other podcast episodes [333]  39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [375] How to get your first 1K email subscribers (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast Get my  Instagram Engagement Playbook  How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to know how to write email copy that's so addictive that people can't wait to receive your emails? In fact, they are so keen to get their hands on your email newsletter and find out what you've got to say - that if it doesn't arrive when it normally does - they email you to find out where it is? If so you'll love this special podcast episode with email marketing experts Rob & Kennedy which was recorded at my live content planning masterclass 2020Sorted. They explain how to create curiosity and desire in your emails and the types of call to action you can include to make sure that your reader takes action. They share seven ways to get people addicted to reading your emails and make sure they open them. It's full of really practical advice and takeaways that you can apply straight away in your own business. I'd love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes Where does email marketing fit in your marketing strategy (5:21) How to get people on your email list (6:07) Why you must always have a call to action in your email newsletter (7:12) Why you shouldn’t worry about emailing your newsletter list (9:25) How to create curiosity and desire in your email newsletter  (12:01) Why you must put your personality into your email newsletter (13:41) How to use your own experiences to create content for your email newsletter (16:03) How to write addictive email newsletters that get subscribers excited (18:42) Seven ways to get people addicted to opening your emails  (20:30) How to sell in your emails and how often you should (25:37) Reasons that you must always sell in your emails (27:04) Why your email must be about helping your customer and not selling your product (27:47) Ways to seamlessly pitch from your main email story through to a sales pitch (28:17) Resources Get my  Instagram Engagement Playbook  Other podcast episodes [333]  39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [375] How to get your first 1K email subscribers (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) [393] How to create engaging content when you only sell one product or service (podcast How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to know how to use IGTV to build your followers on Instagram? Or maybe you’re thinking IGTV is a bit too techy and you don’t think it’s right for your business and you haven’t quite got round to using it yet? If you’re feeling a bit mystified about IGTV and you’d love to know how IGTV can help build your Instagram audience - then this podcast episode with Instagram specialist Helen Perry is a must-listen. Helen shares tons of really practical advice on how to use IGTV, build your audience on IGTV and how she’s successfully used IGTV to generate leads in her business. Helen explains how to be fearless when it comes to creating and filming your videos. And why you shouldn’t let perfectionism hold you back (in fact imperfection can make a stronger connection with your audience). If you’re worried it’s all bit complicated for you Helen explains how to set up your IGTV channel, how to post to the Instagram grid, the types of content that work well on IGTV and how long your videos should be. Helen explains about posting your IGTV video and what to consider about the aesthetics of your IGTV video in your Instagram grid. PLUS why you don’t need any fancy equipment to create your IGTV videos. I’d love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About Helen and her background and how she became an Instagram specialist (2:22) The content you can create for different parts of the Instagram platform (5:55) How to get IGTV on your account and what to use it for (8:48) Why IGTV is easier to use and quicker to get started with than YouTube (11:47) Tools to create IGTV videos and why you should use captions (14:49) Why you don’t need any fancy kit to make IGTV videos (16:00) Why your video doesn’t need to be perfect (and why imperfection is good) (18:26) How creating IGTV video has helped Helen grow her Instagram followers (19:49) How Helen’s content marketing on IGTV has led to enquiries for work (22:29) Why you need to be consistent with IGTV and videos don’t need to be long (27:02) Why you should post a small valuable specific tip on IGTV (29:00) How to get inspiration for IGTV content if you don't know what to post (30:38) How to create IGTV content for product-based businesses (32:45) Where to post IGTV video and what aesthetics you need to consider (38:12) Optimum posting times for IGTV and why you should share in the first 24 hours (40:33) How to deal with negative comments on Instagram (43:15) Resources Helen's website notaboutthekids Helen's Instagram @notaboutthekids Rode Microphone For editing your IGTV - Inshot For designing your IGTV video - A design kit [388] How much content should you give away for free (podcast) Get Janet's  Instagram Engagement Playbook  Other podcast episodes [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K fast (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) [392] How to get more engagement on Instagram (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you struggle to plan and create content because you only sell one product or service? Or perhaps you just feel like your content gets repetitive at times. You’d love to find new ways of talking about the products or services you sell. If this sounds like you, you’ll love this podcast episode. In it, I share practical tips and tactics that will help you plan and create content about ONE product or service - even if it’s the only thing you sell.  I’ll show you how to create ‘peak points’ in your business that allow you to create fresh ‘buzz’ about your product or service.  Plus How you can find and identify less obvious 'peak points' in your business or industry by understanding your customer or clients pain points. I'd love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes What inspired me to create this podcast episode (3:32) How to create a yearly content plan for your business (and what might be holding you back)  (4:26) Why you can’t sell the same product or service the same way all year round (7:06) Why you need to be constantly relaunching your same product or service (9:29) How to create content and peak points around different stages of the buying process (15:40) Finding natural peak points examples by different industries (17:01) How to find your business’ natural peak points for sales (22:08) How to find the natural peak points in your industry (23:01) How to find the less obvious peak points by thinking about your customer's pain points (26:19) How to use awareness days to create peak points in your business (27:35) How to create artificial peak points in your business (32:28) How to think creatively about peak points for a product-based business (34:49) Resources Get my Instagram Engagement Playbook  Instagram @JanMurrayUK [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [355] How to create and launch your own planner (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast)[386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you ever find yourself stuck on what to post on Instagram, whether it’s on your Instagram grid or Instagram Stories or IGTV? Or maybe you’re just not getting ANY engagement on your Instagram posts and you’d love to get more eyes on your content and get more likes, comments and shares? Then you’ll love this podcast where I share the six types of content that are guaranteed to get you engagement on Instagram. I’ll explain exactly what the types of content are and how you can use them to get more engagement on Instagram Plus how to save time by using other peoples content to grow your Instagram account and how you can create content that builds connections and relationships (and why it doesn’t have to be business-related) I’d love to know what you think. If you'd love more help with your  Instagram engagement, then try my Instagram Engagement Playbook {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes How to create content that educates people on Instagram (2:25) Examples of content that educates for a product based Instagram account (3:32) How to find and create original inspiring content on Instagram (and why you need to experiment) (7:06) How to use curated content on your Instagram account (and why you should) (9:37) When to use caution when sharing other peoples content on Instagram (12:30) How to repurpose other people's Instagram quotes (and how to credit) (13:45) Examples of Inspiring Instagram accounts to follow (15:07) How to create entertaining content on Instagram and why it should be relatable (17:25) How to build relationships on Instagram by creating content that celebrates (18:32) How to use Instagram (especially Instagram Stories) to create discussion content  (21:06) Why discussion content is great for building business relationships (22:37) Why you must create sales content on Instagram (and how to do it) (23:10) About my Instagram Engagement Playbook (28:11) Resources Get my Instagram Engagement Playbook  Instagram @JanMurrayUK TheOttoHouse NotAboutTheKids h.e.l.e.n.m.a.r.i.e. [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts for when you're all out of ideas (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K fast (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [387] How to create more content in less time with Amy Woods (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) [391] How to write better social media captions (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook Instagram Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you ever get stuck when you're writing social media captions or maybe you find the ones that you write just aren't engaging enough for your audience? Well, if any of that resonates with you, you're going to love this podcast episode because I talk about how to write more engaging social media captions. I explain why you need to write as you speak and how to figure out your unique brand voice. I share with you five tips for creating your own really engaging social media posts. And the three types of caption that you can create to get engagement from your audience - and you can use them on your social media posts straight away. Plus I explain how I create those tiny moments of drama in my social media posts. I share tons of examples of the captions that I create on my own platforms including my Instagram posts (and why it doesn’t take as much time as you’d think).   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   Podcast shownotes   About this podcast (5:27) Why you should write as you speak and how to figure out your brand voice (5:50) Why you need to work out your unique brand voice (10:50) Why keeping your captions as short as they can be will have the most impact (11:50) How to make sure people engage with you by having a call to action (CTA) on every caption (14:30) How to make sure you don’t lose your audience by taking them straight to the drama (16:50) Why you should keep your captions to just one story (19:15) How to layout your captions and make them easy for people to read (20:25) How to create a call to action caption and when to use it (21:17) How to create an explainer caption and how to use it with an image (24:22) How to create a story caption and why it should be compelling rather than lengthy (28:05) How to make your story post memorable and why it should create a single takeaway for your reader (30:39) How to increase your engagement by creating relatable tiny moments  (33:34) Resources Instagram @JanMurrayUK [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts for when you're all out of ideas (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram posts by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create content for your business (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [387] How to create more content in less time with Amy Woods (podcast) [390] How to stop overthinking your content (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Do you feel like you’re spending far too long on your content creation? Perhaps you procrastinate because you’re not sure if your topic(s) will resonate with your audience. Or maybe you worry because the topic has already been covered by a competitor and you’re worried people might think you’re ‘copying’ - or that people have just heard enough about it already. It could be that you hold back on sharing content because you’re worried you’ll look too ‘selly’, or you’re worried about offending people or /being judged/criticised. If any of this sounds familiar, you’re almost certainly overthinking your content. Which means until you stop thinking - and start doing - your content planning and creation will continue to take you longer than you’d like. In this podcast episode, I share practical strategies you can use to stop overthinking your content - so you can get more done in less time.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} 1.Commit to a regular publishing schedule (and do it publicly)  I release a new podcast episode every Friday - come hell or highwater. This means I can’t procrastinate or make excuses - I just have to pick a topic and go for it.  Commit to publishing a blog, newsletter, podcast and/or even a social media post at the same time each week/month (or whatever you can manage. You’ll be amazed how it focuses the mind. 2.Create a content plan You wouldn’t set off on a long car journey without directions. So if you don’t have a content plan - setting out what you’re going to publish, when and where - you’re likely to get lost. And I don’t just mean creating a content calendar, I mean understanding the type of content you publish on each platform. So for example, with my podcast I know I generally publish one interview per month and three solo episodes of around 30-40 mins. On Instagram, I publish three types of content on my grid:  educate, sell and inspire between 2- 4 times a day. And I aim to post on my Stories every day.  3. Align your content to your paid product/services If you have a copy of my 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner you’ll know I recommend planning your content around launches and/or ‘peak points’ in your business. Not only does this make it easier come up with content ideas, it can also help you decide what content you should be publishing when.  For example, when I was launching my podcasting course, I scheduled a podcast episode on how to launch a podcast to go live around the same time. During the earlybird launch week, most of my content  focused on the topic of podcasting, including blogs on compelling reasons to start a podcast to common concerns about my podcasting course. I also did a number of social media posts/Instagram Stories focused on common objections to starting a podcast. So there was little time on the content schedule for anything else.  If you sell just one product/service you may be thinking: "My business is static - there aren't going to be any new launches, products and/or events?'. But that is exactly the point. Even if you sell just one product/service, you shouldn't be promoting it in exactly the same way all year round - otherwise people will start to 'tune out' from your content.  So how can you create peak points in your year that allow you to create fresh excitement around your product/services? The obvious choice is hosting a sale/special offer, but if that isn't appropriate for your business, there are still many other things you can do. For example: Host an online webinar/challenge Collaborate with related businesses to host an online/in person event Host your own awareness day/week. Find out how here  Publish a special series of blog posts/podcasts around a specific theme Launch your Facebook group, podcast, Youtube channel - if you plan ahead you can make an 'event' of it Even if you sell a seasonal product like my 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner you have to keep thinking of fresh ways to talk about your product - otherwise your followers will switch off. For example, we recently took one of the dates from the diary - Blue Monday and created a Banish Blue Monday campaign, where we offered a special rate on the Hawaiian style diary in the week running up to Blue Monday and a chance to win a pizza. This created a much-needed buzz about the diaries (which we had been marketing for over 90 days).  You may also find yourself thinking ‘but what if my plans change during the year?’ Just because you write something down doesn’t mean you have to do it. Things may change in your business during the year and that’s fine. But it’s much less time-consuming to tweak a plan you’ve already worked on than to start from scratch. So just apply your best thinking right now. 4. Don’t create images for every post  - just ask questions  If you’re struggling to keep on top of your content creation, it may be because you’re creating images for every single post. But you don’t need to. In fact, text-based posts can often outperform image-led posts.  Asking questions can be a great way to get engagement on social media. For example, some of my best-performing posts on LinkedIn include: do you give your real name in Starbucks, should you bother posting on LinkedIn if you’re not getting any engagement or (I kid you not) which topping do you prefer on your pizza. Don’t get up hung about your content not being related to your business (although it’s usually possible to find a business ‘angle’). People like to do business with people. Which is why you may find personal subjects often get more engagement than business-related topics. And once you’ve developed a personal connection, it’s usually much easier to start talking business. 5. Forget about fancy equipment One of my clients shared recently that he was struggling to meet his commitment to publish a weekly video on Youtube in 2020. The reason? He was new to the platform and had to figure out how it all worked. Plus he had to learn video editing first. Which meant he’d have to delay his video content for a few months.  I advised him to shoot a video on his phone and put it on IGTV (Instagram’s version of Youtube). In the time he was stressing about learning YouTube, he could be publishing content and building his audience. He posted his first video on YouTube a few days later and has managed to keep up his posting schedule since.  Remember that social media is about exactly that - being social. And you don’t need to create pro-level video to create a connection with your audience. Which is why Instagram Stories is so powerful. Showing people behind the scenes of your business - and simply what you’re working on that day - can be a great way to connect with your audience.  6. Do live video instead of pre-recorded If you’re overthinking your video content, it’s generally because you’re suffering from perfectionism i.e. you want every video you make to be perfect. Live video is the perfect antidote to that….because you can’t be perfect. If you make a mistake, you have to keep going.  The confidence this gives you will help you when you do create pre-recorded video content.  And finally, remember there is only one of you. If you’re worried about covering a particular topic, remember there is only one of you - which means they can never have your unique ‘take on the topic. Podcast shownotes About this podcast episode (2:50) Why making a public commitment to regular content will stop you procrastinating (3:58) Why creating a content plan will take the overthinking out of your content (5:55) Why planning the type of you need to create will stop you overthinking it (7:32) Why planning ta schedule for your content will stop you overthinking (9:11) How aligning your content with your paid services/products will give you focus (10:40) How to plan your content if you sell the same product or service all year round (13:08) How to create peak points in your business if you sell the same thing every year (18:09) Why you should apply your best thinking  and not let details hold you back (20:04) Why you shouldn’t let the worry about creating images get in the way of content (20:17) Why you shouldn’t get hung up about posting business stuff all the time (22:01) How overthinking equipment can hold you back from creating content (24:13) Why you should do your video live rather than prerecord it (27:46) Why you shouldn’t worry about having the same content ideas as someone else  (31:10) Resources How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [346] How to look and feel more confident on video with Ian Anderson Gray (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [355] How to create and launch your own planner (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts for when you're all out of ideas (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create content for your business (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [387] How to create more content in less time with Amy Woods (podcast) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Ever wondered if the day you were born can affect your life, work and business? In this podcast episode about how to find your niche - business and marketing coach Jo Soley shares how she decided to take the bold move to niche her coaching business to specialise in numerology. Jo uses the power of numerology to help clients to move forward and create a successful business. It’s a great case study about how to choose a niche for your business and how to become an authority and dominate your niche. Jo explains the steps she took to move her business gradually and how her audience pretty much stuck with her. Jo also shares how niching has made her business much more profitable and helps her stand out amongst the many business and marketing coaches out there. It’s not the kind of podcast interview I normally do. But I can pretty much guarantee you that halfway through you’ll be really keen to work out your life path number and how your number energy can influence and drive what you do and when in your business. I’d love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About Jo and how she developed her niche (2:43) How Jo discovered numerology and discovered you can use it to coach people  (7:40) How Jo niched into numerology and what those around her thought about it (11:36) The steps Jo took to gradually change and introduce her new niche (15:30) How Jo promoted her new business and then gradually launched her new niche (17:21) How niching helped Jo build an audience that understood exactly what she does (21:21) How niching has made Jo’s  business more profitable and helps her stand out (23:28) How Jo works with people to align their numbers (25:09) How to work out your life path number and what it can mean for your business (27:04) What happens when you resonate with different numbers (38:06) How your personality and your number can hold you back (41:36) How to use your numerology knowledge to move forwards in your business (44:03) How Jo plans to move her business forward (47:33) Resources Jo Soley Website Jo Soley Facebook Jo Soley Facebook Group Jo Soley Instagram Jo Soley Work out your life path number [135] How to dominate a niche with Jeff Sieh (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [349] How to find the right niche for your business (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [387] How to create more content in less time with Amy Woods (podcast) Join my Build Your Audience Programme How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Sharing valuable free content that answers your ideal customers/clients questions can be a great way to generate leads and sales for your business. Publishing regular blogs, podcasts, videos and social media content helps people get to know, like and trust you - so when they do have a need for a product/service like yours, you’ll be the first person they think of. This approach is generally referred to as content marketing.  But how much content should you give away for free? Is it possible to give away too much free content? And how do you separate the content you give away for free from your paid content e.g. online courses, membership sites and ebooks? That’s exactly what I cover in this podcast episode. Along with tips on how to ensure your free content is leading to sales.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} There are two broad schools of thought on how much content you should give away for free as part of your marketing. Some people believe you should give away your best content for free. If people find your free content useful, they’ll be far more likely to want to invest in your paid content. It is possible to share tons of information and advice in a blog post or on a podcast. It’s not so easy to provide help with implementation. So people are willing to pay for access to you, so you can give them more personalised feedback on how the information/advice applies to them. The greater the access, the more you can generally charge (which is why 1-2-1 consultancy is more expensive than joining a membership site or buying an online course, for example).  People will also pay for ease of access. For example, you could find most of the information I share in my Build Your Online Audience programme in my blog posts, podcasts and social media posts. But do you have the time to cruise around my website/social media platforms looking for relevant content and/or figure out what order you should tackle it in? Probably not.  Others believe you should share what to do but not how to do it. For example, if you teach podcasting, you could share the steps someone might need to take to launch a podcast . But you wouldn’t explain exactly how to do it. So you might give people a list of the podcasting sites their show should be listed on, but the tutorial on how to do that would be inside your paid course. Personally I believe in giving your best content away for free. This allows you to build authority - which is crucial when people are deciding if they want to do business with you. Anyone can say they are an expert, but can they prove they are an expert? Publishing regular content on your expert topic allows you to do that.  People often worry that if they give away their best free content, they won’t bother buying the paid content - because they’ve already learned everything they need to learn. They are generally worrying unnecessarily.  For example, one of my clients - a stylist - was concerned that her free email lead magnet (a ‘what to wear’ guide for different body types) but deter prospective clients from booking a session with her. Would everyone feel like her lead magnet had helped them so much they didn’t need her? But while the guide might be useful that is unlikely to be the case. For example, I would probably be classed as pear-shaped, but although I have a short body and long legs (for a very short person). Which means not all advice for classic pear-shapes would apply to me. And I would consider hiring a professional for advice (and have done in the past).  Realistically, there is only so much depth you can go into in a blog/vlog, podcast or social media post. Often you can give the first step (and sometimes that’s all people need). But if people need the second, third and fourth step - and they want it tailored/personalised for them - that’s where your paid content comes in. It feels like the natural next step, should they want to take it.  If your audience feels as if you’re deliberately withholding information from them. As if your attitude is: ‘I’ll only share that if you pay me’ they may start to lose trust in you. Which is why I would encourage you to share your content freely - and focus your energy on turning that interest into sales.  With that in my mind, here are my tips on turning your free content into sales: 1. Make sure each piece of content you create leads to a paid product or service. For example, I have a free podcast episode on how to launch a planner for your industry . This is a useful piece of content, but if you need more depth and detail, I have a 90 minute masterclass, which includes templates/checklists for pricing your planner, writing your sales copy and testing whether your planner will sell. 2. Sell visibly and sell often If you give away tons of free content but only make the occasional sales offer, you may be at risk of what the sales expert Jessica Lorimer refers to as Baby Bird Syndrome. This is when your audience gets addicted to your free content. So when you withdraw the supply - or ask them to pay - they get fretful. Some may even lash out at you in anger. To avoid this, they must see you making regular sales and understand that if they want help with implementation (as opposed to information) they must pay for that. You may have noticed I sell every podcast episode, and on Insta - every day.  3. Make sure your free content delivers tangible results  If people get a tangible result from using your free content, they are much more likely to want to buy your paid products. For example, people often message me to say they have listened to my podcast episode on how to use hashtags to build your audience and seen a significant rise in their engagement on Instagram. While this is a significant and tangible win, it isn’t going to fix all their Instagram problems and/or answer all their questions. If they join my Build Your Online Audience programme, not only do they get access to more in depth content, they also get to ask me questions about how my advice applies to them.  One of the biggest objections people have about buying an online course/membership programme is ‘will I get results?’. If you’ve given someone a small win through your free content e.g. a lead magnet or paid podcast episode you’ve already overcome that objection - they KNOW you can get them results. So instead of worrying about whether you are giving too much away, you should be focusing on how to offer them the next step.    Podcast shownotes What is content marketing and how can you use it to attract clients and customers (3:42) How much of your content should you give away for free? (6:45) Why you should give your best content away freely (7:40) Why people will still pay for your products if you give away your really good stuff (10:14) Why you shouldn't hold content back and make it difficult for people to access (14:54) Why giving people great free content will make them want to know more about you (17:30) Why you shouldn’t worry about the people that won’t pay for content (19:37) Why your free content always link back to your product or service (20:46) Why you need to be seen selling often and visibly to avoid ‘baby bird syndrome’ (23:00) Why your free content needs to deliver tangible results to gain people’s confidence (26:33) Why you should focus on putting great quality content out there (28:15) Resources Jess Lorimer Selling to Corporates Podcast Join my Build Your Audience Programme [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts for when you're all out of ideas (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create content for your business (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) [387] How to create more content in less time with Amy Woods (podcast) How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Want to save time creating content and do more with the content you create? If you have a regular podcast or blog or piece of content that you'd love to do more with then my latest podcast with content repurposing expert and author of Content 10X Amy Woods is a must-listen. Amy explains how to save time repurposing your content and what the best type of content is to create. She shares how to repurpose it and why you should consider the platform it's appearing on before you create it. AND why it's really important to make sure you create content that gets found by website search and not just social so you can build your audience on your own land and not someone else's. Amy shares how she repurposes her own podcast and what types of content she creates for it. PLUS how to reduce content creation overwhelm. Going to listen? I'd love to know what you think? {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About Amy Woods and her business Content 10x (3:36) Why you should start with creating content that you are comfortable with (5:36) Why using live video will give you the best content to repurpose from and engage your audience (7:16) Why you need to remember the message that you are trying to convey when you repurpose your content (12:00) How to repurpose a podcast or video and get it found by search not just social media (13:28) Why you should get a transcription of your video audio to help repurpose content (15:20) How to save time and reduce content overwhelm by making the most of your content (18:30) Why it's good to think about the content you create in relation to the platform (24:12) How to make the most of your easy to create behind the scenes content (27:24) How Janet repurposes her podcast and the content she creates with it  (29:30) How Amy repurposes her podcast and what content she creates with it (32:34) Why it's important to be consistent with your content and how it builds authority and recognition (37:39) Why Amy wrote her book after she had built her audience and content (40:23) Why you need to ‘walk the talk’ and demonstrate that you are an authority (44:12) Resources Amy Woods Content 10X Amy Woods Book Content 10X [179] How to get more eyes on your content with Andrew & Pete (podcast) [203] Boost your web traffic through content repurposing with Amy Woods (podcast) [330] How to write awesome sales copy for your business (podcast) [334] How to  build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create content for your business (podcast) [385] How to sell on Instagram Stories without feeling sleazy (podcast) [386] The four types of content to create that will help you make more sales in 2020 (podcast) How to add closed captions to your video using Rev and Kapwing How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to make more sales in your business this year compared to last year?  In this podcast episode, I share the four types of content that you need to create in order to make more sales in 2020. I explain why you can't just broadcast endless sales messages and why it's vital to create the right type of content depending on what stage of the buying journey your online audience is on. PLUS why you shouldn't be afraid to create content that addresses your audience's concerns about buying your product or service - and how it can really help draw people over the line. As well as different ways to create sales content especially if you are launching a new product or service, and how to create 'results-based content' for service business by sharing client success stories. And how to create 'results-based content' for a product-based business too. So if you'd love to really nail the type of content that you are going to create to make sales in your business whether it's a service-based business or a product-based business you really need to listen to this podcast episode where I also share examples of the four types of content and how I use them in my business. AND why you absolutely need to create and share 'walk the talk' content which showcases your wins and achievements (without being braggy) and what happened when I shared mine. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About my build your online audience programme (3:50) Why you need to put out regular content if you want to make sales online (09:57) Why you need to create content for people at different stages of their buying journey (14:28) How to create general awareness content so that people can know, like and trust you (15:03) Examples of how to create content that solves problems in a product-based business (17:49) How to warm people up with awareness content before you launch a new product (23:55) How to use consideration content and think about objections to your product or service (27:40) How you can create content that reassures objectors to your product (32:32) Different ways to create purchase content when you are making a clear sell or offer (34:24) Why too much salesy content will make people zone out (36:08) How to create results-based content for a service-based business (37:01) How to create results-based content for a product-based business (40:32) Why you need to tell people that you want them to share your product (42:26) Why sharing 'walk the talk' content will help people understand what you can achieve for them (43:41) Why you need to look at the stage your business is at when you decide what type of content you need to create (48:36) Resources MamaLife London - YouTube [179] How to get more eyes on your content with Andrew & Pete (podcast) [330] How to write awesome sales copy for your business (podcast) [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to get people to open your emails (podcast) [334] How to  build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [380] How to set goals for audience growth in 2020 and why you should (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days to create content for your business (podcast) [385] How to sell on Instagram Stories without feeling sleazy (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your business (blog post) Common concerns about joining my podcasting course (blog post) Join my get your podcast live in 60 days course  #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Instagram Stories is a fantastic tool you can use to attract your ideal customers/clients. But if you’re not familiar with how it works, it can all feel a bit confusing. In this podcast episode I explain how to use Instagram Stories to make more sales in your business, including what kind of content you should be sharing (and how often) and how to use quizzes/polls and other interaction functions to find people who are interested in your products/services. PLUS how to get your Instagram followers buying from your stories. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} What is Instagram Stories? Instagram has three main parts.  Your main grid, where you can upload photos and short videos.  Stories - which appear in a bar at the top of your feed - where you can share short videos, pictures and images (each Story is a maximum 15 seconds). You can also add text, gifs, polls, quizzes and other interactive features. Instagram Stories content only last for 24 hours (but you can save your highlights). IGTV - a long-form vertical video channel that is accessible from Instagram and as a standalone app You can share your content between your grid, Stories and IGTV to get it in front of a wider audience.  What is Instagram Stories? Instagram Stories appear in a bar at the top of your feed. When there’s something new to see on an account of someone you follow, you’ll notice their profile photo will have a colourful ring around it. To view someone’s story, you simply need to tap on their profile photo, and their story will appear full-screen, showing you all of the content they’ve posted in the last 24hrs.  The content will play in chronological order from oldest to newest. Once you’re viewing a story, you can tap to go back and forward or swipe to jump to another person’s story. Unlike regular posts, there are no likes or public comments. Anyone who comments go straight into your DMs (direct messages). This can be a great way to build relationships with prospective customers/clients. The great thing about Instagram Stories is that your content only lasts for 24 hours. This can be great if you’re nervous about putting yourself out there. But you can save your best content as ‘highlights’ (more on that later).  How should the content you post in Stories differ from the content you post on your grid? As with any social media, there is really no ‘right’ or ‘wrong’ way to do it, but my account is probably ‘typical’ of what most Instagram users do. The content on my grid is more ‘curated’ than my Instagram Stories and has a consistent aesthetic (i.e. I used the same brand fonts and colours).  My Instagram Stories is a bit more ‘rough and ready’ - and often features ‘behind-the-scenes’ content that relates to my life and business.  What makes an engaging Instagram Story? The clue is in the name: Story. And a story generally needs a beginning, a middle and an end. Or at least some kind of ‘narrative’  you can follow.  One of the most confusing things about Instagram Stories is that you’ll often hear people talking about each individual image/15 second video clips as a ‘story’. So for the purpose of this post, I’m going to refer to them as ‘chapters’ which make up a whole Story.  While there are no hard and fast rules on how long your Instagram Stories, should be, it’s worth remembering that most people are scrolling through. So if your Story is too long and/or doesn’t grab their attention in the first few moments, they’ll scroll past and start looking at someone else’s story. For this reason, I’d generally recommend creating putting together no more than about seven to ten individual ‘chapters’ to make longer Stories). However, with some Stories e.g. if you are talking to camera, you may need to make them a little longer.  Here are my tips for making them engaging. 1.Start with a question that introduces the theme of your Story and invites viewers to get in a conversation with you e.g. ‘Are you thinking of launching a podcast in 2020?’ ‘Have you done all your Christmas shopping yet?’ or ‘Here’s my to-do list for today. What’s the ONE thing you absolutely have to get done today?’You can use the question, polls or quiz function but keep it really simple. If people have to think too hard, they’ll be far less likely to respond. Use a variety of media within each Story e.g. video, photos, text, you talking to camera. Keep your story visually interesting by using gifs and borders and stickers Don’t be afraid to ask more than one question in your story. This helps to keep viewers engaged. Have ONE clear call-to-action at the end of each Story you create e.g. ‘Swipe up to read’ or ‘DM me to find out more,.’ Any more than one call-to-action and you may leave your viewers feeling overwhelmed. How to sell in your Instagram StoriesThere is no big ‘secret’ on how to sell in your Instagram Stories. It’s simply about getting your viewers involved in a conversation about the product/service you want to sell. And the key to starting sales conversations is to focus on the problem your product/service solves. This helps you identify those who already have the desire for your product/service.   So, for example, with my podcasting course How To Get Your Podcast Live in 60 Days, I might start my Story with a poll: ‘are you interested in launching a podcast in 2020?’. Then I might share some information about the course before finishing up with a single call-to-action: ‘Interested in finding out more? DM me for a link to the waitlist.’ This gives me two opportunities to identify the key element that is needed for someone to make a purchase: desire. Then I can simply reach out to them and give them more information. And they’re not going to feel uncomfortable about it - because they expressed their desire to start a podcast and/or their desire to find out more about my course.  Similarly with my 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner, I’ll often start by asking a question e.g. ‘Do you sometimes find it difficult to stick to a content plan?’ Then I’ll share some pictures/video of the diary - along with some text that summarises what’s included.  Then I’ll give a single call-to-action e.g. ’DM me for the link to order’. AsI have over 10k followers on Instagram, you might be wondering why I invite people to DM me, rather than just give them the link. This is because it initiates a conversation. If we’re already chatting in the DMS, it’s much easier for someone to raise a question/objection about the diary - which is far more likely to result in a sale. If I simply send them off to a link, I may never hear from them again. Another powerful way to sell in your Instagram Stories is to share client/customer testimonials - ideally ones that address your most common objections. For example, if the most common objection you get for signing up for your online course/membership is ‘I can’t afford it’ - share screenshots from clients telling you how much money they’ve made from implementing your strategies. And do remember that you can use Stories to ‘sell’ anything - and not just your products/services. For example, you can use exactly the same process to get people involved in a conversation about your latest blog/podcast and create the desire for them to listen to it.  Dealing with objections in your Instagram StoriesIt’s one thing creating a story about your product service with a call-to-action at the end. But if you really want to boost your sales, you need to create a series of Stories that address your ideal customers/clients objections. For example, one question I kept getting asked about my podcasting course was: ‘how will having a podcast actually help me in my business?’ So I polled my clients to find out how they found me. Most said they found me via my podcast, so I shared the result of that poll in my Stories. I also asked some fellow podcasters how having a podcast had helped them in their business - and shared screenshots of their responses in my Stories. Their answers - which ranged from ‘it's helped me make more money’ to ‘it's helped me get booked for more speaking gigs’ are a powerful way to tackle that objection. Even when you are tackling objections, it’s still important to keep your Stories interactive. So when I was tackling that particular objection, I opened my story by asking viewers if they ever wondered what was the point of starting a podcast. Using highlights to sell on Instagram Stories Although Stories disappear in 24 hours, you can save them in the highlights section (just about your grid) and continue to make sales. For example, I have a highlight for my 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner, which features dozens of pictures of people using their diary, along with a video of me giving a tour of the diary. People often respond to this highlight and ask me questions e.g. ‘Do you deliver to x country?’ or ‘what’s the delivery time for y?” Because their responses go straight into my DMs, we are straight into a sales conversation. For this reason, I’d recommend having a highlight section for your key products/services. Podcast shownotes Resources Want to start your own podcast? Sign up for my podcasting course.  [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast)[358] 13 ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast)[362] How to grow your Instagram to 27K- fast (podcast)[373] How to get more followers on any social media platform (podcast) [376] Lessons learned from 1 million downloads of my podcast (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram followers by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days  to create engaging content for your business (podcast) Join the Media Diary Owners Club Order your 2020 Media Diary here #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Have you ever agonised over a social media post, or felt nervous and then deleted it or over-thought your post to the point where you don’t post anything at all? Or maybe you've worried that it was a bit too personal? If you’ve ever struggled with overthinking what you post or worried about being judged for what you post then you need to listen to this episode. Natalie Lue a recovering people pleaser, perfectionist and over-thinker explains how to bring more of yourself and your personality into your social media content without worrying about it. She explains how to find the essence of 'you' and what makes ‘you-you’.  She also explains how we can lose our personality in the content we create by over thinking and worrying too much about 'the rules'. So if you’d love to have a potential client or customer say to you "Did you just read my mind?" And you want to know how to bring more of yourself AND your personality into your social media content  and discover your ‘secret sauce’ then have a listen to this podcast episode. This episode was recorded live at my content planning masterclass 2020Sorted. I’d love to know what you think… {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About Natalie Lue and her business (3:50) How Natalie changed her relationship with Instagram and started ignoring the rules (5:00) How Natalie has grown her Instagram after she started posting more as herself (8:10) How Natalie changed her approach to Instagram by returning to her core (11:06) How you can return to your core and find out what makes 'you - you’ (14:55) Why you should use your own stories to create content that connects with people (19:15) How to work out what energises you and how to use that in your content (21:20) Why you need to think about your ‘secret sauce’ in everything that you create + share (23:42) How Natalie creates content that people can relate to (25:10) Why you should question the  social media ‘platform rules’ and write your own (26:10) How to use your 'secret sauce' to enhance your content (29:01) How to bring more of your personality into your content and the question to ask yourself (32:44) Resources Want to start your own podcast? Sign up for my podcasting course.  [049] How to turn your blog into a business with Natalie Lue (podcast) [161] How to work with bloggers and influencers with Kat Molesworth (podcast)[343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast)[358] 13 ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast)[362] How to grow your Instagram to 27K- fast (podcast)[373] How to get more followers on any social media platform (podcast) [376] Lessons learned from 1 million downloads of my podcast (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram followers by 1K in 30 days (podcast) [381] How to use awareness days  to create engaging content for your business (podcast) Join the Media Diary Owners Club Order your 2020 Media Diary here #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

If it's a dream or ambition of yours to start a podcast or launch a podcast in 2020 this podcast episode is for you. In this episode, I answer the many questions that I get asked all the time about launching a podcast. So if you'd love to start a podcast but you're unsure of what equipment you need or how to host it and get it online or even get people to listen to it then this is a must-listen. In this podcast episode, I share my practical actionable tips including how to choose a topic and why you should choose a niche to reach a larger audience. Even if you're not planning a podcast and just a regular piece of consistent content then you'll still find this episode useful. I'd love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Why do you want to start a podcast? Launching a podcast can be a big investment of your time, energy and money. Which is why it’s important to get clear on why you’re doing it. A podcast can be a great way to attract leads and sales for your business. For example, many of my clients start listening to my podcast way before they become a client.  However, you may have other aims - such as connecting with other influencers in your industry or raising your profile so you can land more speaking gigs or a book deal. If you’re clear on why you want to start a podcast, it will be much easier to measure the potential return on investment for your business. How to choose a topic for your podcast  Regardless of the topic, your podcast should solve a problem for your listeners. Solving a problem for people can simply be about entertaining people and/or making them laugh.  But for most business owners, this is generally about providing valuable information/discussion around a specific topic. For example, my podcast 'The Janet Murray Show' provides actionable tips and business/marketing advice - on topics ranging from Instagram marketing to creating a content calendar for your business to how to start a  podcast for your business.  As with many things in your business, the more ‘niche’ and/or specific you can be, the better. Spend some time searching through the podcasts Apple and/or other podcasting platforms and you will be amazed what people have podcasts on.  For example: Pat Flynn - passive income  Steve Folland - parents who freelance Bella Vasta - pet business owners  How to choose a name for your podcast  Once you’ve decided on a topic, it’s time to choose a name for your podcast. I’d suggest picking a title that describes what your podcast is about.  For example, Employment Law Matters, the Smart Passive Income Podcast, the Property Development Podcast.  While it might be tempting to come up with something creative, this will make it easier for new listeners to find you. Ditto for individual episode titles.  Interview or solo show? How to choose a format for your podcast  There are no hard and fast rules about which is best: solo, interview or a mix of both. It really is down to you. It’s also something you may need to test over time i.e. do your solo shows perform better than your interview shows. For example, I started off with a weekly interview but found my solo shows often performed better, so I gradually started to do fewer interviews and more solo shows.  How often should you put out a podcast (and how long should it be)?  Again there are no hard and fast rules about how often you should put out your podcast i.e. weekly, daily, monthly. This is really down to you.  If you’re new to podcasting, creating a season of 6-8 episodes can be a much less daunting than launching a weekly or daily show. If your first season does well, you can always create another on a related topic and/or move to a regular show.  Your podcast can be as short or as long as you want. But if you’re new to podcasting, starting with a 15-20 minute show might be easier. How many episodes should you launch with? If you listen to podcasts, you’ll probably know that when you find a podcast you like, you often want to binge listen to other episodes. This is why it’s a good idea to launch with more than one episode. But again, this will be dependent on a number of factors e.g. whether you’re launching a weekly or daily show or a season. Creating a content plan for your podcast Once you’ve decided on the topic, frequency and length of your podcast episode, it’s a good idea to make a content plan, setting out what you’re planning to publish and when with draft titles.   What kind of equipment should you start with If you’re new to podcasting, it’s best to keep it simple. And, as you don’t know whether you’re going to enjoy podcasting, I wouldn’t recommend investing tons. I would recommend a simple set up. I would recommend a USB microphone like the Blue Snowball or Blue Yeti you can plug straight into your computer and a pop shield. These start at around £65.  If you are recording solo shows, you can use Audacity - free software and Zoom/Skype to record interviews.   Where should I host my podcast?  You will also need to choose a place to host your podcast on the web (most podcast files are too big for websites). You will need to pay for hosting. This can vary depending on how much content you have, but I started off paying around $5 a month. Now it’s around $25. Popular choices include: Buzzsprout, Spreaker, Blubrry and Libsyn.  Find out more about how to host your podcast: The Podcast Host  How to edit your podcast You can edit your podcast yourself using free software like Audacity or you can outsource. Expect to pay at least £15-20 an hour for podcasting editing, but if you think about the value of a potential lead/enquiry, getting a professional to do this for you can be a much better ROI  (return on investment) in the long run. You could also use a podcast maker like Alitu which helps you clean you your audio, add your intro and outro, edit out mistakes, edit and publish your podcast.   Depending on the format of your show, you may also need to source a voiceover artist for the intro/outro and/or copyright-free music. I found my voiceover artist on Fiverr. You might also want to try People Per Hour or Upwork. There are tons of sites you can use to source copyright free music but my favourite is Audiojungle. Finding guests for your podcast Introducing your listeners to interesting guests - people who are experts in a specific topic - can be a great way to add value. The mistake many new podcasters make is thinking that having ‘big name’ guests is a great way to promote your podcasts. Actually the opposite is often true. Someone who already has a large audience is less likely to have the time or inclination to promote your podcast. A guest with a small but engaged audience may be much more inclined to tell the world about it.  When it comes to inviting guests onto your podcasts, the key thing to remember is that you are asking them to give up their time. So it’s important to demonstrate what might be in it for them e.g. the chance to get in front of your listeners, social media followers, email list. If you have a small audience or you haven’t started your podcast yet, it’s best to be upfront about that but show how you will promote the podcast. Doing interviews for your podcast  As with anything in your business, it’s all in the preparation. The more you can prepare your guest for the interview - by sending over detailed instructions on how to prepare or join the call PLUS the questions you are likely to ask - the better the interview is likely to go.  It’s generally better to use open questions e.g. ‘can you tell us more about’ or ‘what did it feel like when…?’. This will encourage your guests to talk more freely and make your interview feel like a conversation rather than a question and answer session (which is exactly how it should be).  Preparing a list of questions is a good idea, but don’t stick slavishly to your question list. If you let the conversation flow naturally, your interviews will sound a lot better. Promoting your podcast  Unfortunately getting your podcast listed on Apple Podcasts (and other podcasting directories like Spotify, Acast, Google Podcasts and Stitcher) is not enough to build an audience for your podcast. You will also need to actively promote your podcasts via social media, your email list, Facebook messenger, Pinterest and any other marketing channels. There are also many things you can do to encourage your guests or listeners to share your podcast (such as creating branded, shareable artwork).  Most people vastly under promote their podcast because they’re worried people will get sick of hearing about it. In reality, most people are far too busy getting on with their lives to notice you’ve already posted multiple times about your podcast - and appreciate the reminder.  Podcast shownotes What you need to ask yourself if you want to start a podcast (7:12) How to choose a podcast topic and why it needs to solve your client/customer’s problem (9:16) Why you should niche your podcast to make it focused to reach more people (12:40) How to name your podcast and why you can change the name as you evolve (15:30) How to plan your podcast and decide on the format of your podcast (18:15) How often you should produce your podcast and launch with a good number of episodes (20:15) How to plan out your podcast episodes and create a content plan for your podcast (23:52) What equipment you need for your podcast and why you should keep it simple (24:40) What you can outsource to produce your podcast and why you should look at ROI (28:29) Where to host your podcast and why you actually need to host your podcast (30:30) How to prepare a podcast guest for an interview and why big-name guests can be a red herring (31:35) Why you need to promote your podcast and just having it listed on a platform isn’t enough (34:57) Why you might want to join my new course ‘Launch your Podcast in 60 days’ (36:47) Resources Want to start your own podcast? Sign up to my podcast course with The Podcast host - Colin Gray How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (blog) [080] Three must-do tips for pitching yourself as a podcast guest (podcast) [094] Seven steps to starting your podcast (podcast) [190] How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (and why you must do) (podcast) [253] How to land guest appearances on podcasts with Nicola Holland (podcast) [263] Why I changed the name of my podcast (podcast) [331] What it really takes to build an audience with John Lee Dumas (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook page from ghost town to garden party with Bella Vasta (podcast) [376] Lessons learned from 1 million downloads of my podcast (podcast) Join the Media Diary Owners Club Order your 2020 Media Diary here #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Want to know how to create content that really sells and how to ask the right questions that lead to sales and follow up with people in a non salesy way? I interviewed business and  marketing experts Andrew Pickering and Peter Gartland - aka Andrew and Pete at my recent live annual content planning masterclass 2020 Sorted. Andrew and Pete have spoken all over the world about content marketing, including Social Media Marketing World, Content Marketing World and the Youpreneur Summit and are ranked as one of the top 100 digital marketers in the world. It's a great interview where they explain how to understand who your high intent customers or clients (hand raisers) are and how to create handraiser content that gets them to raise their hand. They share their strategies, tactics and tools that they've personally used to make sales in their business.  PLUS why thinking that sales are icky is one of the biggest mistakes you can make in your business. If you'd love to know how to create content to make sales in your business then listen to this episode.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes About Andrew & Pete who they are and what they do (4:03) Why thinking that sales are icky is one of the biggest mistakes you can make in your business (5:06) Why you should create handraiser content and how to use it to make sales easier (7:15) How to create handraiser content and find out who your hand raisers are (9:50) How to get people to give you their email address without feeling icky (10:09) How to recognise clients/customers that are mid intent and high intent (12:08) How to get high intent clients by making them pre register for something (12:58) What is a high intent enquiry and how to do a really personal follow up (15:01) What is a mid intent enquiry and how to understand how interested they are (18:01) How to ask the right questions that lead to hand raisers that go on to make a sale (22:02) How to follow up with people and sell in a non icky way  (23:42) Why getting a ‘no’ can help you sell more effectively to the people that will say ‘yes’ (25:15) How to win future sales by understanding people’s objections (27:14) The five different types of handraiser content that you can use to make a sale (29:46) Resources Andrew and Pete Andrew on Pete on Twitter Andrew and Pete’s YouTube channel Vidyard [179] How to get more eyes on your content with Andrew & Pete (podcast) [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to get people to open your emails (podcast) [335] How to create a highly converting lead magnet (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [380] How to set goals for audience growth in 2020 and why you should (podcast) #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to know how to use awareness days to create engaging content for your business?  In this podcast episode I explain how to use awareness days to create engaging relevant content that fits with your business and goals. If you've ever wondered how National Nothing Day or how to create content about The Golden Globes that can be applied to any business then have a listen as I explain how I would go about using them. I explain the four types of content that you should be sharing, regularly on your social media accounts and how you can apply these to the awareness days that are relevant to you and your business. I explain how to create content by asking yourself these two MAIN questions when thinking about how to use an awareness day: How is this day relevant to me and my business?  How is it relevant to my audience? If you’d love to know how to use awareness days to create content that’s relevant to your business in an engaging way that will get people talking back to you (without overdoing the awareness days) then you’ll love this podcast. I also tackle how you can use overly popular awareness days differently and how you can create content by saying what no one else is. PLUS  how you can use awareness days to tackle the elephant in the room. If you’d like to know how I would go about using some of the sillier sounding awareness days by using some lateral thinking and some examples of my own personal  relatable stories then have a listen. I'd love to know what you think and do let me know how you'd use some of these awareness days.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes *The two MAIN questions to keep in your mind when thinking about how to use an awareness day and listening to this podcast How is this day relevant to me and my business?  How is it relevant to my audience?   How my experience in journalism inspired me to create the media diary (3:58) The four types of post you should use to get engagement (4:53) 1 - ‘I need to know this’ content - content that's useful - tips and advice (5:16) 2 - ‘I know about that’ content - content where you ask people a question about what’s going on in your life or biz (6:05) 3 - ‘I know how that feels' content - content that people can relate to (7:26) 4 - ‘This is what I think’ content - content that can divide people and can be opinionated (8:40) How often you should use awareness days and why you shouldn’t use too many (11:17) Some examples of January awareness days and how you could use them (12:56) The *two questions you need to ask when creating content for awareness days (13:24) What questions to ask when you're deciding which piece of content to create (15:20) How to find inspiration if you are struggling for content ideas for an awareness day (16:40) How to create content for generic awareness days that can work for any industry (20:20) How to create personal relatable content and apply that to awareness days  (22:26) How to think laterally about awareness days and make them relevant to you (23:30) Why you shouldn’t use every single awareness day  (27:25) How to stand out with popular awareness days by using them differently to others (33:55) Why everything is a content opportunity if you use the two questions and creative thinking (36:29) Resources [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to get people to open your emails (podcast) [335] How to create a highly converting lead magnet (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram followers by 1K in 30 Days (podcast) [380] How to set goals for audience growth in 2020 and why you should (podcast) #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Content Planning Masterclass Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to know how to set realistic social media and online audience growth targets? How much is enough? Or maybe you’re thinking you don’t need to grow your online audience and are happy with how it is? Maybe if you can get the target number of clients that you need through your current networks or face-to-face networking of people that you already know then chances are you don’t need an online audience. BUT if you’d like to make online sales and grow those online sales and make money while you sleep then you definitely need an online audience and you need to set goals for the growth of that audience. In this podcast I explain how to set audience growth targets for 2020 and how to work out how big your audience needs to be to achieve realistic targets.  I’ll also explain why you shouldn’t just expect to rock up online, and solely focus on building your business on social media. The metrics you should be looking at in order to assess your growth and surprisingly maybe how engagement and comments are more important than actual follower numbers. PLUS I’ll also explain my “put out your fire first” strategy and why you need to follow up your hottest leads BEFORE embarking on your audience growth. So if you’d like to look back at the end of 2020 and know that you’ve doubled your email list or tripled your social media following and hopefully your sales - then you really do need to listen to this podcast episode. I’d love to know what you think…   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes Why you need to know what growth you want to achieve and define your goal (5:17) Why your audience might need to hear from you multiple times before they buy (11:00) What metrics to track on social media and why engagement is more important than followers (13:25) Why you should be careful not to rely solely on social media for your audience (14:21) Why email marketing data is more reliable for predicting sales than social media likes (16:20) Why you should look at your social media and email marketing referrals to your website (18:42) Why you should analyse email lists and ask yourself if they are still your ideal client/customers (18:45) How to work out your audience growth rate and use your actual data to make sales predictions (19:36) Why it’s so important to set targets to grow your audience (and why it’ll motivate you) (21:03) What to do if you haven’t really got an audience yet and how to try different growth strategies (23:34) Why you shouldn’t worry about being on every social media platform (25:21) How to create a yearly content plan (and why you need to to achieve your growth) (26:21) How to use your yearly content plan to support your audience growth (30:34) Why you should focus on getting enough money into your business before you focus on your audience growth (31:30) Resources Janet Murray's Audience calculator [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to get people to open your emails (podcast) [335] How to create a highly converting lead magnet (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [379] How to grow your Instagram followers by 1K in 30 Days (podcast) #2021Sorted Buy your ticket  How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Order your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Are you trying to grow your following on Instagram, but things aren't moving as fast as you'd like? Fed up with people telling you to “just post more pictures of yourself” to get more followers? But how do you know if that is actually what your ideal client or customers want to see? Would you love to know what to post on Instagram to REALLY get your clients or customers engaging with you? If so you’ll love my latest podcast episode in it, where I share three key strategies that I've used to grow my Instagram followers by over a thousand followers in the last 30 days. I look at three key strategies. What kind of content to share and how I went about making key changes to my Instagram content by creating content that my ideal clients or customers were interested in. I also share how often I’m posting and how to analyse what time you need to post to reach your followers. I also explain how you can get your content shared so that it can go viral and why you shouldn’t be afraid to be inspired by other people’s content and how to go about sharing other people’s content on your Instagram account to increase your following. PLUS why you HAVE to experiment to see what type of content your audience likes and why you shouldn't feel a failure if your content flops. And finally, I talk about hashtags and the strategies you can use to get the Instagram algorithm to show your posts to more people. So if you're looking to grow your Instagram account, you definitely need to listen to this episode. I’d love to know what you think. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes Why I decided to start focusing on growing my Instagram followers (3:10) How to find out what type of content your ideal clients/customers engage with on Instagram (6:13) Why you need to find out what type of content appeals to your ideal client/customer (08:01) Why you shouldn’t worry if no one engages with your content (14:04) Why you need to focus on creating great content so that it gets shared (15:10) Why you should experiment with different formats for your images and text (17:13) How to research and find ideas for content to create by looking at other Instagram accounts (19:10) Why you should use other people's content for inspiration and how to  share content (20:01) How to analyse Instagram posts to figure out what made them popular (23:20) Why you shouldn’t worry if you don’t have the skill or time to make your grid amazing (25:20) Why experimenting with posting times will help you to reach your ideal followers (26:28) How to find the time to really make a difference on your Instagram account (29:02) How to research Instagram hashtags and why the follower size of the hashtag  matters (31:39) How to make the Instagram algorithm show your posts by using my hashtag strategy  (33:15) How to analyse a popular Instagram post by looking at the comments rather than the likes (38:41) Resources @JanetMurrayuk  Instagram @IamSamBearFoot Instagram [378] How to use hashtags to build your online audience (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K - fast with Chris Taylor (podcast) [353] How to grow your audience through Instagram Stories with Tyler McCall (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast episode) [093] How to use Instagram to promote your business with Sara Tasker (podcast) Canva Graphic design tool When to Post app (iOS) How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Preorder your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Mystified about hashtags? No idea where or how you should be using them on Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn or Twitter? In this episode I demystify hashtags and give an introduction to how you can use hashtags to grow your online audience. I share my strategy on how I have successfully been building my Instagram followers using specific hashtag strategies and how you can do the same by understanding how the Instagram algorithm shows your posts. I also explain how you can use hashtags at events and  how you can use them to reach journalists on Twitter and get press coverage for your business. PLUS how you can use hashtags on Instagram to find out what content to create for your audience.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes What is a hashtag and how do they work on social media (2:00) How you can use other peoples hashtags to grow your audience (3:11) How to build a relationship with hashtags on social media (without being pushy) (5:29) How to use hashtags to follow, engage and understand your followers interests (6:58) How to use hashtags at events and get delegates involved (8:00) How to use Twitter hashtags to reach journalists + get media coverage for your business  (09:10) How to choose hashtags on your Instagram posts (and why they need to be relevant) (10:24) How the Instagram algorithm works (and why the size of the hashtag and your own following matters) (12:54) When to use hashtags on Twitter, LinkedIn and Facebook (17:30) How to find the hashtags that your ideal clients are engaging with and why you need to create good content (19:30) Tools you can use to find hashtags and plan your Instagram content (21:20) How to find the hashtags your ideal customers/clients are using (21:50) How to create your own hashtag and awareness day (23:40) Resources [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K - fast with Chris Taylor (podcast) [ 356 ] How to build your audience on Twitter (and create FOMO) (podcast) [353] How to grow your audience through Instagram Stories with Tyler McCall (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast episode) [309] How to go viral on Twitter with Kerry Jordan (podcast) [093] How to use Instagram to promote your business with Sara Tasker (podcast) LinkedIn hashtags Andy Foot How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Preorder your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Ever wondered how some people just nail it on social media or their facebook ad just speaks to you? Want to know how to write super engaging copy for your website or social media? In my latest podcast I interview copywriter Jo Watson who describes herself as an editor and 'writer of stuff'. She explains how to show your personality in your writing and why you need to make people really feel something when you write. Even if they disagree with you.  Jo is well-known on LinkedIn for her slightly sweary 'tell it like it is' approach and her personality is well reflected in her writing. She has a truly distinctive writing voice and explains how to create personality in your writing and how if you produce great content then people won't forget about you (even if you go on holiday for a week!) Jo also explains how you can show your authority and views even if you don't feel confident enough to actually post on social media. Jo doesn't have a social media strategy - and believes very much in showing up and being present, being yourself and explaining it as you would to a friend at the pub. Jo also talks about how to go about hiring a copywriter that really is a copywriter (and not just your VA that can do it) and why it's really important to look at the return on investment that it will bring to your business. I'd love to know what you think. I hope you enjoy the episode. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   Podcast shownotes About Jo and why she defines herself as a ‘writer of stuff’ (4:06) How Jo went from  being a teacher to a copywriter and built her business (5:05) How Jo develops personality in her writing and why she doesn't think you need a social media strategy (14:15) How Jo got started on LinkedIn and how ‘saying it like it is’ helps build relationships and engagement (16:23) Why you need to be present on social media and only post if you have something to say (19:03) How to stay on people’s radars by posting great content so they won’t forget you (23:15) How to show up and write well and why everyone can tell stories (25:47) How to build your confidence and show your values on social media (26:56) Why you’ll lose trust and authority if you write or say things that are 'off brand' (30:47) How to get more personality into your writing and how everything is a content opportunity (37:01) Why you need to think about what people are interested in and make people feel something when you write (42:50) Why you shouldn’t limit your marketing to one ideal client type (50:03) How to get personality into your writing and why you should keep it simple, relatable and in your own voice (54:54) How to hire a copywriter for your business and why you should look at the return on investment (58:03 ) Resources Connect with Jo on LinkedIn Jo's website  [275] How to write awesome sales copy - fast with Sarah Cooke (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast0 [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [375] How to get your first 1k email subscribers (podcast)   How to create a high-converting lead magnet course How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Preorder your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Want to know how I've managed to publish a new podcast episode every week for the past four years?  How I have managed to stay consistent, to show up every week, in fact, twice a week to start with and put a podcast episode out there? This podcast answers your questions and more and is based around real questions that you have asked about my podcast. Even if you're not interested in starting your own podcast then please stay with me because what it's really about, is about showing up and publishing consistent content. How do you keep showing up every week when maybe you're all out of ideas or you're not feeling well, or you're feeling uninspired or unmotivated, or you've lost a team member suddenly, how do you keep all of that going over a number of years? This podcast isn't just about creating a podcast it's also about content planning, content creation and solving your audience's problems, it's about mindset. It's about staying consistent and overcoming the challenges and evolving.  So you'll see it's so much more than how you keep a podcast going.  I also share my favourite podcasts too. What do you think?  Have you listened to them? I hope you enjoy the episode as much as I did recording it.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes Why you should listen to this podcast (01:57) How to win in my 'Big Podcast Giveaway' (2:52) Find out about my 2020 ‘Start a podcast programme’ (5:39) What inspired me to start a podcast (and why it’s such a great way to connect with people) (7:02) How I have consistently produced my podcast (and how accountability keeps me on track) (10:30) Equipment I use to record my podcast, how it's produced and why I delegate the editing (13:04) How I record a guest podcast episode (16:40) How getting your podcast on iTunes can be the most challenging part (and how I did it) (17:09) Why I choose podcast guests that can show they are an expert (rather than just a big name) (19:50) How I got people to agree to be a podcast guest when I was starting out (24:58) How my podcast has evolved and why I'm doing more solo podcasts than guest podcasts (27:44) Why it’s important to have a great rapport with a podcast guest (and why some don't go as planned) (32:24) Why I plan my podcasts to strategically fit in with what I am doing in my business (34:44) Steps to produce the podcast from idea through to publication, repurposing and marketing (38:25) How to promote a podcast and why you have to try lots of different ways (45:20) Why a podcast needs to be quality content that solves your audience’s problems (48:47) Top 9 episodes I've recorded? Try these they are full of useful practical advice that’s easy to implement:  133, 161, 227, 288, 275, 315, 341, 351, 362 (50:52) Top 3 episodes that I am really proud of? Episodes with great longevity: 333, 339 and 340 (58:46) What happens if the podcast guest doesn’t work out (1:00:05) Resources How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (blog post) Find out about my new start a podcast programme in 2020 Win in my Big Podcast Giveaway! [133] How to grow your following on Twitter (podcast) [161] How to work with bloggers and influencers with Kat Molesworth (podcast) [227] How to make sales without being spammy with Jess Lorimer (podcast) [253] How to land guest appearances on podcasts with Nicole Holland (podcast) [275] How to write awesome sales copy - fast with Sarah Cooke (podcast) [288] How to get started with vlogging(and how it can help your business (podcast) [315] How to create a brand statement and why you need to (podcast) [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [340] How to create a coaching or consultancy package for your business (podcast) [341] How to use stories to attract your ideal audience (podcast) [351] How to get corporate clients and why you should with Dylis Guyan (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K - fast (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [375] How to get your first 1k email subscribers (podcast) How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Preorder your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to know how to grow your email subscribers list from zero to 1k?  That's what Catherine Gladwyn Author and Virtual Assistant did in just eighteen months. In my latest podcast she explains why she needed to quickly create an email list and how she grew it from standing start. She shares practical tips and tactics about how she grew her list about what worked and what didn't and how you can grow your email newsletter list. She explains how understanding your client or customers emotions and pain points can help you when planning what lead magnets and content to create. Plus why it's important to create content for each of your different audiences and why having engaging conversations will keep them on your email list. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Podcast shownotes About Catherine Gladwyn's and why she set up her business (2:26) Why Catherine had to quickly create an email newsletter list rather than rely on on social media (4:53) How Catherine got people to sign up to her email newsletter list  (7:03 ) How Catherine used lead magnets to get people to sign up to her email newsletter list (09:23) How to use Mailchimp to segment and tag your email newsletter list (10:53) How Catherine created her lead magnets and why sometimes it’s trial and error (13:00) Catherine’s tips for creating a simple landing page and lead magnet (17:19) How to create a sign up form in Mailchimp to use on your website (23:06) Different strategies Catherine has used to get people to sign up to her email newsletter list (26:14) How to create a successful lead magnet by tapping into the pain points of your clients or customers (31:31) Dealing with people unsubscribing from your email list (and why you shouldn’t take it personally) (35:00) Resources Catherine's website Delegate VA Catherines Book How to be a VA Connect with Catherine on LinkedIn Facebook Follow Catherine on YouTube Mailchimp [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a profitable online business (podcast) [359] How to create an email newsletter people look forward to opening (podcast) [360] How to get people to open your emails (podcast) [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [373] How to get more followers on any social media platform (podcast) [374] How to create a year's worth of content in one morning (podcast) How to get the most out of your Social Media Diary & Planner (blog) How to create a high-converting lead magnet course Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Preorder your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Would you love to know how to plan a year's worth of content for your business in just a few hours? In this podcast episode, I explain how to create a year long content plan for your business.  I show you how to breaking your planning down into manageable steps: annual, quarterly, monthly, weekly and daily.  PLUS how you can use awareness days and key dates to generate content ideas for your business.  And how to make time for content planning - all year round.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Step 1: Schedule time for content planning Set aside some dedicated time to create your content plan. If you can, take yourself away from your usual place of work. Find a cafe you like to work in – a quiet hotel lobby - anywhere where you can focus on this task, uninterrupted. You’ll be much more productive and creative this way. Step 2: Create your annual content plan  It can be helpful to approach your content like a videographer. Start with ‘wide shot’ of your business i.e. what’s happening across the year. Then gradually zoom closer, until you’re focusing on quarterly, weekly and daily content. So let’s start with that ‘wide shot’ of your year. Think about the key things that are happening in your business in each quarter of the year. When will you be launching new products/services? Are you doing any speaking? Will you be attending any industry events? List at least three key things for each quarter.  Next, write down a few key dates/awareness days that are relevant to your business. For example, if you have a pet business, you might want to create some timely content around Crufts dog show in March. If you design clothes or accessories, you could create some content around London Fashion Week in January. And if you run a food business, you might plan some content around National Doughnut day in June. My 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner has tons to help you get started.  If you struggle with this task because you don’t know what you’ll be doing at each stage of the year, you don’t have a content problem, you have a business problem. Which means you may need to take a few steps back and do some business planning first.  You may also find yourself thinking ‘but what if my plans change during the year?’  Just because you write something down doesn’t mean you have to do it. Things may change in your business during the year and that’s fine. But it’s much less time consuming  to tweak a plan you’ve already worked on than to start from scratch. So just apply your best thinking right now. Step 3: Create your quarterly content plan  Once you've created your annual content plan, you can zoom in a little closer and start your quarterly content planning. I ‘d suggest you create one key piece of content a week, whether it’s a blog/vlog, podcast, Facebook Live or infographic and repurpose it into multiple pieces of content. This means you only need to come up with a list of 12 ideas for each quarter - ideas that complement the key business activities and dates you’ve already identified in your annual content plan. Simple when you put it like that, right? If you need some inspiration, make two lists. On the first list, write down the ten most common questions you get asked by your ideal customers/clients. On the second list, write down ten common questions people ask about your product/service.  That’s a list of content ideas right there. For example, my prospective customers often ask me questions like this about content planning. Why do I need a content plan? How often should I be publishing new content? What kind of content should I be creating for my business? What are the biggest mistakes people make with content planning? How far ahead should I be planning my content? How flexible should I be with my content planning? Is there any room for spontaneity? There’s six content ideas right there. They also ask me quite specific questions about the 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner: What are the benefits of buying the 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner? What’s the difference between the 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner and the Media Diary Owners’ Club? Can I see inside the 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner? Will the media diary help me if I have a product-based business? Is the 2020 Media Diary suitable for business owners based outside the UK? I bought last year’s Social Media Diary & Planner but I didn’t use it. Should I buy it again? There’s another six content ideas - some of which I’ve already turned into blog posts. If it feels daunting to plan out a whole year’s worth of content in one go, I’d recommend planning one quarter at a time.  To make sure this actually happens, block out time in your diary for three further quarterly planning sessions across the year. Step 4: Create your weekly content plan With your quarterly plan complete, you can zoom in a little closer and create a weekly content plan for your business. If you’re creating one key piece of content a week (which is what I recommend), think about how you might repurpose that content to create smaller pieces of content that can be published across the week.  For example, you could record a video, strip out the audio and turn it into a podcast. You could use a resource like rev.com to generate a transcript and turn that into a blog post. Then you could pull out some soundbites from the transcript and turn them into infographics for social media (using a graphic design tool like Canva), audio trailers (using a resource like Headliner)and video trailer (using a tool like Kapwing). If you focus on making that cornerstone piece of content work as hard for you as possible (by repurposing it in different ways), you’ll soon have enough content for every day of the week. And don’t be afraid to post your content more than once. People are busy and may not see it the first time round (or even the third, fourth or fifth). Step 5: Create your daily plan  Next map out what you’re going to publish on which platform on what day.  I’d suggest doing this a week or two ahead and scheduling a regular - and non-negotiable - time for weekly planning on your diary. That way, you’re far less likely to skip a week.  Don’t be afraid to repeat the same content on different platforms.  Not everyone will see what you post. You may just need to tweak it slightly to suit.  Podcast shownotes How to focus on planning your content and why you should find a different workspace to do it (3:30) How to create a quarterly overview and plan your content based on your key business activities (4:56) Why you might need to rethink your business if you don’t know what your key services or products will be this time next year (8:15) How to map out key activities and awareness days for each quarter for the year ahead (10:01) How to plan your quarterly content and why you should put dates in your diary for future quarterly planning (12:25) How to plan and create the content that you are going to write about based on the questions that your customers ask you (13:25) Why you should produce one key piece of content that adds value every week (and how to repurpose it) (17:36) How to create content if you are a product based business (20:16) How to map out your weekly content plan from your quarterly content plan (22:56) How to create your daily content plan and tie in your key dates and awareness dates (23:37) How to make your content planning a habit (25:48) How to be creative with awareness days and make them relate to your business (26:47) Resources [372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) [373] How to get more followers on any social media platform (podcast) How to create an editorial calendar for your marketing strategy (blog) Create 52 weeks of content with the 2020 Social Media Diary & Planner (blog) How to get the most out of your Social Media Diary & Planner (blog) Join the Media Diary Owners Club  Preorder your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Want to sell more of your products or services online? Getting more of your ideal customers/clients to follow you on social media can help - a lot.  But how do you increase your social media followers? Do you need to use different strategies for different social media platforms e.g. Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter or Instagram? And how long does it take to grow your following on a particular platform?  That’s exactly what I cover in this podcast episode.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} 1.Share compelling content  Think about the people you follow on social media. The people whose posts always seem to pop up in your Facebook or Instagram feed. The accounts you actively check out to see what they've been posting lately.  You don’t follow them because they post boring updates about their products/services. You follow them because they inspire, entertain or even challenge your thinking. In other words, they make you FEEL something.  Now think about your own account. Are you posting compelling content that makes people feel something? Or are you putting out posts so you can tick social media off your to-do list. If you’re posting dull updates about your products/services, whimsical reflections about what you did at the weekend and/or 'must do' tips no one ever comments on, why would anyone want to follow you?  If you’re not getting much engagement on your content - amongst the followers you already have - that’s a sign you need to change something.  After all, if you can’t get the people who already know, like and trust you to comment on your content, why would anyone new want to follow you?  For an example of someone who is publishing excellent social media content that inspires people to follow her, check out  copywriter Jo Watson on LinkedIn. Want to get more engagement on your social media posts? Check out my social media engagement playbook. 2. Don’t follow the rules  If you’re trying to build your following on a particular platform, don’t feel like you have to do what everyone else is doing. In fact, sharing content that challenges the ‘norm’ can be a great way to stand out.  For example, Baggage Reclaim founder Natalie Lue’s following on Instagram only really took off when she stopped worrying about ‘posting pretty pictures’ and starting posting hard-hitting quotes from her blog and podcast. As Instagram is a visual platform, this was a brave move on Natalie’s part - but doing the opposite of what everyone else was doing - and doing it consistently - is what helped her reach her first 10k followers. 3. Spend more time on other peoples’ accounts than on your own What’s the first thing you do when someone new comments on one of your posts - a name you don’t recognise? You go and check out their profile of course. And that’s exactly what other people do when you comment on their content. They just can’t help but check you out.  This is why something as simple as making a list of your ideal customers/clients and committing to spending half an hour a day commenting on their content can be so effective.  Alternatively (or additionally) you can use the Gary Vee $1.80 strategy.  Step one. Find the 10 most relevant hashtags in your niche and follow those hashtags Step two. Reach out and comment on the top nine posts in each of the 10 hashtags Step three. Continue to like and comment on posts each day The $1.80 strategy gets its name because you’re giving your two cents on nine posts for 10 hashtags every day. If you add that up, it equals $1.80 per day. 4. Use hashtags on all your posts As Chris Taylor explains in how to grow your Instagram following to 27k - fast, hashtags are like the index in the back of a non-fiction book. People search hashtags to find content on the most relevant topics to them - just like they would if they were looking something up in a non-fiction book. While expert opinion varies, current advice commonly suggests that using up to 30 hashtags on Instagram (which is the maximum), three on LinkedIn, two on Facebook and two on Twitter is the optimum number.  You could even create your own hashtag and awareness day like dog photographer Kerry Jordan did. This helped her go viral on Twitter. 5. Cross-promotion  Running joint competitions can be a great way to get more followers. For example, dog photographer Kerry Jordan hosted a joint competition with Quirky Campers founder Lyndsey Berresford and added 1.5.k new email subscribers, along with tons of new social media followers, to her audience.  6. Collaboration  Creating content for or collaborating with other business owners e.g. guest blogging, podcast interviews, Facebook Lives, Instagram takeoevers can be a great way of getting in front of other peoples’ audiences. This will help you grow your social media following. Be smart about who you collaborate with though. It’s best to target people with a similar or slightly larger audience than your own - ideally those who have a similar audience to you, but serve them in a different way. That way, there won’t be a conflict of interest. If you do want to target the big hitters in your niche, think carefully about how you can add value to them. If they’ve already built a large online audience, they probably don’t need to get in front of your audience, so why would they want to collaborate with you? So before you ask, think carefully about what’s in it for them. If your ‘pitch’ is all about you - and what you hope to gain from the collaboration - they’re far less likely to say ‘yes. 7.Secure press coverage Getting press coverage can be a great way to increase your online following. For example, Baggage Reclaim founder Natalie Lue gained 2k followers after she was featured in Cosmopolitan magazine recently. However, stories like this tend to be the exception rather than the rule. While it’s rare to get thousands of followers from a single magazine article or radio/TV appearance, over time, regular press coverage will help you grow your following. Find out: how to get press coverage for your business.  8.Work with bloggers/influencers Asking bloggers/influencers to promote your products/services can be a great way to grow your following. Ideally they need to have a larger audience than your own. But they don't need to have a massive audience for this to be effective. This can either be done on a paid basis or in exchange for free products/services. Find out more about working with bloggers/influencers. 9. Speak at live events Every time you stand up and speak in a room of your ideal customers/clients, you will attract new social media followers. So if you don't mind public speaking, why not give it a go? Find out how to land more speaking opportunities. 10. Post the links to your social media channels everywhere The more places you post the link to your social media profiles, the easier it will be for people to follow you. So make sure they’re on your email signature, website, any landing pages you create...and basically anywhere you show up online. Podcast shownotes Why you need to post engaging content that makes people feel something (2:48) How to get followers by posting memorable, inspiring content (7:08) Why your social media bio needs to be compelling and understandable (10:44) Why you should break the ‘rules’ of the platform and post your own original content  (11:35) Why you should spend time on other peoples’ social media accounts (19:59) Hashtag strategies you can use to increase engagement and followers (25:05) How to grow your followers by collaborating with other social media accounts (28:50) How to use press coverage to get more followers (but it needs to be consistent coverage) (33:30) How to work with influencers that have a bigger audience to reach new followers (37:34) How speaking opportunities can help grow your social media following (40:11) Where to put your social media platform links so that people can find you (40:29) Why follower numbers are a vanity metric and sales and engagement are more important (40:54) Why you need to build an engaged audience before using Facebook ads  (44:08) Resources John Espiran LinkedInJo Watson LinkedIn Natalie Lue InstagramSimon Bourne LinkedInCath Janes FacebookKate Lister LinkedInNeon MarlAriiJourno request Five easy ways to get press coverage (blog) [161] How to work with bloggers and influencers with Kat Molesworth (podcast)[309] How to go viral on Twitter with Kerry Jordan  (podcast)[329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast)[348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast)[358] 13 ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast)[362] How to grow your Instagram to 27K- fast (podcast)[363] Five ways to bust through an audience growth plateau (podcast)[369] Why opinionated content works well for your Facebook page (and how to do it well) (podcast)[370] How sharing personal experiences can boost engagement on your Facebook page (podcast)[372] How to build an engaged online audience (podcast) Preorder your 2020 Media Diary here Buy my book Your press release is breaking my heart Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

If you want to sell your products or services online you need to build a following. More social media followers, more website visitors and more email subscribers. So when you do have something to sell you have an 'audience' of people who already know, like and trust you - which means they're far more likely to buy. But building an engaged audience takes time, With that in mind, here's the answers to the most common questions I get on asked on building an online audience.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} 1.What exactly is an online audience?  Your ‘audience’ is the people who engage with your online content e.g. social media, blog/vlog/podcast, email marketing. 2. Why do I need to build an online audience?  You don’t NEED to have an online audience. You can choose to market your business completely offline if you wish. But if you want to to do business online, you do need an online audience - otherwise who are you going to sell your products/services to?  3. When's the best time to start building myonline audience? If you want to sell online, the ideal time to start building your audience is way before your product/service goes on sale. That way, you'll already have built relationships with prospective customers/clients - which means you're far more likely to make sales. 4. What size does your online audience need to be? This depends on your sales goals. The average conversion rate for online sales is 1-2%. Which means for every 100 people on your email list, only a small number will actually buy from you. If you’re a coach selling 1-2-1 coaching and need 20 clients a year, you may only need a thousand or so on your email list. If you sell lower-priced products or online courses/memberships you’ll almost certainly need to shoot for 10k or beyond. So whatever it is you’re selling…you almost certainly need a much bigger audience than you think. To find out what size your audience needs to be right now, check out my audience calculator    5. What is the best way to measure your audience numbers? Some people think your audience is the number of social media followers, readers of your blog or listeners to your podcast. But while you may make the odd sale on social media - or from your blog/podcast/Youtube channel - the majority of sales will happen in your inbox. PLUS it’s almost impossible to reliably predict and track income from sales on social media.  This is why building your email list is the single most important thing you can do in your business. Which means the number of engaged email subscribers you have on your list is the most reliable measure of audience size.   In order to build your email list, you need an audience of people who engage with your content (otherwise how are you going to get people to join your email list?). This is why I recommend starting by building your audience on social media, then moving on to content (e.g.blog, podcast./Youtube) before tackling email marketing. And that’s exactly what I cover in my Build Your Online Audience Programme.  6. How do I find out where my ideal audience is hanging out online? (so I can find more people like them)   Just ask them. Find 10 of your ideal clients/customers and ask them where they spend time online. Then start sharing some content on that platform and test and tweak accordingly (see the next question).  7. How do I find out what kind of content my audience would like me to share?  Just ask them. Find 10 of your ideal clients/customers and ask them what they would like to hear about. But don’t just leave it at that. People sometimes tell you what they think you want to hear. Which means you’ll need to test and tweak different types of content until you figure out what works best (i.e. what gets the most engagement). And do remember that it’s not about numbers of followers/likes. Your best measure of success is comments and conversations.  Bonus tip: Making a list of your most frequently asked questions is an easy way to generate content ideas for your audience.  This can be turned into ten blog posts/podcast episodes/Youtube videos and/or social media posts. Also look at your competitors - those who are have a bigger audience than you.  What the more you understand about the type of content that captures your ideal clients’ attention, the better placed you’ll be to create your own engaging content.  8. I want to launch an online course/membership programme or a live event. Do I need to build my audience before I launch?  Ideally yes. Otherwise who are you going to sell to? People often think they can use cold ads. But ask yourself this: when’s the last time you invested in an online course/membership or live event after seeing an ad? While there are always exceptions, most of us need to get to know, like and trust someone before we hand over our hard-earned cash. Which is why it’s generally best to start building your audience organically before you start using advertising. If you have the budget to hire a strategist and/or a testing budget for ads, a Facebook ad campaign can work, but you’ll still need to ‘warm up’ your audience before they’ll buy from you with content.  Find out: how to build an audience for an online course/membership.  9. Do I need to be active on every social media platform to make online sales?  While it’s tempting to think you need to be active on every single platform, it’s much better to start with one or two. Once you’ve mastered those, and understand what works, you can replicate your strategy on other platforms. Spread yourself too thin, and could wind up being ineffective on multiple social media platforms (and wasting time and money in the process). Podcast shownotes About this podcast (2:47) What is an ’online audience’ (and why it needs to be bigger than you think) (3:11) Why an email list is essential if you want to make a regular profit in your business (8:10) Why you need more than social media to build an engaged online audience (09:05) How to build your online audience without overwhelming yourself (10:10) How to find out where your online audience is (13:34) Why finding out your audiences problems will help you create content that will engage your audience (15:22) Why sharing  personal content will engage your online audience (22:20) How to create engaging content for a product based business without being selly (24:15) Why you should think about building your online audience as early as possible in your business (26:01) Why you should start with one social media platform to build an engaged audience and then think about other platforms (29:45) Resources [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [335] How to create a high-converting lead magnet (podcast) [337] The tools I am using to build my online audience (podcast) [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast) [363] Five ways to bust through an audience growth plateau (podcast) Audience Calculator Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Want to improve your Facebook page engagement?  Creating a strategy that sets out what you’re going to post, when and where will help a lot.  This doesn’t need to be complicated. You just need to decide on the following  How regularly you are going to post on your Facebook page  What days and times you are going to post What kind of content you are going to share  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Remember that creating a strategy is just the first step. You’ll need to post consistently. And you’ll need to experiment - tweaking and testing your content to improve your results. You may also wish to start experimenting with other things e.g. best days and times to post your content and tweak accordingly.  Do this one thing Write down the answers to the following questions (what gets written down gets done). How regularly are you going to post on your Facebook page  (I’d recommend at least 3-5 times a week) What days and times are you going to post? (you can always change this) What kind of content are you going to share? Personally I would recommend scheduling on Facebook or posting organically rather than using a scheduling tool.  For accountability, share your answers to these three questions in the Facebook group (we have a dedicated thread for this). Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here Join the Facebook Challenge group  Podcast shownotes How to take part in the Facebook page engagement challenge when it has finished (01:15)   Previous Facebook Challenge Podcasts I need to know this [367] I know about that [368] This is what I think [369] I know how that feels  [370] [365] Day 1 Why your Facebook page isn’t getting enough engagement (and what to do about it) (podcast) [366] Day 2 What to post on your Facebook page to get more engagement(podcast) [367] Day 3 Why 'value' posts are not enough to get engagement on your Facebook page (podcast) [368] Day 4 How asking questions can help you get you engagement on your Facebook page (podcast) [369] Day 5 Why opinionated content works well for your Facebook page (and how to do it well)  (podcast) [370] Day 6 How sharing personal experiences can boost engagement on your Facebook page(podcast) Resources [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook Group without annoying your members (podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party(podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast) [361] 15 post ideas for your Facebook group (podcast) Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

Over the past few days, I’ve shared with you the  four types of post that will attract engagement on your Facebook page. These are:  I need to know this I know about that  This is what I think  I know how that feels  Over the past few days you’ve tackled the first three types of content.  Today I want to go a bit deeper on the fourth kind of content and get you to publish an engaging ‘I know how that feels’ post. However there is an art to getting engagement on this kind of content and in this podcast episode I’ll show you how. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} People also love to share their experiences/advice, which is why more vulnerable, personal content works well. This is why posts on my training for the London Marathon (including injuries and setbacks) tend to get more engagement than any of my business posts. When you share personal content, over time, you build up a narrative and take people on a journey with you - something that  can be very powerful.     Remember this does not mean you have to share your deepest, darkest secrets - one of the most popular ‘I know how that feels’ posts I created was round-up of my most embarrassing headshots (we all know how it feels to look at an embarrassing old photo of ourselves).  But people like to do business with people. If you’re willing to share a little of the person behind the business you’ll get much better engagement on your page. And when people feel connected to you through a shared experience - or just being able to relate to your feelings - they’re far more likely to want to be your customer.   Do this one thing Create a short ‘I know how that feels’ style Facebook post which encourages people to share their thoughts/experiences.  Ideally, choose a topic you can people will actually care about and make it easy for people to respond (as shown in the example above).  Many of the engagement strategies I share above (e.g. asking questions, giving a narrow range of choices) can work for this type of post, but if your post is powerful enough, you may not need to use them at all. Experiment and see what works.  Tip:Photographs, video and images are all great for engagement.  Next, chivvy up your Facebook Engagement Tribe and get them commenting on your post. While no one truly knows how the algorithm works, many believe that comments made in the first 15 minutes of posting have the biggest impact (and that’s certainly been my experience) so get to work!  Finally, share your post in the Facebook group to get feedback from myself and others in the group (we have a dedicated thread for each day). Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here Join the Facebook Challenge group  Podcast shownotes Previous Facebook Challenge Podcasts I need to know this [367] I know about that [368] This is what I think [369]  I know how that feels  [370]  [365] Day 1 Why your Facebook page isn’t getting enough engagement (and what to do about it) (podcast) [366] Day 2 What to post on your Facebook page to get more engagement(podcast) [367] Day 3 Why 'value' posts are not enough to get engagement on your Facebook page (podcast) [368] Day 4 How asking questions can help you get you engagement on your Facebook page (podcast) [369] Day 5 Why opinionated content works well for your Facebook page (and how to do it well)  (podcast) Resources [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook Group without annoying your members (podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party(podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast) [361] 15 post ideas for your Facebook group (podcast) Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

People love to share their ideas - particularly on divisive topics. That’s why content that asks people to state their opinions generally works well on your Facebook page.  I generally refer to this as ‘This is what I think’ content.  This is one of four types of content that generate lots of engagement.    I need to know this I know about that  This is what I think  I know how that feels  However there is an art to getting engagement on this kind of content and in this podcast episode I’ll show you how.    {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.   People love to share their opinions, but they’re also busy, so the trick to getting engagement on this kind of content is to make it as easy as possible for people to comment by giving them a narrow set of choices, as in this example where Rosie asked her followers where they stood on using reins with toddlers.. If you can’t see it, click here.    The crucial thing is to pick subjects people actually care about and avoid sitting on the fence. Making a bold statement like ‘Reins for toddlers. Essential or evil?’ commands attention.      Do this one thing   Create a short ‘This is what I think’ style Facebook post which encourages people to share their  opinion on something. Choose a topic people will actually care about and make it easy for people to respond (as shown in the example above).  Don’t forget a single call for action.  Next, chivvy up your Facebook Engagement Tribe and get them commenting on your post. While no one truly knows how the algorithm works, many believe that comments made in the first 15 minutes of posting have the biggest impact (and that’s certainly been my experience) so get to work!    Finally, share your post in the Facebook group to get feedback from myself and others in the group (we have a dedicated thread for each day).   Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here Join the Facebook Challenge group  Podcast shownotes How to take part in the Facebook page engagement challenge when it has finished (01:04 How to create a ‘This is what I think content’ post for your Facebook page (2:35) Why you need to make it easy for people to engage with your Facebook post (2:58) How to choose a topic for a ‘This is what I think content’ Facebook post (4:14) Why making it simple for people to respond will increase engagement on your Facebook page (4:21) How being bold in your opinion can really help you get good engagement. (4:40) How to link your content topic back to your product or service  (6:02) What you need to do for the challenge for this podcast (7:01)   Previous Facebook Challenge Podcasts [365] Day 1 Why your Facebook page isn’t getting enough engagement (and what to do about it)(podcast) [366] Day 2 What to post on your Facebook page to get more engagement(podcast) [367] Day 3 Why 'value' posts are not enough to get engagement on your Facebook page(podcast) [368] Day 4 How asking questions can help you get you engagement on your Facebook page(podcast) Resources [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook Group without annoying your members(podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party(podcast) [358]13 Ideas for engaging social media posts(podcast) [361] 15 post ideas for your Facebook group(podcast) Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Asking questions can be a great way to get engagement on your Facebook  page. People love to share their ideas, so content that asks people to state their preferences generally works a treat.  This can be anything from asking people which version of your new logo they prefer, to whether you should stock the blue or red handbag in your Etsy shop to whether they like to have an iron provided when they stay in a holiday cottage. I generally refer to this as ‘I know about this’ content.  This is one of four types of content that generate lots of engagement.    I need to know this I know about that  This is what I think  I know how that feels    However there is an art to getting engagement on this kind of content and in this podcast episode I’ll show you how.   {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   If you want people to respond to ‘I know about this’ posts, you have to give them clear choices  e.g. A, B, C or D, yes/no, agree/disagree - or even ask them to respond with emojis.I generally refer to these as short/two tap answer posts.    Here is an example of a post I shared which attracted 115 comments (can’t see the image, click here). All respondents had to do was state whether they were interested in getting a copy of my social media engagement playbook when it was ready (with a ‘Y’ or ‘N’).   In this example, I asked for feedback on the artwork for an upcoming masterclass (which was available for members to buy) stating a preference of 1, 2, 3 or 4.      Not only do short/two tap answer posts make it super quick for people to engage, they don’t have to think too hard about what to say - which means they’re far more likely to respond. Occasionally someone warns me that the Facebook/LinkedIn algorithm penalises content like this i.e. content that encourages short/two tap answers. I have no idea if this is true, but I actually think it’s pretty irrelevant. Once someone has responded to you, you can - and should - go back and ask them an additional question/encourage them to give you more information e.g ‘Interesting…why does that one appeal the most (if you don’t mind me asking’). So it’s easy to turn a short/two tap answer posts into a conversation. And conversations are exactly what you should be aiming for with all your social media content.  I wouldn’t advise you to use short/two tap answer postsall the time -it’s definitely important to vary your content - but they can be a great tool to encourage engagement, particularly when you’re trying to boost the engagement in your page.    Do this one thing   Create a short ‘I know about this’ style Facebook post where you share a useful piece of content which encourages people to share their opinion on something.   Next, chivvy up your Facebook Engagement Tribe and get them commenting on your post. While no one truly knows how the algorithm works, many believe that comments made in the first 15 minutes of posting have the biggest impact (and that’s certainly been my experience) so get to work! Finally, share your post in the Facebook group to get feedback from myself and others in the group (we have a dedicated thread for each day). Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here Join the Facebook Challenge group    Podcast shownotes How to take part in the Facebook page engagement challenge when it has finished (1:04). Why asking questions is a great way to get engagement on your Facebook page (2:37) How to create I know about that content for your Facebook page (3:10) How to create posts with short or two tap answers for your Facebook page (3:40) Why you should make it easy for people to respond to your Facebook posts (4:30) How to get engagement with your audience by using quick short tap answers (5:05) How to use short quick tap answer posts to create a buzz around a new product or service (5:55)   Previous Facebook Challenge Podcasts [365] Day 1 Why your Facebook page isn’t getting enough engagement (and what to do about it) (podcast) [366] Day 2 What to post on your Facebook page to get more engagement (podcast) [367] Day 3 Why 'value' posts are not enough to get engagement on your Facebook page(podcast)   Resources [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook Group without annoying your members (podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (podcast) [361] 15 post ideas for your Facebook group (podcast) Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Creating content that solves a problem for people is a great way to get engagement on your Facebook  page. This can be anything from a vlog on how to pitch yourself as a podcast guest, an important piece of industry news,an amusing cat video  (making people laugh is definitely solving a problem).  I generally refer to this as ‘I need to know this’ content.  This is one of four types of content that generate lots of engagement.  I need to know this I know about that  This is what I think  I know how that feels  However there is an art to getting engagement on this kind of content and in this podcast episode I’ll show you how.    {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   Sharing content that solves your customers’ problems - or just makes their day easier - can be a great way to get engagement on your Facebook page.  But it doesn’t matter how useful your new blog post is or how funny your cat video is, if you don’t create curiosity you’ll be lucky to get a few likes, shares and/or comments. One really easy way to create curiosity is to ask a question that relates to the content you want to share. So, for example, I published a really podcast episode entitled 15 post ideas for your Facebook group. Although this is a useful episode, when I just post a link to the episode I don’t get very much engagement. If I ask a question that relates to the subject of the podcast episode, I get far more engagement. I can still share the link to the episodes in the comments. Other ideas for generating curiosity.  Share a short clip from your podcast/vlog (rather than the whole episode) and ask people to predict what happens next  Share a divisive quote from your blog post and ask people if they agree/disagree Share a blooper from your vlog Share a still/photograph and invite people to write a caption  Summarise a piece of industry news and ask people if they agree/disagree   Do this one thing   Create a short ‘I need to know this’ style Facebook post where you share a useful piece of content that helps solve a problem for your audience (remember that entertaining people can be solving a problem). Instead of just posting a link, think about how you can create curiosity about your post using some of the strategies I’ve shared above (sure you will also have loads of your own - can’t wait to see them!). Don’t forget to include a call-to-action Next, chivvy up your Facebook Engagement Tribe and get them commenting on your post. While no one truly knows how the algorithm works, many believe that comments made in the first 15 minutes of posting have the biggest impact (and that’s certainly been my experience) so get to work!  Finally, share your post in the Facebook group to get feedback from myself and others in the group (we have a dedicated thread for each day).    Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here Join the Facebook Challenge group  Podcast shownotes How to take part in the Facebook page engagement challenge when it has finished (01:06) How to create engaging content for your Facebook page that adds value and solves a problem (2:40) How to turn your Facebook post into a conversation and create curiosity so that people engage (3:10) Ways that you can create curiosity and start a conversation on your Facebook posts (5:20) What you need to do for the Facebook challenge for this podcast (07:27) Why you should just include one Call to Action at the end of your Facebook post (07:59) Why you need to get engagement in the first 15 minutes of a Facebook post (08:40)   Previous Facebook Challenge Podcasts [365] Day 1 Why your Facebook page isn’t getting enough engagement (and what to do about it)(podcast) [366] Day 2 What to post on your Facebook page to get more engagement(podcast)   Resources [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook Group without annoying your members(podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party(podcast) [358]13 Ideas for engaging social media posts(podcast) [361] 15 post ideas for your Facebook group(podcast) Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn    

 If you’re struggling to get engagement on your Facebook page, you may be confused about what kind of content you should be posting.  In this episode I share four types of Facebook page posts that generate lots of engagement.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Having tested hundreds of different types of content - on both my own account and my clients’ I’ve noticed there are four types of post that generally get more engagement. I need to know this I know about that  This is what I think  I know how that feels  You may have spotted already that there’s a common theme: relatability. If you want people to engage with your content, it needs to be relatable - something that either solves a problem for them, they have experience of and/or an opinion on.  Let me break that down for you.  ‘I need to know this’ content  Creating content that solves a problem for people is a great way to get engagement. This can be anything from a vlog on how to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (link to blog post), an important piece of industry news (link to article on Twitter change of terms) to an amusing cat video (link to amusing cat video) (making people laugh is definitely solving a problem). However there is an art to getting engagement on this kind of content, which I’ll share with you tomorrow.  ‘I know about that’ content People love to share their ideas, so content that asks people to state their opinions/preferences, generally works a treat.  This can be anything from asking people whether you should stock the handbag in blue or read to whether they like to have an iron in a holiday cottage to what they think of new laws that affect your industry.  In the example below, I asked my audience which cover they preferred for my media diary:   N.B. You do need to be specific to get engagement on this kind of content and I’ll show you how to do that on Day 4 of the challenge.  ‘This is what I think’ content People love to share their opinions - particularly on topics that are divisive. This is why posts like this one on whether you should put toddlers on reins  tend to perform better than other posts.   ‘I know how that feels’ content People also love to share their experiences/advice, which is why more vulnerable, personal content works well. This post on picking up an injury during my London Marathon got more engagement than any of my business posts (as did many of my other marathon related posts).    It’s worth remembering that Facebook is, primarily,  a ‘friends and family’ platform - which is why personal posts - of the kind you might post on your own Facebook wall - often do better on your Facebook well than business related posts. This is not to say you need to share your deepest, darkest secrets, but people like to do business with people. If you’re willing to share a little of the person behind the business you’ll get much better engagement on your page.  Do this one thing Brainstorm at least five ideas for each type of content.  I need to know this I know about that  This is what I think  I know how that feels  Be brave and share them in our Facebook group  so you can get feedback from myself and other members of the group  (we have a dedicated thread for your ideas) Podcast shownotes How to take part in the challenge when it has finished (01:05) The four types of posts that will generate Facebook page engagement (2:55) How to create content for your Facebook page that adds value or solves a problem for your clients or customers (3:11) How to ask people’s opinions to generate content and engagement (4:34) How to create content by getting people’s opinions (especially if they disagree) (5:33) How sharing relatable personal stories will increase engagement on your Facebook page (6:08) Why you’ll get better engagement if your content is personally relatable rather than just about your business (06:58) What you need to do for the challenge for this podcast (08:08) Resources Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here Join the Facebook Challenge group  [365] Day 1 Why your Facebook page isn’t getting enough engagement (and what to do about it)(podcast) [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook Group without annoying your members(podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party(podcast) [358]13 Ideas for engaging social media posts(podcast) [361 15 post ideas for your Facebook group(podcast) Build Your Audience Programme Buy your ticket for Build Your Audience Live Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Are you frustrated by the lack of engagement with your Facebook page?  You’re posting regularly but your reach is poor. Your posts are only attracting a handful of likes and comments - leaving you wondering if it’s worth having a page at all.  If this sounds like you, the first thing you need to know is that it’s nothing to do with the Facebook algorithm and everything to do with the kind of content you’re sharing. Which means there is a lot you can do to improve your engagement (without spending a penny on advertising).  If this sounds familiar, you’ll love my seven episode podcast series on how to improve your Facebook page engagement. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} This episode is part of a seven episode challenge to help you improve your Facebook page engagement. You can read more about the challenge here.  Why your Facebook page isn’t getting enough engagement (and what to do about it) If you’re not getting engagement on your Facebook page, it’s easy to blame the algorithm (i.e. the complicated - and super top secret - mathematical equation Facebook uses to determine how many people your content is shown to).  The truth is, if you’re engagement stinks, it’s nothing to do with the Facebook algorithm and everything to do with the kind of content you’re sharing (plus how you’re sharing it).  The good news is, there is a LOT you can do to improve your Facebook page engagement (without spending a penny on advertising).  But the first thing you need to know is that posting great content is not enough. You also need to ‘train’ the Facebook algorithm to recognise your content as important so it will show it to more people. How do you do that? By getting engagement on your posts in the form of likes and comments.  If you’re currently struggling to attract likes and comments, this might seem like a ‘chicken and egg’ situation. If you not many people are commenting on your content, others are likely to want to comment either. But the answer is surprisingly simple; instead of sitting back and hoping someone will comment on your content...you need to go out and find people to comment on your content.  Do this one thing  Make a list of 15 people  you can ask to comment on your content for the duration of the challenge (and beyond if you can). This is your Facebook Engagement Tribe.  Ideally these will be your ideal customers, but if this is not possible, just do what you can to get some engagement going on your page. You can even get together with a group of fellow business owners and comment on each others’ posts - that way everyone benefits.  It may take a while for Facebook to catch on that your posts are valuable and start showing them to more people - which is why it’s important to be patient. Remember, also, that it’s not just about the algorithm. Your Facebook page is your shop window; if people look you up online and see you’re effectively broadcasting to an audience of none, they will assume (rightly or wrongly) your business is not successful. If they see engagement - in the form of likes and comments (even if they do initially come from your best friend!) they’re much more likely to take you seriously. Resources Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn  

Do you ever have clients or customers who seem impossible to please? If you’re a coach or consultant, these typically show up as clients who sign up to work with you…and then don’t do the work. But somehow they try to make it feel like it's all your fault.  If you have a product-based business, these are generally the ones who ask for discounts and refunds - often without justification. These kind of people can be a huge drain on your energy - and your time. In this episode I share practical strategies for dealing with difficult clients and customers. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast shownotes How setting the ground rules can help reduce complaints (4:46) Why prevention is better than cure by managing expectations of clients (5:46) How setting boundaries can reduce your workload and manage client expectations (6:45) How to create a fairplay agreement for your guidelines and learn about mine (13:25) How having your FAQs on your sales page can help if a customer is dissatisfied(14:08) How communicating well and monitoring your communications can help protect against unhappy clients (16:48) How creating key blog posts in a membership can improve a client experience (18:10) How anticipating potential problems will help prevent problems with clients (22:39) How to use a discovery call with a potential client to decide if you can work with them (24:45) How to defuse a situation with an unhappy client (28:00) How putting the onus back on the customer can help de escalate a situation (29:38) How to deal with someone who complains by showering them with love (33:17) Why you shouldn’t be afraid to refund people and let them go (36:20) Resources Jay Baer Hug your haters How to get the most out of the Build Your Audience Office Hour How to get the most out of your Build Your Audience membership  Take part in my 7 day Facebook challenge here [202] Behind the scenes of my membership community (podcast) [219] How to get your ideal clients to fall in love with you with Laura Pearman (podcast) [281] How to find new clients or customers fast (podcast) [351] How to get corporate clients (and why you should) with Dylis Guyan (blog post) Lost your mojo with your membership community? Here's how to get it back. (blog post) How to add captions to your video using Kapwing and Rev.com (blog post) Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn

If you’re struggling to grow your audience on social media, the temptation is to keep trying more and more new marketing strategies.  But this can often leave you feeling overwhelmed and overworked. And when you’re spreading yourself too thin - you can end up doing lots of things not very well - which can actually stunt your audience growth.  If this sounds familiar, you’ll love this podcast episode on how to bust through an audience growth plateau.  In it, I show you how doing things differently (rather than doing more) can help you kickstart your audience growth. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} 1. Focus on one platform  If you’re struggling to build your audience on social media, it may be because you’re spreading yourself too thin. Focusing on growing your audience on one social media platform means you can go deep on all the features of that platform - and experiment with different strategies - rather than ‘dabbling’ with three or four.  This doesn’t mean you can’t post on other social media platforms at all; you can always repurpose some of the content from your main platform. But putting 90% of your efforts into one platform will almost certainly help you grow quicker.  For example, the Instagram expert Kat Coroy focuses her social media efforts solely on Instagram - which has allowed her to sell thousands of her online course Instagram Makeover.  The LinkedIn expert Helen Pritchard focuses solely on LinkedIn - allowing her to attract hundreds of students to her LinkedIn Bootcamp.  Love and London (an online resource for visitors to London) has over 100,000 subscribers to its YouTube channel. But while its founder Jess Dante has a presence on most social media platforms, her key focus is on Instagram - freeing her up to create high quality content and serve her existing clients. 2. Focus on engagement not numbers  When you’re building an online audience, it’s tempting to think it’s all about the numbers. Which means focusing on building funnels and automating everything you can, right? Wrong.  Numbers are important (the average conversion rate for online sales is just 1-2% which means most people need a much bigger audience than they think). But what you actually need to build is relationships. So if you’re focusing on building funnels and automation - over having real conversations with your prospective customers/clients - on social media and in your DMs if necessary - your audience growth will almost certainly plateau.  Building your audience is actually about building relationships. And you build this relationship one at a time. 3. Share more personal content  People like to do business with people they like. So if you’re hiding away behind your laptop - or in your studio - you’re missing out on the chance to build relationships with prospective (and existing) customers.  This isn’t about sharing your personal secrets - or airing your dirty laundry in public. It’s about creating connection points when you realise you share common ground with your followers. For example, fashion illustrator Zoe Georgiou, said she decided to join my Build Your Audience membership programme after she came to one of my meet-ups and found me warm and welcoming (not the ‘hard-nosed businesswoman ‘she’d expected). But what nailed it was when I revealed I also hated tomato ketchup. Finding those areas of commonality and creating those ‘that happened to me too’ moments can be crucial for building your audience.  And as Marsha Shandur points out in our podcast interview on how to use stories to attract your ideal clients, when you’re willing to be vulnerable and admit your life isn’t perfect, that’s when people often feel they can connect with you. 4. ‘Borrow’ other peoples’ audiences Creating guest content for other peoples’ audiences e.g. guest blog posts, guest teaching sessions and virtual summits can be a great way to grow your audience - by tapping into other peoples’ audiences.  There are pros and cons for each, but for me, by far the best way to do this is through podcast guest interviews.  Being a podcast guest is a great way to get in front of your ideal customers/clients - and build your audience - fast.  It’s much quicker than writing a guest blog post (most podcast interviews last between 30-60 mins) - which means you can potentially do several a week.  It’s also a great way to build new relationships quicker.  There’s something about being in someone’s earbuds that’s much more intimate than the written word. Which means that by the end of a thirty minute interview, people often feel they know, like and trust you enough to visit your website, download your free resources and/or even buy your products/service.  And the best thing is, every time you appear on someone else’s podcast, you’re getting in front of a brand new audience - an audience you haven’t had to build yourself. So if you set yourself a target to do three interviews a week, you could potentially build your audience by thousands - in a relatively short space of time. Here’s how to pitch yourself as a podcast guest.  5. Show up ‘in person’ Hosting a live event can be a great way to connect with your prospective customer/clients. There is something really powerful about meeting someone in person. You can create a much better rapport - and do it faster - than you can online.  This doesn’t mean you have to put on a large live event.  A small meet up can be just as effective. And if that really isn’t possible, you can add a personal touch by sending a voicemail or using a tool like Bonjoro.  Key takeaway Building an online audience can be tough and it is perfectly normal to hit a plateau. In fact, this can happen at any stage in your business. But if you can swap your a ‘funnel’ mindset for a ‘feeling’ mindset - using some of the ideas shared in this post - you’ll bust through your audience growth plateau quicker.  Podcast shownotes Why you need to think differently when you hit an audience growth plateau (2:50) Why focusing on one platform will help you grow quicker  (04:09) Examples of people that use one social media platform media really well  07:03 Why focusing on the engagement and not numbers will help grow your audience (10:32) Steps to take on your platforms if you’ve fallen into an audience growth plateau (12:10) Why conversations and engaging on social media can help grow your audience (14:55) How sharing personal stories will help you connect with your audience (15:55) How to choose the content topics that you post about  (19:00) How ‘borrowing’ other people’s audiences can get you in front of a new audience (24:12) How being a podcast guest can help you grow a new audience (and bonus tips) (25:59) Why showing up in person  can help you connect and grow your audience (28:57) Resources Download 50 ways to build your online audience Kat Coroy online course Instagram Makeover. Kat Coroy Kat Coroy website  Helen Pritchard  LinkedIn Bootcamp Jess Dante YouTube  Love and London Kate Lister florist Instagram Julia Day The Independent Girls Collective Voicemail tool Bonjoro [190] How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (and why you need to) (podcast) [196] How to get more engagement on Instagram with Sara Tasker (podcast) [253] How to land guest appearances on podcasts with Nicole Holland (podcast)  [341] How to use stories to attract your ideal clients with Marsha Shandur  (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [353] How to grow your audience through Instagram Stories with Tyler McCall (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (for when you’re all out of ideas) (podcast) [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27K - fast (podcast) How to add closed captions to your videos using Rev and Kapwing (blog post) Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Build Your Audience Programme How to write awesome sales copy How to create a high converting lead magnet course Order your special offer 2019 Media Diary  How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn    

Are you struggling to build your audience on Instagram? You're posting regularly but you're not getting as much engagement as you'd like (or sales). Everything just seems SO slow.... Or maybe you're thinking about using Instagram to promote your business...and would love some tips/tactics on how to make best use of the platform. If any of that sounds familiar you’ll love this podcast interview with Chris Taylor. In it, he shares how he's grown his Instagram following from just 500 to 27k since last year. He's super candid about the tactics he's used and has this rare talent of making it all sound so simple. I tried one of his tactics immediately after the interview and 3x the reach on my next post. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Podcast Shownotes How Chris started in social media and Instagram  (2:56) Practical strategies you can use to grow your  Instagram following (08:10) How spending an hour on Instagram can help build your relationships (11:32) How to find out what content your followers want to see  on Instagram (13:07)  How to use hashtags on Instagram to engage with other people’s content (and how you can build your authority (17:03) Why social media is now the main marketing platform for small to medium-sized businesses (21:20) Why hashtags are important on Instagram and the best way to use them (22:30) How to use hashtags strategically on Instagram (and why you need to pre engage before posting) (23:40) How to use hashtags like a domino effect for your post reach (and go viral) (28:15) What tools you can use for hashtag research (30:18) Step by step example of hashtag research for a post on Instagram (33:01) How to get as much engagement as possible on your Instagram posts (36:04) Why Instagram is no longer about the image and it’s the content that can make the biggest difference (41:07) How to use Instagram Stories to authentically engage with your audience (46:05) How getting rid of the money mindset can get you results on social media (52:40) Why you need to spend time on your social media to get the results you want (1:01:15) Resources Chris Taylor Instagram Tools that Chris uses for hashtag research: Social Report, Social Blade, Rite tag [196] How to get more engagement on Instagram with Sara Tasker (podcast) [318] How to write compelling email copy (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [353] How to grow your audience through Instagram Stories with Tyler McCall (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (for when you’re all out of ideas) (podcast) How to add closed captions to your videos using Rev and Kapwing (blog post) Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Build Your Audience Programme Special offer - How to write awesome sales copy How to create a high converting lead magnet course Order your special offer 2019 Media Diary  How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn   The post [362] How to grow your Instagram following to 27k - fast appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you ever feel all out of ideas for your Facebook group?  Or maybe you’re just tired of posting the same old stuff and/or looking for ideas to boost engagement in your group.  This list of go-to posts will you keep you going...even when you’re feeling at your most uninspired.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   1. Opinions please Got a new product/service to launch? Ask your members to help you decide on the name/title, which logo design you should use and/or which colour you should stock it in.  2. Win of the week  Ask your members to share their biggest ‘win’ of the week. Great for a Friday morning post.  3. The big promotion  Invite your members to share something they want to shout about. This could be anything from a new product or service they’re launching to an achievement they are proud of. To avoid people spamming your group with sales pitches, this is best restricted to a specific day/date. 4. Your week in emojis Ask your members to describe their day/week in three emojis.  5. Shout out ‘Shout out’ member successes. For best results, shout out several members at a time and tag them into your post.  6. Honesty time Invite your members to share one thing they are struggling with right now - something they might feel awkward about sharing outside of the group.  7. In the news Is there a news story everyone is talking about right now? Ask your members what they think about it. Bonus tip: don’t share a link to an article someone else has written about it - explain it in your own words (or on video).  8. Emoji review Invite your members to review your latest blog post, podcast episode, Youtube video - or your latest Facebook Live video in the group - using just three emojis.  9. The winning shot Just had a new set of headshots taken for your business? Share your favourites and ask your followers to vote on their winning shot. You can do the same with product photography.  10. Home sweet home Ask your members to post the name of the town/city where they live (or a photo/video).  11. My favourite place  Invite your members to share a photo or video of their favourite spot in their home/office.  12. Sneak peek Give a sneak peek of a new product/service you’re working on.  13. Quick tutorial Shoot a quick ‘how to’ video tutorial showing for your members on a specific topic e.g. how to light their smartphone videos (without any fancy equipment), how to wrap an awkward shaped gift or how to knock up a nativity costume for your child in 30 mins.  14. Oops I did it again Share the outtakes from your latest social media video or podcast recording. Or share the pictures that didn’t make it to your feed (e.g. the cat walking across your Instagram flatlay).  15. Can you guess what it is?  Share a tool/resource you use in your work and get your members to guess what you use it for.  Want more? Head over and download the full 31 ideas here.  Want to go more indepth then head over to my Facebook group engagement Masterclass that you can buy here. If you are struggling to get engagement on social media then you can buy my social media engagement playbook here. Podcast shownotes How to sell and create a buzz in your group by asking for feedback on your products (01:44) How to celebrate your group members’ successes and create engagement (3:27) Why you should give members a specific day to promote their own business (04:17) How emojis can be used to get everyone talking (05:28) How to inspire other members by doing a member shout out and share success (5:40) How encouraging honesty amongst members can support members and create engagement  (07:15) How to use a current news story that divides opinion in your Facebook group (and why you should tell it in your own words) (08:28) How to use recent business photos to create engagement (10:34) How you can create engagement just from asking about places (11:51) Why you should get people to share their behind the scenes  (12:57) Why you need to have one clear call to action on your Facebook group post (13:25) How to create content in your Facebook group by being helpful (14:00)  How to get your Facebook group engaged by sharing the bits that go wrong in your business (15:11) Why you need to keep an eye on your content and change it if it’s not working (16:17)  How the Facebook algorithm favours content in groups with comments (17:40)   Resources Record your screen with Loom Edit photos with Snapseed How to do an iTunes review [192] How to get more engagement on your Facebook page (podcast)[318] How to write compelling email copy (podcast)[320] How to host a Christmas sale on Facebook Live (podcast)[329] What's working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast)[335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast)[348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast)[357] How to transform your Facebook page from ghost town to garden party (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (for when you’re all out of ideas) (podcast) How to add closed captions to your videos using Rev and Kapwing (blog post) Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Build Your Audience Programme How to create a high converting lead magnet course Order your special offer 2019 Media Diary  How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn The post [361] 15 post ideas for your Facebook group appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to get people to open your marketing emails, you need to write compelling email subject headers. But what makes a great email subject header? Which words and phrases make people more likely to open your emails? And which ones should you avoid? That's exactly what I cover in this podcast episode on how to get people to open your emails. It’s packed with tips, tricks and examples you can use to improve your email open rate. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} Before you get started, here’s a bit of tough love for you. I wish I could give you one strategy or one blueprint you could follow to get people to open your emails. But as every audience is different, I’m afraid I can’t do that. What I can do is share the strategies that work really well for me, for my clients, and for others in the industry. But if you want to improve your email open rates, you're going to have to be brave, you're going to have to be courageous, and you're going to have to go and test things out and see what works for you. 1. Make a list of what keeps your ideal client (or newsletter reader) up at night The first thing you need to understand is that people don’t buy for logical reasons. They buy for emotional reasons. So if you want to write effective email subject headers, you need to understand your prospective clients' emotions. That’s why I recommend starting by making a list of your ideal clients’ problems and their worries. For example, my prospective clients often tell me they’re worried their clients are going to dry up, that they struggle to stick to a consistent content publishing/schedule and that they feel overwhelmed by all the marketing options out there. The more I can understand that, the better placed I’ll be to write great email subject headers that will get them to open my emails. 2. Don’t be vanilla Most of us have overflowing inboxes. We only open things that pique our interest. So if you want to increase your email open rate - and increase your sales - you've got to be courageous. That means no playing it safe with boring and/or ‘vanilla’ email subject headers. 3. Go through your own inbox and look at what gets your attention (I save mine) One of the best ways to get ideas for your own email subject headers is to go through your inbox and see which ones caught your attention. Analyse why they caught your attention and what you could use/adapt for your own email subject headers. Save them in a folder and look through them when you need inspiration. 4. Ask Questions If you want to get people interested in opening your emails you need to arouse peoples’ curiosity. It can be helpful to think of your subject headers a like a ‘teaser’ for email content. Asking questions often works well. For example: ‘can you answer this question honestly?’ or ‘what kind of results can you expect from working with me?’ This invites the reader to get into a conversation with you, which is what great email marketing is all about. 5. Surprise your subscribers Introducing an element of surprise works well too. For example: ‘please stop listening to my podcast’,  ‘I was wrong about this’ or ‘Facebook hates you. Here’s why.’ Why would I ask people to stop listening to my podcast? What was I wrong about? Why does Facebook hate you? These statements arouse curiosity and intrigue, which means people are far more likely to open the email. 6. Use genuine scarcity If you have a genuinely time-sensitive offer, don’t be afraid to use that in your email subject header e.g. “Last chance’ or ‘enrolments close at midnight.’ Although do keep a close eye on spam trigger words i.e. those that are most likely to mean your email ends up in spam. For example words like ‘discount’ ‘bonus’ or ‘buy’. But don’t get caught up on lists like this - track and measure what’s happening in your own email list. 7. Showing vulnerability is also effective If you send out an email with a missing link, don’t try to cover it up - email your list,  apologise for your mistake and turn it into a content opportunity. One of my best performing email subject headers is ‘Oops! Of course we know your name really’. This was sent after we accidentally emailed my whole list with their location in the field where their name should have been. Showing that you're human makes you seem more relatable, which can be a great way to build a relationship with your subscribers.   7. Use emojis There is tons of research to show that emojis can increase your email open rates so experiment and see what works for you. Fun fact: we get a much better open rate when we use the 💩 emoji but more unsubscribes. Experimenting with this type of thing is what makes email marketing so much fun (in my opinion). 8. Experiment with fonts and layout Try to experiment in other ways too. For example, using all lower- case letters. This can make your email seem more informal as if it’s coming from a friend. Or using brackets or a mixture of caps and lower-case letters (although do be careful, as capital letters can come across a bit ‘shouty’.).   9. Check how your email subject header looks on mobile Test out how your email subject looks on mobile. Can you see the whole header? Or is some of it missing (in which case, try going for a shorter headline). Some of these seemingly small things can have a big impact on whether your email is opened. 10. Don’t take it personally if people unsubscribe If you are sending emails as part of your email marketing strategy, you will get unsubscribes. This can be upsetting, but it doesn’t mean you are doing anything ‘wrong’. Track your numbers, but please feel reassured that the odd unsubscribe is fine. You only need to worry if you notice a big increase. Podcast shownotes About this podcast (12:24) Why you need to understand your readers' problems rather than their habits (13:50) Why your email subjects need to be brave and courageous not boring and safe (16:07) How to research emails that grab your attention (and examples of good subject headers) (16:48) Why making your email subject header intriguing will increase open rates (20:18) Examples of my best email subject headers with tips on how you can use them (20:32) How changing sentence structures can trigger emotional reactions (29:40) How showing vulnerability can really get your audience on side (34:38) Why you should create email content out of mistakes you make in your business (and hear a few of mine including that gift email!) (38:22) Why great email marketing is about starting a two-way conversation (44:51) Why unsubscribes are not the end of the world and can actually save you money (47:06) Why you shouldn’t feel bad if someone complains about your emails (49:06) Things to consider about the layout of your subject headers and using emojis (52:16) Why you need to test and experiment with your subject headers (54:47) Resources Spam trigger words to avoid [359] How to create an email newsletter people look forward to receiving (podcast)[300] How to Build an audience and why you need to  (podcast)[318] How to write compelling email copy (podcast)[325] Three social media posts that will help you generate sales (podcast)[333] 39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers list (podcast)[335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast)[348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast)[358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (for when you’re all out of ideas) (podcast) Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Build Your Audience Programme How to create a high converting lead magnet course Order your special offer 2019 Media Diary  How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass)  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn   The post [360] How to get people to open your emails appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you putting off launching an email newsletter because you don’t know what to put in it? Or perhaps you started sending an email newsletter...and then hit ‘pause’ because you weren’t sure if the content was right for your audience? If that sounds familiar, you’ll love this podcast on how to create an email newsletter that people actually look forward to receiving. In it, I cover:  What to include in your email newsletter  How often you should send out your email newsletter  The ideal word count for your email newsletter   The best layout for your email newsletter   How to get people to subscribe to your email newsletter And a whole host of other useful tips and tactics to create a successful email newsletter {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   First off, the most important thing you need to know about your email newsletter is that it’s not about you. It’s about your ideal customers/clients. So - unless you have a Kardashian style audience of people who are fascinated by your daily life - your email newsletter shouldn’t be ‘news’ about you and your business. It should focus on your ideal customers/clients problems.  What is an email newsletter? While this may sound obvious, a lot of people get this wrong. A newsletter is any regular email you send out to your current/prospective clients. It doesn’t have to contain pictures or a fancy layout (although it may). It can just be plain text. The key thing is it must add value and help you nurture the relationship. What makes a great email newsletter? Your newsletter is, effectively, a lead magnet i.e. a piece of content you create to attract your ideal customers/clients (or nurture your relationship with existing ones).  A great lead magnet solves a specific type of problem for a specific type of customer/client, offers a transformation, gives a quick win and (crucially) leads your subscribers towards a paid product/service. Learn how to create an effective lead magnet for your business.  For example, the Instagram expert Sara Tasker has a monthly newsletter where she shares new and interesting Instagram hashtags that will be useful for her audience. I look forward to receiving it because I know I’m going to get some fab new hashtags to try.  It solves a problem for me because researching hashtags take time - and is not the most enjoyable job (which is why I look forward to receiving it). So Sara is saving me time on something I don’t like doing. She has an online course specifically for Instagram growth, so her email newsletter is perfectly aligned with one of her paid offers.  Entrepreneur Marie Forleo sends out a weekly email about her latest Q & A Tuesday YouTube video - which contains valuable tips on business and marketing. These free videos add value and build trust, so when she launches her online marketing programme B-School, people are queuing up ready to buy.  Remember an email newsletter isn’t just about attracting new customers/clients. It can be about nurturing your relationship with existing ones.  I send an email every Friday morning to update my audience about my latest podcast episode. And anyone who buys my Media Diary - an A4 desk that includes key dates and awareness days you can use to plan out your content for the coming year - also gets a monthly email newsletter. This includes additional awareness dates and news of new films, books and TV shows (things we wouldn’t necessarily have been aware of when creating the diary) to spark content ideas. Because this email newsletter is adding value, subscribers often email back to thank us for sending it. You Are the Media founder Mark Masters, sends a weekly email (every Thursday at 6am GMT/BST) with news, ideas and inspiration around content marketing and audience growth. Amongst other things, this email helps him nurture his relationship with existing and prospective attendees of his annual You Are The Media live event. I spoke at the event in Bournemouth in June and it was clear this weekly email was instrumental in filling the room at that live event.  Pro tip: Remember that solving a problem for your subscribers doesn’t necessarily have to be offering tips/advice. Solving a problem for your audience could be making them laugh or giving them something beautiful to read during their coffee break (the very reason I subscribe to Alexandra Franzen’s newsletter). Whatever adds value for your audience.  How to find out what you should include in your email newsletter? If you already have an email list, ask them what they’d like to hear about. Don’t ask them an open question e.g. ‘What would you like me to include in my email newsletter?’ If you do this, you’re asking them to think really hard - which means it’s far less likely they’ll reply.  Instead, give them three or four ideas you have for your email newsletter content and ask them to choose the one that feels like the best fit for them. This way, they have to do less thinking, which means they’re far more likely to reply. Once you’ve got them in a conversation, you can always ask further questions to find out if they have any ideas of their own (some will volunteer anyway). If you don’t have an email list, follow exactly the same process with five to ten of your ideal clients/customers. And/or ask your social media followers. Do remember that the only way you will truly know what your audience want to hear about is by putting content out there and seeing how they respond. This can be scary, but it’s the only way to truly find out what kind of content your subscribers really need.  How long does your email newsletter need to be? The rather unsatisfactory answer is...as long as it needs to be.  I subscribe to some newsletters that are just a few lines long but solve my problems. Others are more in-depth. Make it as a long or short as it needs to be for your audience.  Does an email newsletter have to include pictures/or have a fancy layout? If you’ve got the resources to do it and you think it would work for your audience, go ahead and do it. But plain text is absolutely fine. In fact, there is a lot of research to show plain text emails actually perform better than those with images.  And remember an email newsletter doesn’t have to be completely text-based. You can share video, audio, infographics, for example.  It all comes back to what your audience needs from you.  How often should you send out your email newsletter? The rather unsatisfactory answer is: as often as you feel that you need to and probably more often than you think.  The key thing is that you’re adding value and you’re tracking your results and tweaking and adjusting as necessary.  For example, Kennedy teaches entertainers to get booked out with clients. He sends a daily email to his followers and makes a paid offer for his membership/events in pretty much every email. It’s delivering consistently good results for him.  Your email newsletter is only too frequent if it’s not delivering results for you.  Don’t panic if you get a few unsubscribes from your newsletter (or even one or two people who email to say your emails are too frequent for them. What is too frequent for one person is often fine for another). You only need to worry if it’s happening regularly.  Bonus tip: Always try to provide an opportunity for people to ‘talk back’ to you if possible e.g. ‘hit reply and let me know what you think about x or y.’ The more conversation you can generate, the more effective your newsletters will be.  How do you get people to subscribe to your email newsletter? The key thing to remember is that no one wants to subscribe to a newsletter. Another piece of junk in their inbox that they probably won’t open. So don’t ask people to subscribe to your newsletter. Instead, sell the value e.g. ‘Sign up for my monthly hashtag newsletter and save yourself tons of time on hashtag research.’  or ‘Register for our monthly Media Diary newsletter to get additional awareness days and key dates you can use to help with your content planning.’  Here’s 39 surprisingly easy ways to get people to join your email list.  What kind of email newsletter can you create if you have a product-based business? Many product-based business owners think the only email newsletter they can send is one with discounts/offers. If the only thing you’re doing is offering discounts, you’ll have no trouble getting people to sign up to your email newsletter. But you may struggle to get people to build the kind of loyalty that results in repeat sales.  A more savvy approach can be to think about how people might be using your product. A good example of this is my Media Diary newsletter.  Sending a monthly newsletter with additional awareness days and ideas not only adds value, it also reminds people that we exist - so other relevant products go on sale, I’m already top of mind. So don’t just send information about your products, send information about how people can use your products (or products like yours).  For example, if you sell garden offices, send tips on how to style your garden office, how to keep it warm in winter or cool in summer. This is a practical content for past clients and aspirational content for prospective clients. If people see you as a source of useful information - rather than someone who is trying to sell them stuff all the time -  they’re far more likely to want to buy from you. If sell homeware and gifts like my client Penelope Hope founder Nadia Newton, you can create seasonal content that helps your subscribers - and helps you make sales.  The great thing about a newsletter is that you can make it seasonal. For example, Nadia recently launched a range of beach bags. Creating a summer newsletter than includes a round-up of the most stylish beach accessories of the summer (that includes her beach bags) would be a great way for Nadia to add value and sell more of her beach bags.  She could also do similar round-ups for Mothers’ Day gifts, Teachers’ leaving presents and, of course, Christmas gifts.  Bonus tip: Don’t be afraid to include competitors’ products in your round-ups. While it might sound counter-intuitive, if you position yourself as a helpful person/brand, you’ll build loyalty and trust - making people far more likely to buy from you.  If you have a product-based business position yourself as an expert in the type of products you sell - rather than someone who sells stuff. That is what will keep your customers coming back to you - time and time again.  Should you sell in your email newsletter? Absolutely yes. If it’s appropriate, do make offers in your newsletter. But make adding value your number one priority.    Podcast shownotes Why your email newsletter is not about you (2:20) What is an email newsletter (and why it can just be a simple email) (3:48) What makes a great email newsletter (and why it’s like a lead magnet) (5:03) Four things your email newsletter needs to do (6:58) Examples of some great email newsletters (7:52) Creating an email newsletter that solves your ideal customer or clients problem (14:28) How to present your email newsletter and how long should it be? (15:23) How often should you send out your email newsletter (19:07) Who should you send your email newsletter to (and GDPR considerations) (23:10) How to get people to subscribe to your email newsletter (without asking them to subscribe) (25:10) Tips for creating a product based email newsletter (27:59) How to add value and sell in your email newsletter (34:12) What a great email newsletter should look like (35:45) Resources Examples of great newsletters mentioned: Park Run UK Sara Tasker Alexandra Franzen Baby Centre UK Marie Forleo You are the media Penelope Hope Discounted 2019 Media Diary offer [245] What you need to know about GDPR with Suzanne Dibble (podcast) [300] How to Build an audience and why you need to  (podcast)  [318] How to write compelling email copy (podcast) [325] Three social media posts that will help you generate sales (podcast) [333] 39 surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers list (podcast)  [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (for when you’re all out of ideas) (podcast) How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Build Your Audience Programme How to create a high converting lead magnet course Order your special offer 2019 Media Diary  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn The post [359] How to create an email newsletter people look forward to receiving appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you ever have those days when you are all out of ideas for social media posts?  Or maybe you are just tired of posting the same old stuff and looking for some fresh ideas to brighten up your social media feeds. If this sounds familiar, you'll love this podcast episode. In it I share 13 ideas for engaging social media posts. This list of go-to posts will you keep you going...even when you’re feeling at your most uninspired. And you can use them across all social media platforms including Facebook (pages and groups), Instagram, Twitter, LinkedIn & more.  Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode}   document.createElement('video');https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/2019/08/358-Trailer-with-subtitles.mp4   1. Opinions please Got a new product/service to launch? Ask your followers to help you decide on the name/title, which logo design you should use and/or which colour you should stock it in.  2. How I made this Shoot a time-lapse video of you that shows us how your product is made. N.B. If you have a service-based business, record your video with Loom and show us how you put together a talk/learning resource. 3. Behind-the-scenes Give us the reality behind something you’re working on e.g. you sitting up late proofing the workbook for your live event, stuffing goody bags in the corridor or fulfilling last minute orders for Christmas. 4. Tips and tactics  Share a tip e.g. how to add captions to videos, hit the top note in a power ballad or stop your bread shrinking after baking. If you have a product-based business, share a tip about using a product like yours e.g. how to arrange art, how to store handbags in a small space or the best way to cleanse your face. 5. Questions, questions Ask a question that’s bugging you in your business. Wondering whether to include postage in your prices, provide lunch at your next event or start stocking a new product. Ask your followers what they think.  6. Show us your workspace Shoot a quick video of where you work. For more engagement, ask your followers a question about it e.g. should you move the desk under the window or paint the walls in your brand colour.  7. Grenade  Share an opinion you know will divide people e.g. why you hate social media videos, motivational memes and/or being called hun or lovely  8. Playtime Show us how you play. Share a snap or video of you running, playing the piano, baking cakes…or whatever you like to do to relax.  9. Show awareness Use an awareness day/key date. Show your followers how you cook pancakes on Shrove Tuesday, cuddle your cat on International Cat Day and doing nothing on National Do Nothing Day. For more ideas on awareness days, check out my Media Diary. 10. What should I wear?  Post a pic of yourself wearing an outfit for an upcoming event and get us to give our opinion. Even better, give your followers a choice of style/colour/look to choose from.  11. Can you guess what it is?  Share a tool/resource you use in your work and get us to guess what you use it for 12. Oops I did it again Share the outtakes from your latest social media video or podcast recording. Or share the pictures that didn’t make it to your feed (e.g. the cat walking across your Instagram flatlay).    13. Pets and children  People love cute pics/video of pets and children... so share away. N.B. If you’re nervous about sharing pics of your children, there’s plenty of creative ways to include them...without having their faces on camera.  Want more? Head over and download the full 23 ideas here.  If you are struggling to get engagement on social media then you can buy my social media engagement playbook here. Podcast shownotes Who should listen to this podcast? (2:13) How to create a buzz around your new product or service by asking for opinions (2:38) Creating content from showing people how you make something in your business  (4:11)  How showing behind the scenes of your business can engage your audience (8:18) Create content from sharing a practical tip that will help your audience (11:31) How sharing business dilemmas with your audience can generate content (13:51) How to create a behind-the-scenes tour of your workspace  (19:28) How a grenade post dividing opinion can give you tons of engagement (21:41) How to make people remember you by creating content about what you do when you are not running your  business (29:00) How to take an awareness day and create content around it (30:24) Can’t make a decision? - ask your audience to vote (32:09) Interesting tools or kit for your business? Ask people to guess what it is (33:50) Bloopers! Save the outtakes on your videos/audio and share with your audience (35:14) Share cute animal photos - it doesn’t have to be serious or corporate all the time (36:50) Resources Download the full 23 ideas for engaging social media posts Record your screen with Loom How to add closed captions to your videos using Rev and Kapwing (blog post)  How to write social media posts that sell (online masterclass) [300] How to Build an audience and why you need to  (podcast)  [322] How to create a content plan for your business  (podcast) [325] Three social media posts that will help you generate sales (podcast) [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast) [355] How to create and launch your own planner for your industry (podcast) [356] How to build your audience through Twitter (and create FOMO) (podcast) [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party (podcast) Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn   The post [358] 13 Ideas for engaging social media posts (for when you're all out of ideas) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Does your Facebook group feel like a ghost town? You’re showing up regularly, but you’re not getting much engagement.  In fact you may be wondering if it’s worth bothering having a group at all. If this sounds  familiar, you’ll love this podcast episode with Bella Vasta.  In it she shares tons of valuable advice including what to post in your group (versus what you post on your page), how to get members to respond to your posts PLUS some ninja tips on selling to your group members (without being spammy or selly). {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   Bella’s story Bella started using Facebook groups to help promote her pet sitting business owner in Phoenix, Arizona back in 2012. It was only when her daughter was born prematurely in 2014, weighing just 350 grams that she really began to see the power of Facebook groups.  During a six month long stint with her daughter in Neonatal Intensive Care Facebook groups not only allowed her to keep her business running. They also provided her with the support she needed to deal with having one of the smallest micro-preemie babies in the world.  Since then Bella has gone on to open a number of other groups for her own business and is now recognised as one of the world’s leading experts on Facebook groups for business.  Understanding the difference between Facebook pages and groups To explain the difference between Facebook pages and groups, Bella uses the analogy of your front and back garden. Your Facebook page is like your front garden and your group your back garden.  If you were hosting a party, you wouldn’t hold it in your front garden, explains Bella. You’d hold it in your back garden where your guests (all personally invited/vetted by you) could mingle and chat in a more relaxed, informal environment - without feeling like passers by were listening in on their conversations. It’s exactly the same in a Facebook group, where you’re the host, but your guests can start their own conversations and hang out with different groups of people. One of the biggest differences is that conversations on your Facebook page are all started and led by you (what Bella refers to as a ‘dictatorship’ model). Members of your Facebook group are free to start and lead their own discussions (what Bella refers to as a ‘socialist’ model).  While anyone can see and interact with the content on your Facebook page, only those personally/invited vetted by you can see the content in your Facebook group, which creates a completely different kind of atmosphere.  How should the content differ on your Facebook page and in your group?  This really depends on what you are trying to achieve, says Bella. But you will almost certainly need to be posting content that encourages discussion. And because the group is private, you may be able to tackle more sensitive/personal issues than you can on your own page.  Bella recommends asking three questions to those wanting to join your group (the maximum allowed by Facebook). Ideally, this should include one question that asks them what their biggest challenge is right now (in relation to your paid products/services) and another that asks for their email address.  She uses a resource called Group Funnel to collect the data from these initial questions and add it to a spreadsheet. This information can be used to generate content ideas for the group and for in copy on sales page. Used in conjunction with the tool Zapier you can also set up an automated email that welcomes new members to the group. This can be personalised with a video message, using a tool like Bonjoro. Creating a content schedule for your Facebook group Bella suggests planning your content ahead, using a resource like the Media Diary for ideas and scheduling posts inside Facebook.  She recommends using questions, polls and Facebook Lives to generate discussion inside your group.  And there are tons more ideas in her free download 23 Ideas To Get More Engagement In Your Facebook Group: bellavasta.com/janet.  Podcast shownotes How Bella started her business and her first Facebook group (02:19) Why people will listen to your personal story (10:10) Why your Facebook group and page are like your front and back garden (14:40) How people engage differently in Facebook groups and pages  (20:37) How should the content differ on your Facebook page and in your group? (22:38) Tips for managing your Facebook group as your group gets bigger (25:44) How to get the conversation started and generate content in your Facebook group (and tools to help you) (30:43) Bella’s tips for content ideas and questions to ask in your Facebook group (37:05) Why you shouldn’t abandon your Facebook page (41:48) How Facebook is making it easier to monetize and manage your group (45:10) How to use video strategically in your Facebook group (50:45) Resources Get Bella’s download 23 ways to get more engagement in your Group Bella Vasta Facebook Bella Vasta Instagram Find out about Zapier  Bonjoro and Group Funnel [300] How to Build an audience and why you need to  (podcast)  [326] The one thing you need to do to create a passive income (podcast) [327] Why I am closing my 13.5K Facebook Group (podcast) [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville (podcast) [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [352] How to sell in a Facebook group without annoying your members (podcast) [355] How to create and launch your own planner for your industry (podcast) Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Masterclass: How to write social media posts that sell  Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn The post [357] How to transform your Facebook group from ghost town to garden party appeared first on Janet Murray.

Does Twitter confuse the heck out of you? If so, you’re not alone. It's a busy, fast-paced platform that can feel overwhelming at times. But with the right strategies, it can be a powerful - and quick - way to attract and connect with your ideal clients. Plus it’s a great way to reach journalists and influencers in your space.  In this episode Twitter expert and ‘FOMO creator’ May King Tsang explains how you can build your online audience through Twitter. She explains everything from hashtags and DMs through to Twitter Chats and using Twitter lists to cut out the "noise".  Plus she shares tons of ideas on what kind of content you should be posting on the platform. Even if you're already using Twitter, there's tons of practical advice and tips you can start using today. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.}   How does Twitter work  For the uninitiated, Twitter is like a big online party, says May King. There are groups of people having topics about different topics. You can join conversations that interest you or you can start your own. Anyone you want to talk to is just one tweet or direct message away. And the best thing is you can ‘stalk’ people (e.g. prospective clients, journalists and influencers) and gather information that will help you make a better first impression.  And - unlike on platforms like LinkedIn, where people can see you’ve been checking out their profile - they will never know you’ve been listening into their conversations.  Connecting with journalists on Twitter Twitter started as a breaking news platform - and still is. So if you want to connect with journalists, Twitter is definitely the place to hang out. Journalists are actively looking for people to talk to for the stories they are working on. Following hashtags like #journorequest and #prrequest can be a great way to connect with journalists who are looking for stories - without having to send a single pitch or press release.  Find out how to connect with journalists on Twitter.  Twitter chats  A Twitter chat is a public conversation that revolves around a unique hashtag  e.g. #contenthour (N.B. hashtags group together tweets on a similar topic). A Twitter chat can be ongoing, but more commonly are hosted at a regular time and/or day (e.g. once a week or month) - which is why May King compares Twitter chats to TV programmes. Twitter chats are a great way to network with your ideal clients  - without even leaving your house.  While she is not aware of any online lists or directories of Twitter chats, May King suggests carrying out a Google search for Twitter chats that are relevant to you/your industry.  Find out how to take part in a Twitter chat.  Twitter lists If you’re following a lot of people, Twitter can feel really noisy, May King suggests creating Twitter lists of people you want to follow e.g. journalists in your industry, prospective clients, so you can follow along with what they’re up to. Twitter lists can be both public and private, so no one needs to know you are ‘stalking’ them. How to reach out to prospects on Twitter  One of the best things about Twitter is that anyone you want to talk to is just a click away - including your ideal clients. But blundering in and pitching people over Twitter is probably not the best way to go about it. If there is someone you want to connect with, you can start by liking and retweeting their posts (i.e. sharing their posts with your followers), then move onto replying to their posts and/or starting conversations with them on Twitter. Then, when the time feels right, you can ask them to follow you (if they’re not already) and take the conversation over to the direct messages. In the direct messages you have up to 10,000 characters to play with (as opposed to 160 characters in a standard tweet).  Spending a bit of time ‘listening’ to what they are tweeting about first can be a good idea. That way you can establish common ground e.g. they like cats, went on holiday to Croatia and/or watch the TV show Casualty too. This can make it much easier to strike up a conversation later.  Creating a great Twitter bio Most people will decide whether they want to follow you within seconds of looking at your Twitter profile, which is why May King suggests spending some time getting this right.  A good quality headshot is a must.  You can also use the cover picture (which sits just behind your profile pic) to promote your products/services. As May King puts it, this is basically your “billboard.” So for example, if you are running a live event, you can list the name of the event, date and venue and a call-to-action to buy a ticket.  You can use a free design tool like Canva to create an attractive cover picture or hire a designer to create one for you.  Make sure your bio (just 160 characters on Twitter) explains clearly what you do. If you have a branded hashtag (i.e. one you have created just for your business), you can add it into your bio.  Twitter allows you to pin a tweet to the top of your feed (known as a ‘pinned tweet’). This is the first tweet, someone who follows you will see, so use this space wisely. You could share an amazing testimonial from a client and/or promote one of your products/services, changing it up as and when your priorities change. What kind of content should you be sharing on Twitter While there are no hard and fast rules about what to post on Twitter, as with all of your social media content, remember it’s not about you. It’s about adding value for your followers. Which is why the following types of content generally get good engagement:  Content that educates your followers about your area of expertise e.g. helpful blog posts, tips, useful articles (and not just your own)  ‘Live’ coverage of events you’re attending/speaking at (including photos and videos) Conversation starters/polls  Just because you’re using Twitter for business, doesn’t mean your content has to be serious. For example, May King recalls being at a conference and asking her followers whether they preferred pastries or fruit for breakfast (as that was what was on offer) and getting really good engagement.  It’s important to give your followers a sense of the person behind the brand, which is why May King Tsang regularly tweets about her love of Karaoke singing and tea. While this might seem frivolous, it’s actually really important.  “I think a lot of people, too many people are trying to jump five steps forward and try and close that deal but we can't close that deal before getting to know somebody getting to you know build a relationship with someone and build a rapport with someone and how do you get to know someone and build a rapport with someone? It is the small talk. The "What did you watch on TV? What did you get up to "at the weekend? Do you like bananas or apples?" That really helps build the relationship. Podcast shownotes How May King became a FOMO creator (04:25) How Twitter works and how it can help your business  (11:49) How to get publicity for your business by connecting with journalists on Twitter (17:00) How Twitter chats can build your audience and business network (18:01) How Twitter lists can reduce the noise and help you connect with prospects (22:37) Key points about your Twitter bio and profile and why it needs to reflect what you do (28:07) Types of content you can post on Twitter and why it’s really important to engage (32:32)  How showing your personal side on Twitter can help people connect with you (36:56) How to find clients and raise your profile on Twitter (41:21) Why you need to ‘walk the talk’ and demonstrate you are an authority in your field on Twitter (45:40) Resources May King Twitter [233] How to monetise your personal brand with Chris Ducker (podcast) [247] How to find customers on Twitter with Samantha Kelly (podcast) [259] How to build a loyal following on Twitter with Madalyn Skylar (podcast) [267] How to get more engagement on Twitter (podcast) [300] How to Build an audience and why you need to  (podcast)  [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast)  Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Course: How to write social media posts that sell  Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn The post [356] How to build your audience through Twitter (and create FOMO) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you love the idea of publishing your own journal/planner…but feel unsure where to start?   If this sounds familiar, you’ll love this podcast episode on how to create and launch your own planner.  In it, I share everything I’ve learned from creating my own industry planner (the Media Diary), which is now in its fourth year. I break it down, step-by-step - from how to find out whether your planner will sell (without even creating it), to finding someone to design and print your diary, to marketing your planner.  I’ll also compare the pros and cons of getting your planner printed yourself versus using a print-on-demand service like Amazon’s Createspace.  {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode.} Step 1: Market research  While it’s tempting to start with the creative stuff, it’s important to start by carrying out some research to see if there is a market for your planner or journal. Skip this step and you could end up wasting an awful lot of time and money.  Remember that most online sales convert at just 1-2%, so if you’re hoping to sell hundreds or thousands of copies of your planner, you will need an audience to sell to. If you already have an audience of people who would be likely to buy your planner/diary(e.g. an email list and/or engaged Facebook group) share your planner idea and ask for feedback. Start by asking quite general questions e..g ‘I’ve got an idea for a planner. Is this something you think you would buy?” Don’t have an audience? Find 5 to 10 people you think would be the ideal customer for your planner and ask them if they can spare 15-20 minutes for a quick phone/Zoom call to get some feedback on your idea. And please read Step 5 of this post before you take your planner idea any further.  Sadly getting a few positive responses isn’t enough to justify creating your planner. If you sense there’s some interest, you need to go deeper. This might include sharing your ideas/pictures on how your planner will be structured, what it will look like and how it will be laid out. Not only will this help you validate your idea, it will give you useful feedback that will help you create a planner your ideal customers actually want (rather than what you think they want). While research is important, it’s worth remembering that you won’t know for sure if your planner will sell until you ask people to pay you for it. This is why I recommend starting with a test offer (more on that later).  Step 2: Decide on a topic for your planner Nice-looking stationery is all very well, but if your planner doesn’t solve a problem for people, you’ll probably struggle to sell it.  If you’ve done your research correctly, you should have a good idea of the problem your planner will solve for your customers.  Let’s take my media diary as an example. It’s an A4 desk diary that features key dates and awareness days that can help you plan out your content for the coming year. It is also has planning templates that can you help you create annual, quarterly, monthly, weekly and daily content plans. So the media diary solves two key problems for the people who buy it: not being able to think of any/enough content ideas and not having a clear content plan to follow. Not publishing regular content can decrease your visibility, authority and credibility - which can have an impact on the bottom line of your business.  Remember that your planner doesn’t necessarily have to solve a practical problem e.g. not being able to think of ideas. It can also solve an emotional problem/need, such as wanting to look stylish around your peers.  At this stage, it’s also important to think about how you might build a community around your planner. For example, Danielle La Porte’s Desire Map brings together people who want a different approach to goal setting. People who want to create goals around how they want to feel rather than what they want to achieve. That shared identity and set of values is really powerful.  Step 3: Plan the content of your diary - page by page  In order to get a quote from a printer, you will need some key information.  This includes:  How many pages you want  Size (e.g. A4, A1)   Type of printing   Weight and type of paper   Finish (e.g. gloss/matt)   Type of binding e.g. spiral or perfect bound  If you don’t have all of this information to hand, you won’t even be able to get a quote from a printer.  This means sitting down and planning out exactly what you will include on every page of your planner - even down to how many pages you want for each month of the year. This is generally known as a flatplan.  This is important because you can only print a perfect bound book (and, essentially, your planner is a book)  in multiples of four pages. This means that if you decide to add or take away content at a later stage, it could have a big impact on your project (and your budget). If you go for spiral bound, you can add or take away pages in multiples of two, but if you don’t plan out your content thoroughly beforehand, you could still create problems for yourself further down the line.  it’s difficult to estimate how many pages you will need without knowing how you planner will be laid out.  Sites like Canva and Creative Market have planner templates you can browse for inspiration. Pinterest is also a great place to look for inspiration.  At this stage, you also need to some research on the correct paper weight for your planner and best method of binding. If you want to create a product people can use (and possibly carry around with them) for a full year it needs to be hardy.  Skip this stage and you could end up with customers complaining that the cover of their planner has ripped or that they can’t write it in (because the ink is seeping through to the next page and/or smudging everywhere). And the last thing you need is a ton of refund requests to deal with.  Your printer will also want to know the weight of the paper you want on your cover and whether you want a matt or gloss finish  Most printers will be happy to advise you and/or send through paper samples. It’s important to touch/feel the paper yourself before you get anything printed. I’d also suggest buying some different planners so you can compare size, binding and layout plus how easy they are to use.  There are instructions on how to create a flatplan for your planner (and flatplan templates), a checklist of information you need to supply a printer with in order to get a quote and a list of all the printing terminology you need to know in my online masterclass on how to launch a planner for your industry.  Step 4: Calculate your pricing  Having mapped out the content of your planner and worked out your print specifications, you can start to gather printing quotes for your planner. I’d suggest getting at least three so you can compare.  While it may be tempting to outsource your printing overseas this may not be the best practical solution. While it can be cheaper, if there is a problem with the printing, it’s much more difficult to fix if your printer is in China. This is definitely something to bear in mind if you want to launch a seasonal planner i.e. one that runs from January to January. Not only will you need to allow an additional time for the initial print and delivery, if you are unhappy with any aspect of the printing, it could take weeks (or even months) to fix. This is not to say it is a bad idea, but for your first planner it may be best to stay local. Once you have some printing quotes, you can estimate how much it will cost you to produce each copy of your planner. Then, based on how much profit you want to make (and research on similar products on the market) you can decide on the price of your planner.   When costing out your planner, remember you also need to include things like: Packaging (and postage, although you may want to add this on to each order) Fulfilment i.e. getting the planner packaged up and sent out  Stripe/PayPal fees Design  Proofreading and editing  Marketing  Your own time  There is a comprehensive list of the costs you need to consider in my online masterclass on how to launch a planner for your industry. If you don’t want the hassle of organising your own printing, there is the option of using a print-on-demand service like Createspace, Lulu or Ingram Spark. With this option, you upload your artwork file for your planner to their website and, every time someone orders a copy, it is printed and sent to them. This cuts down on packaging and fulfilment costs, but you will still need to pay for design, editing and proofreading.  While print-on-demand is often less expensive per copy, you also have less control over the process.  So if something goes wrong, it can be much more difficult to fix. Many people mistakenly think that using a large, established platform means you have a ready made audience to buy their planner. This couldn’t be further from the truth. You will still need to work really hard to market your planner.  There is a detailed comparison of DIY printing versus print-on-demand in my online masterclass on how to launch a planner for your industry.  Step 5: Do an audience audit Remember that most online sales convert at just 1-2%, so if you’re hoping to sell hundreds or thousands of copies of your planner, you will need a large enough audience to sell to. You can use my audience calculator to see if you have enough people in your audience right now to make your target sales.  If you don’t have a big enough audience, you have two choices. You can either focus on building your online audience to the size you need to launch a planner. This may take at least a year but could save you a lot of time and money in the long run. Here’s how to build an audience.  Or you can explore the idea of doing a short print run to test your idea. This will almost certainly reduce your profit, as shorter print runs are generally more expensive. But it will also reduce the risk of you making a loss on your planner (and ending up with a stack of planners gathering dust in your loft/garage). At this stage, you should also ask yourself some tough questions about whether you have the authority to launch a planner on your chosen topic. For example, if you want to launch a planner for yoga teachers, but you’re currently working in banking, you may find you don’t have the credibility to make enough sales. In this case, it would be better to spend some time building your audience before launching a planner.  Step 6: Create a test offer You can carry out tons of research, but won’t know for sure if anyone wants to buy your planner until you ask people to pay you money for it.  This is why I believe you shouldn’t print your planner until you have made enough sales to at least break even.  Instead, create a test offer. This is where you get a designer to create an image of your diary, create a simple landing page (a web page where people can only do one thing i.e. order your diary) and invite people to pre-order their planner at a reduced cost on the understanding that they may need to wait a bit longer for their planner.  I use Leadpages for building landing pages. Step 7: Pitch your test offer Once your test offer is ready and you have worked out your ‘break even’ figure, you can reach out to your hottest leads and offer them the chance to purchase your planner at the pre-order price. I’d suggest making this a limited time offer. Your hottest leads are generally people you already have a relationship with i.e. those who are already working with you or have done in the past. As a result, high-touch strategies e.g. personal messages, voicemails and phone calls may be needed alongside automated emails and/or social media updates.  Step 8: Hire your designer and printer Once you’ve hit your ‘break even’ point, it’s time to hire your designer and printer to create your planner. For design, I’d recommend getting recommendations from friends, family and colleagues. Ideally, you should work with someone who has worked on similar projects and has a background in book/magazine publishing.  Step 9: Create your launch plan I’d suggest a 12 week run up to your official planner launch.  Month 1: Warm up your audience by starting conversations and getting feedback on the planner you’re hoping to launch (See Step 1).  Month 2: Focus on creating and launching your test offer  Month 3: Having gathered enough pre-orders to break even, you can sell your planner at the standard price leading up to an official launch date when you post out the planners.  Doing it in this way builds excitement and anticipation amongst your audience so that when their planner lands on their doormat they can’t wait to share pictures on social media.  This should give you around 6 weeks from your test offer to ‘make’ your planner. I wouldn’t recommend leaving it any longer or your audience might get fed up waiting for it.  Step 10: Launch  If you have followed all the steps set out here, at this point, you should be able to enjoy the results of your hard work and watch the sales drop into your inbox. Shownotes Who should listen to this podcast (3:06) How to find out if there is a market for your planner (4:05) Who do you know that will buy your planner? (08:25) How to decide on a topic for your planner (and what problem does it solve for your audience?)  (14:58) What you need to know before going to a printer (17:09) How to choose a printer (and why a local one is best) (24:22) Key costs to consider when working out how to price your planner (26:53) Pros and cons of printing yourself or using a print on demand service (31:37) Key points to consider when thinking about your buying audience (38:37) How to presell your planner before you create it (41:36) How to market and create a launch plan for your planner (48:20) Resources Masterclass: How to launch a planner for your industry Audience Calculator: Work out the audience size you need that you need with my audience calculator Graphic design with Canva Self publish with Amazon Create Space Self publish with Lulu  Self publish with IngramSpark [300] How to Build an audience and why you need to  (podcast)  [ 334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows (podcast) [335] How to create a high converting lead magnet (podcast) [339] How To Build An Audience for an Online Course or membership (podcast) [342] How To Build an Audience on YouTube with Jessica Dante (podcast)  [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast)  Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020Sorted Course: How to write social media posts that sell  Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary  Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn   The post [355] How to create and launch your own planner appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you like the idea of hosting a live event but worry you don’t have a big enough audience to sell enough tickets? Perhaps you’ve tried hosting a live event or workshop but struggled to get enough bums on seats? If any of this sounds familiar you’ll love this podcast interview with business coach and Expert Empires founder Nick James. He fills large conference spaces with up to 1400 delegates and, in this episode, he shares practical tips and tactics on selling out your first live event, including how to identify the people who are most likely to attend your event (plus how to get them to buy a ticket). He also talks about how to find joint venture partners i.e. people who have a similar audience to you who are willing to sell tickets on your behalf. Plus he shares bonus tips on how to land speaking gigs at other peoples’ events. Nick relies heavily on email marketing and text messaging to promote his own live events, so you might be surprised at some of the advice he shares in this episode. But it is some of the best (and most honest) advice I’ve ever heard on this topic. He shares some priceless advice on building relationships in your industry (and why you need to). {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} How to fill live events If you’re interested in running your own live events, Nick’s advice is to start small but think big. “In my experience, people dramatically overestimate what they can achieve in a year, but underestimate what they can achieve in ten,” he says. So instead of starting with an event for hundreds of people, try putting on a small event for just 10 to 15 people. As you get more experienced, you can always go bigger. He speaks from personal experience; just eight people attended his first event in 2009. A more recent event attracted over 1400 delegates. When it comes to filling your first event (or an online course or programme) it’s always best to start with your hottest leads. These are generally people you know - those you’re working with right now or have done in the past. Which means personal outreach is likely to be far more effective than social media or email marketing. And the more personalised the better. That’s why Nick favours picking up the phone, sending a WhatsApp message or a voicemail message on social media over email. In fact, if you need to fill an event or programme - and do it quickly - be believes email should be your last resort. Nick uses both email marketing and text messaging in his marketing, but he still believes that personal outreach is the most effective way to fill an event or programme - particularly when you’re starting out and/or need to bring money into your business quickly. “Generally speaking, observe the masses and do the opposite,” he says. “What everyone else is doing is sending blanket messages and emails. So, doing something like a voice note...will instantly make you stand out.” If you’re worried sending personal messages will make you look desperate it’s probably because that’s how you feel. Which is all the more reason to invest time in personal outreach, as this is far more likely to bring money into your business quickly. Strategies like social media and email marketing are effective but typically take much longer to generate leads and sales. “It’s far too easy to hide behind your laptop,” says Nick. “You post can post loads of content, and videos out on Facebook, and LinkedIn, and that’s all very nice…but if it isn’t actually getting anywhere you need to change what you’re doing.” How to use joint ventures to sell out your live event Teaming up with people who already have an audience you’d like to get in front of  - otherwise known as ‘joint ventures’ - can be a great way to sell out events, courses and online programmes when you’re just starting out. But there is a right and a wrong way to approach joint ventures, says Nick. First off, a joint venture has to offer a fair exchange of value for both parties. So if you’re just starting out in your business, approaching someone with a massive audience and asking them to promote your products/services is unlikely to be an effective strategy. Nick suggests starting with existing relationships. Who do you know who already has your audience, or has people in their audience that would be a good fit for you or products or services? What could you offer them that would represent a fair exchange of value for introducing you to their audience? It’s worth remembering that for someone who already has an audience, money (offering affiliate payments for example) may not be enough. You have to ask yourself why they would promote your products/services when they could be promoting their own (and making more money for doing so).  This is why there is no substitute for relationship building before you even thinking about launching an event or programme. “There really is no substitute for good, old-fashioned relationship-building,” says Nick Time in the saddle, building your reputation, building those connections over a long period of time.” The first question he asks any prospective affiliate/joint venture partner is ‘how can I help you?’ - rather than the other way round. How to land speaking opportunities If you’re interested in speaking at other peoples’ events, relationships are equally as important, says Nick. He is frequently approached by people he has no prior relationship with asking if they can speak at his events. "And I’m like...well, okay. So, I've just spent £200 000 on this event, and now you want to come, and speak on my stage. And what exactly is it that you're doing for me?" Because I'm spending a fortune here, and I'm putting a lot of my time, and energy, and my team's resources into doing this event.” For Nick, it all comes down to relationships. If you want to speak at a particular event or attract a particular joint venture partner, start by thinking about what you can do for them. This might include: Buying a ticket to their event so you can meet them in person and get a feel for the event (it also shows you have skin in the game) Investing in one of their products/services Inviting them onto your podcast/Youtube channel - so they can benefit from getting in front of your audience Spreading the word about them on social media And relationships win over money every single time, he says. “There are plenty of people that I would happily JV [joint venture] with, promote their products and services, for zero financial gain for me. And then there are more people that I would never promote, even with financial gain. So, it doesn't come down to the commercial deal... the relationships will outweigh the commercial value of the partnership every single time.” Podcast shownotes Nick's business story (02:52) Where to start with live events and why you should start small (5:19) How to fill a live workshop or event (and why personal outreach is the best way) (9:08) Attendees (15:43) How to find the hottest leads for your events and stop hiding behind your laptop (18:53) Tactics for building relationships for event joint ventures (22:58)  Why good old fashioned relationships are your biggest asset  (25:25) The first question to ask when approaching a partner for a joint venture (29:33) How relationships are key for choosing speakers and sponsors at your event (32:32) Why the success of an event stems from good relationships (36:28) Resources Nick’s website Seriously Fun Business Nick James Expert Empires Facebook Nick James LinkedIn[300] How to Build an audience and why you need to  (podcast)  [ 334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows  (podcast)  [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast)  How I chose the speakers for build your audience live  (blog post) How to add captions to your video using Kapwing and Rev.com (blog post)Buy your ticket to my 2020 Content Planning Masterclass #2020SortedFind out more about my Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook  Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn The post [354] How To Sell Out A Live Event Or Workshop (Even If You Have A Tiny Audience) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you using Instagram Stories as part of your social media marketing strategy? Or maybe you're publishing stories but feel unsure how to turn them into sales ? If you're keen to get to grips with Instagram as a tool for your business (and make it more than just a fun place to hang out, post photos and scroll through dreamy images of holiday destinations), you’ll love this podcast interview with Tyler McCall - an Instagram expert who teaches entrepreneurs to build their online communities through Instagram. We discuss the latest Instagram and Instagram Stories strategies you can use to grow your audience and sales. {Click on the player above to listen to the podcast episode and/or read on for a detailed overview. Scroll down to the bottom to read the show notes including all the links mentioned in this episode} About Tyler McCall Tyler McCall started out in marketing for non-profit organisations. After developing a boutique social media agency as a side hustle, he fell in love with Instagram. Now he teaches entrepreneurs to build their online communities through Instagram. He’s particularly fond of Instagram Stories, where he can often be found in Target or on road trips. Understanding your ideal customer (and why it’s vital for Instagram growth) Back in 2016, Tyler had just a few thousand followers on his Instagram account. When he saw the kind of results his clients were getting with his Instagram growth strategies, he decided to apply them to his own account. Since then he’s grown his own following to over 30k. If you’re looking to grow your following on Instagram, the worst thing you can do is focus on the numbers. What really matters is whether you’re attracting engagement, leads and sales from your ideal clients - and you don’t necessarily need a large following to do that. Tyler points to the recent example of Instagram Arianna Renee who has 2 million followers but was unable to sell 36 t-shirts for a new product line she was launching. He tells students inside his membership community the Follower to Fan Society that he would rather they have a small, engaged following - who will actually buy from them - than a massive one who don’t want what they are trying to sell. "If you can't even get the 10 people, or 100 people, or 1,000 people who follow you right now to buy your stuff, what makes you think that having 10,000 or 100,000 followers is the solution to that problem?" he says. The most important part is getting clear on the type of person you’d like to follow you - and that person must be someone who would actually purchase your products or book your services (or knows people who would). It’s not enough to think about their age, location and income, you have to understand their hopes, dreams, fears and desires, says Tyler. That way, you’ll be able to create high-quality content that really resonates with them. Some people get stuck at this point - especially if they have the type of product/service that people only buy once. But Tyler thinks this is short-sighted. If you take the example of a wedding professional, for example, it’s tempting to think you can only capture buyers who are getting married (or thinking about it). But everyone knows someone who is getting married, so if you target your ideal customer and people who are like them (but aren’t necessarily getting married right now) you’re immediately casting your net wider. How to attract your ideal followers It’s easy to look at Instagram educators who have tons of followers and think it’s easy. All you have to do is post pretty photos, with great captions and a bunch of hashtags and your following will grow. But many of these experts grew their accounts a few years’ back when these strategies worked. But things have changed on the platform. Once you’ve established who you’d like to attract on Instagram, you can’t just sit around and wait for the right kind of followers to find you. You have to go out and find them, says Tyler. He suggests checking out your competitors’ accounts to see who is following them, then checking out those peoples’ profiles and engaging with them there. All of this takes time, but will help you grow your following more successfully - and make sales - in the long run. What kind of content you should be posting on Instagram Recent changes to the Instagram algorithm mean one post now lasts three or four days. This means you can get away with posting just a few times a week on your grid - and post on Instagram Stories every single day. While there are no hard and fast rules about what to post to get engagement, Tyler recommends creating content that inspires, educates and/or entertains your audience. You should be prepared to test your content to see what is of interest to your audience and not get attached to the results. This means being okay with posting content that may totally flop or bomb. Test different types of photos, captions, videos, quotes, memes and track the engagement. If you have a product-based business, Tyler recommends making your account a place for your followers to ‘escape’. This means building a following around a vibe or intention rather than a ‘hey look, do you want to buy this thing?’ This is particularly true for product-based businesses who can get stuck in a rut of simply posting photos of their product. “It could be a moment of beauty, a moment of humour, it's a moment of inspiration...it's making them [your followers] think differently,” he says. He also suggests product-based businesses think about how they can inject a human element into their photos. “Show someone interacting with the product. Show someone using the product. Those subtle shifts in the content you create can make a huge difference for the value of the content for your followers, and it can also sell more, because people then understand the product itself and how they can actually use the product.” How to create great content for Instagram Stories The first thing you need to understand about Stories is that they are not generally about attracting new followers - they are connecting with and converting your current followers. So, there's not going to be much you can do using stories to grow your following. So if you want to get your current followers to watch your stories, you need to make sure you are directing them there from your grid. So a great way to do this  for a product-based business, for example, might be posting the finished product in your feed, and then saying in your caption, "If you want to see how this product is made, go watch my Instagram story today." Then share the creation process in your story. Because stories disappear after 24 hours, you may need to go back and edit the caption later. All great stories have a beginning, a middle and an end - and Instagram Stories is no different, says Tyler. So let people know what they are going to see first, take them on the journey with you and wrap it up at the end with a clear call-to-action. This doesn’t necessarily mean posting your story all in one go (in fact, adding to your story throughout the day can help boost your engagement on Instagram). But posting three or different ‘storylines’ within a 24 hour period can work well. Make sure you diversify your stories with a variety of content e.g. photos, talking head videos, graphics, text on screen. This will help hold your audiences’ interest. And keep them interactive by asking questions and/or using the polling function, slider poll or quiz feature. The more you can get your viewers to talk back to you, the better your engagement (and sales) will be. “If you can strive to create a relationship and connection with people that's not rooted in your desire to monetise that relationship. Instead, it's rooted in your desire to just genuinely connect with those people, and that's really what makes all the difference in marketing on Instagram nowadays,” he says. Get into the habit of giving at least one call-to-action that invites people to DM you, says Tyler.  If you can make it “easy and natural” for your audience to talk to you, that’s when you’ll start to make sales.  If you can get your audience used to chatting to you over direct message about your latest road trip, or visit to Target, when you do put up a post inviting people to book a discovery call, buy your product or sign up for your new programme, it will be far easier for them to reach out and make a purchase. Many people worry that their life is too boring for Instagram Stories. If you feel like that, you can use stories to ask your followers to tell you about their lives. “Learn more about them, who they are, why they came to you,” he says. You may find some stuff there that will be really surprising to you - for example, they really enjoyed a picture or story you shared about your family or a holiday - which will give you confidence that your life is interesting enough. Ideas for Instagram Stories A day in the life (a behind-the-scenes account of your day How I Made This (can be anything from a product to a set of coaching materials) Tour - give people a tour of your office/studio Tools/kit (Tyler has had great success showing his followers the tools he uses to record the classes for his membership) How to make sales on Instagram Stories Tyler has “story after story” of clients who are generating fantastic income via their Instagram Stories, with sales being made through direct messages. These include a member who landed a $25,000 social media contract from one DM and another who paid off $50,000 in credit card debt by selling her art through Instagram direct messages. “It’s proof that if you know who you're talking to, what you're saying to them, and how to engage with them... if you have those three things figured out, then anything's possible for you on Instagram,” he says. How to track your success on Instagram Stories He advises measuring two key metrics: retention (i.e. how long people are sticking with your story, rather than moving onto the next one) and the number of direct message you’re getting. Adding captions can be a great way to increase engagement (remember most people will be watching on their phone, with the sound turned down). You can either type captions onto your story or, if you’re speaking directly to camera, use a tool like Kapwing to burn them directly onto your video. Find out how to use Rev and Kapwing to burn captions onto your social media videos. Podcast Shownotes Tyler's business story (05:19) The key things to grow your followers and engagement on Instagram (09:22) Why you don’t need more followers on Instagram to get more sales (12:26) Why getting engagement on Instagram isn’t about the visuals and hashtags anymore (16:31) Why intentional engagement is key to growing your Instagram followers (17:55) Why old Instagram strategies are outdated and no longer effective (20:20) What you should think about when creating content for your audience on Instagram (23:45) How you can use Instagram Stories to build connections and make sales (30:47) Why you won’t need to sell anymore if you nail your Instagram Stories (38:10) How to get your followers to watch your Instagram Story and what to post (43:08) Resources Tyler McCall Instagram Tyler McCall Website | Free Instagram MasterclassGet your ticket for 2020Sorted[348] How to write social media posts that sell (podcast episode) [346] How to look and feel more confident on live video with Ian Anderson Grey (podcast episode) [343] The three audiences you must build to create a successful online business (podcast episode) How to add captions to your video using Kapwing and Rev.com (blog post) Build Your Audience Programme Order your 2019 Media Diary Rev.com* Kapwing Social Media Video Engagement Playbook Social Media Engagement Playbook LinkedIn Content Strategy Playbook Connect with me on Twitter, Instagram, Facebook and LinkedIn The post [353] How to grow your audience through Instagram Stories with Tyler McCall appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you like to make more sales in your Facebook group but are worried about annoying your members? If this sounds like you, you’ll love this podcast episode on how to sell in your Facebook group - without appearing pushy or ‘selly’. Whether you’re just starting your Facebook group (or are thinking about it) or... READ MORE The post (352) How to sell in a Facebook group (without annoying your members) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you like the idea of working with corporate clients but feel unsure how to get started? Perhaps you've heard it's difficult to break into the corporate world or that these type of clients take too long to make decisions. Or maybe you feel like you can't make a big enough difference in the world... READ MORE The post [351] How to get corporate clients (and why you should) with Dylis Guyan appeared first on Janet Murray.

Hypnotist Rob and mind reader Kennedy had successful stage careers before turning their attention to helping others build entertainment businesses through online courses/membership sites.  When they started using surveys to find out what products/services their ideal clients wanted, they discovered something surprising. People were much more likely to buy their products/services if they were offered... READ MORE The post [350] How to use surveys to increase your online sales with Rob and Kennedy appeared first on Janet Murray.

You may think niching down is a bad idea because specialising in a very specific topic, service and/or type of client will mean you’ll lose out on business. Actually the opposite is true. Focusing on a tight niche will help you earn more money and attract better opportunities in your business. But how do you... READ MORE The post [349] How to find the right niche for your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you ever see those clever social media posts that really grab your attention? Perhaps they tell a compelling personal story or use language in a really sit-up-and-take-notice kind of way? Or maybe the writer is just really good at asking questions? You can’t quite put your finger on what/how they do it…but you find... READ MORE The post [348] How to write social media posts that sell appeared first on Janet Murray.

Experts predict that by the end of 2019, 80% of the content we consume online will be video. So if video isn’t part of your social media strategy, you could be missing a trick. But what kind of videos should you be posting on social media? How long should your videos be? And can you... READ MORE The post [347] How to create engaging social media videos (even if you hate being on camera) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you love to do more live video to promote your business but find perfectionism holds you back? Perhaps you’re worried about making mistakes or looking stupid in front of your friends or colleagues. Or maybe you find yourself making endless excuses not to go live - like telling yourself you don’t have the right... READ MORE The post [346] How to look and feel more confident on live video with Ian Anderson Gray appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you frustrated by the lack of engagement with your social media content?   You’re publishing content regularly, but your posts aren’t attracting enough likes, comments and shares - leaving you wondering if it’s worth bothering with social media at all.   If this sounds like you, the first thing you need to know is... READ MORE The post [345] How to increase your social media engagement - fast appeared first on Janet Murray.

Is your Facebook group taking up all your time but not making you any sales in your business? In this episode, I talk to Gordon Burcham, Martial Arts School Owner and Multi World Kickboxing Champion about how he is generating a six figure income from a Facebook group. He also shares the remarkable story of... READ MORE The post [344] How to build your audience through a Facebook group appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you feeling frustrated because you're trying to build your online audience...but you still don't have enough clients? While activities like social media marketing, blogging and building your email list are brilliant for attracting cold leads (i.e. people who don't know about you yet), research consistently shows that most people need at least 7 or... READ MORE The post [343] The three audiences you must build to create a profitable online business appeared first on Janet Murray.

YouTube is the second largest search engine after Google. So if you want to get in front of a large audience, having a Youtube channel can be a smart move. But if you’re not familiar with the platform, the practicalities of setting up a channel, deciding what kind of content you should be creating and... READ MORE The post [342] How to build your audience on YouTube with Jessica Dante appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you want to attract more of the right clients? Storytelling is one of the most powerful ways to build an audience and to establish trust and credibility. But many people either lack confidence in their storytelling ability or are scared of revealing too much of themselves. In this episode, I talk to story coach... READ MORE The post [341] How to use stories to attract your ideal clients with Marsha Shandur appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you offer coaching, consultancy and training and find yourself spending hours creating bespoke proposals every time a prospective client gets in touch?   Or perhaps you’d like to offer some kind of coaching, consultancy or training but you’re not sure what you should be offering and you keep procrastinating about it and never actually... READ MORE The post [340] How to create a coaching or consultancy package for your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’ve already tried to create your own course or membership programme you’ll know that it’s not a simple case of ‘build it and they will come’. In this episode, I share the reasons why you must build an audience before you launch an online course or membership site. I also break down the steps... READ MORE The post [339] How to build an audience for an online course or membership appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you scared of selling? Are you crippled by nerves when it comes to pitching for new business or asking for the sale? In this episode, sales expert Marcus Cauchi gives practical advice on overcoming your fears using tried and tested techniques that will allow you to make sales naturally and authentically. {Click on the... READ MORE The post [338] Why you feel scared of selling (and what to do about it) appeared first on Janet Murray.

When you're doing business online, the more tasks you can automate, the more time you have to serve your customers/clients. Plus you'll be able to build your audience quicker.  In this episode I share the tools I use every day in my business that save me tons of time, including everything from email marketing and... READ MORE The post [337] The tools I am using to build my online audience appeared first on Janet Murray.

You think you’re doing all the right things to build a successful business blog. You’re showing up every week, you spend ages researching, writing and promoting, but it’s not making you any money. In this episode, I break down the steps you need to take to create strategic blog content that people actually want to... READ MORE The post [336] How to make sales from your business blog appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to attract leads and sales for your business, you need an email list. But in a time when most of us are overwhelmed with information, inviting people to sign up for your lead magnet is not enough. In this episode, I break down the steps you need to take to create a... READ MORE The post [335] How to create a high-converting lead magnet appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you trying to grow your audience but don’t have the funds for paid advertising?  Or are you feeling fed-up with forking out on ads which aren’t bringing you a good return on investment? In this episode, Callie Willows from The Membership Guys, shares practical tips on how to grow your audience through content marketing,... READ MORE The post [334] How to build a large audience without paid advertising with Callie Willows appeared first on Janet Murray.

In January 2019, I launched a new online course How To Write Awesome Sales Copy which generated £20k in sales. It was a fairly relaxed launch, based around my six-part launch sequence (available as part of the course) and a handful of social media posts. The launch represented less than 50% of my monthly sales... READ MORE The post [333] 39 Surprisingly easy ways to increase your email subscribers appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you on LinkedIn but struggling to makes enough sales?  Find out how you can start making the connections you need, from ensuring your profile leaves a great first impression to how to create engaging content that attracts (and converts) the right customers with LinkedIn expert, Sam Rathling. {Click on the player above to listen... READ MORE The post [332] How to make sales on LinkedIn with Sam Rathling appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you struggling to build your audience right now?  John Lee Dumas, host of the Entrepreneurs on Fire podcast, tells all in this episode about how he built his business from the bottom up, including how niching down helped him stand out from his competition PLUS the most important thing you need to do to... READ MORE The post [331] What it really takes to build an audience with John Lee Dumas appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to write sales copy for your business? In this  podcast episode I share practical tactics for writing sales copy in your business including sales pages, marketing emails, Facebook ads and more. And I share the frameworks I use in my own business to help me write awesome sales copy - and do... READ MORE The post [330] How to write awesome sales copy for your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

https://youtu.be/vqOJ-T0jLUA Do you feel like Facebook is constantly changing and you can’t keep up? In this podcast episode, Facebook ads specialist Liz Melville shares her thoughts on what’s working on Facebook right now, including whether we should ditch free Facebook groups, why the algorithm isn’t to blame for poor engagement on your content, plus what... READ MORE The post [329] What’s working on Facebook right now with Liz Melville appeared first on Janet Murray.

Want to make more money in your business in 2019? Then you need to start tracking key marketing metrics in your business. But which numbers should you be monitoring and how often? In this podcast episode, I share the three numbers you must focus on to grow your business in 2019. {Click on the player... READ MORE The post [328] The three numbers you should focus on in your business in 2019 appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’ve been following me for a while you’ll know that my large Facebook group (with over 13.5k members) has been a huge part of growing my business in the last four years.  Want to know why I’m shutting it down?  Listen to this podcast to find out, PLUS other big changes I’ll be making... READ MORE The post [327] Why I’m closing my 13.5k Facebook group (and other changes I’m making in 2019) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you want to generate passive income for your business in 2019?  Listen to this podcast to find out the one thing you should be doing to help achieve this goal, including some practical advice on the ‘magic numbers’ you need to know to help you reach your sales targets. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [326] The one thing you need to generate passive income for your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you feel like you spend all your time on social media but never actually make any sales? In this podcast episode I share three different content ideas that are guaranteed to help you start making money today. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why you need to actively tell people your products are... READ MORE The post [325] Three social media posts that will help you generate sales today appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this special edition of my podcast, I share a brilliant session from my recent event, Content Live, in which Dan Knowlton, a digital marketing expert, shares practical tips and strategies on how you can use video in your business to attract and convert more customers. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why video... READ MORE The post [324] How to stop talking about video and actually do it with Dan Knowlton appeared first on Janet Murray.

Bronte Huskinson, an author, self-taught photographer and content creator has over 54k followers on her Instagram account which has now become her main source of income. Find out how you can grow your audience on Instagram whether you’re a service or product based business, plus get tips on how to use influencers to market your... READ MORE The post [323] Creative Instagram marketing strategies with Bronte Huskinson appeared first on Janet Murray.

Creating a content plan for 2019 will not only help you to create consistent, high-quality content regularly, but it will also help you save time, build your audience and make more sales in your business. In this episode, I share practical tips on how to create a content plan for 2019, including examples of the... READ MORE The post [322] How to create a content plan for your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Andy Crestodina is an experienced content and ethical digital marketing expert who has helped thousands of businesses get better results online.  In this episode he shares his top tips on getting more people to read your blog, how to make your content rank higher in search engines and why collaboration is the key to growing... READ MORE The post [321] How to get people to actually read your blog with Andy Crestodina appeared first on Janet Murray.

Using Facebook Live to sell your products in the run up to Christmas can be a great way of standing out from your competitors - giving your customers a chance to see the person behind the brand and ask any questions they have there and then.  Listen to this episode for my top ten tips... READ MORE The post [320] How to host a Christmas sale on Facebook Live appeared first on Janet Murray.

Pinterest is the second biggest search engine after Google. Which means,  if used correctly, it can be a massive game changer when it comes to getting more eyes on your content.  In this episode Eve Tokens shares practical tips on how to use Pinterest for your business including how she has helped me improve traffic... READ MORE The post [319] Why you should be using Pinterest in 2019 (plus how to do it) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you looking to ace your content strategy next year and get 2019 sorted?  Listen to this special review episode where I share some of the biggest takeaways from my recent live event, Content Live, including practical tips and strategies on how you can plan and create engaging content in 2019. Here’s what you’ll learn... READ MORE The post [318] How to ace your content strategy in 2019 (review of Content Live) appeared first on Janet Murray.

[WARNING! PLEASE DON'T LISTEN TO THIS EPISODE WITH YOUNG CHILDREN IN THE ROOM!!!] Launching a new product or service too quickly can lead to mistakes, overspending and failing to make the impact you desired.  Listen to this transformation episode with Amanda Overend, who shares how she successfully launched her new product, in time for Christmas,... READ MORE The post [317] How to launch a new product or service - fast! With Amanda Overend appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you want your business to accelerate in 2019?  Maybe you’ve considered joining a mastermind group or hiring a business coach but don’t know where to start? In this episode I share my five top tips on how to hire a business coach and how working with a business coach has helped transform my business.... READ MORE The post [316] How I chose my business coach (and how to choose yours) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Hear the tables being turned in this surprisingly revealing episode, as J. Nichole Smith, a branding expert, challenges me on my brand statement and what language I should be using to have a more impactful message. Nichole also shares some of the fears that are holding people back from creating a successful brand as well... READ MORE The post [315] How to create a brand statement (and why you need to) with J. Nichole Smith appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you struggling to create consistent content or finding you just don’t have the time? In this episode I share time-saving tips to help your content go further - from turning a blog post into a slideshare presentation to transforming a keynote talk into a podcast episode and a Twitter chat. Here’s what you’ll learn... READ MORE The post [314] Repurposing hacks for busy business owners appeared first on Janet Murray.

Have you built up an audience of people who won’t buy from you?  Or do you feel the fear when it comes to selling to them? In this on-air coaching episode with sustainability expert, Jen Gale, I share helpful tips on how to start conversations with your audience on pricing and sales, dealing with objections,... READ MORE The post [313] On-Air Coaching: How do I sell to an audience that isn't used to being sold to? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Whatever you think of Black Friday, the consumer stats show that it cannot be ignored.  Here are some practical tips on how to make the most of Black Friday -  including what to offer, how to plan your event/sale and how to promote it to your audience. If you want to listen to the podcast... READ MORE The post [312] 10 marketing ideas for Black Friday appeared first on Janet Murray.

Want to earn money while you’re on holiday? That’s exactly what Lisa Johnson, founder of two successful wedding businesses and passive income expert does.  In this episode, she explains what passive income is, what you need to do to earn money whilst you sleep plus why building an audience is vital if you want to... READ MORE The post [311] How to generate passive income in your business with Lisa Johnson appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to come up with daily content to engage with your audience and ultimately make sales? From dogs in hairdressers to comments made by strangers at a speaking event - find out how everything can be turned into a content opportunity with these practical marketing tips. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode:... READ MORE The post [310] Four types of marketing content that will make you sales appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you launching a new product, service or marketing campaign and want it to go viral on Twitter? Listen to this episode to find out how Kerry Jordan, a dog photographer, launched the National Dog Photographer’s Awareness Day, made it go viral on Twitter - and get picked up by national newspapers. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [309] How to go viral on Twitter with Kerry Jordan appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you like to be more consistent with your content in 2019? In this episode, I share how creating a media calendar could help you become more effective at planning and creating content for your blog/vlog (if you have one), email marketing and social media - and help you get featured in the press. Here’s... READ MORE The post [308] How to create a media calendar for 2019 (and why you need to) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Exhibiting at a trade show can be a great way to get your business in front of your ideal customers or clients. But how do you know if it’s the right marketing strategy for your business? And if you do decide to exhibit at a trade show, how can you ensure you get a return... READ MORE The post [307] Should you exhibit at a trade show? With Kate Hills appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you find it difficult to market your business at Christmas?  Or have you got so many ideas you don’t know where to start? In this episode, I share helpful tips on how to come up with great content ideas that will give value to your audience and make sales in your business (plus some... READ MORE The post [306] Christmas content ideas for busy business owners appeared first on Janet Murray.

Publishing a regular blog can help you build your audience, gain trust and stand out as an authority in your field.  But how do you decide what to blog about? In this on-air coaching episode, I share practical tips and strategies with business coach Gemma Stow on how to find out what your audience needs... READ MORE The post [305] On-Air Coaching: What should I blog about? With Gemma Stow appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you super organised and schedule your content in advance, or do you fly by the seat of your pants, and create content on-the-go when inspiration strikes? In this episode, I share the three different types of marketer, the advantages and disadvantages of each style, and how knowing which type you are can help you... READ MORE The post [304] What’s your marketing style (and why it matters)? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you offer coaching or consulting to clients and wonder how you can scale up your business? In this episode I help Kirsty Carden, a successful business coach, with practical tips and strategies on how to launch a paid membership community, how to use social media to get people onto a waiting list, and how... READ MORE The post [303] On-Air Coaching: How do I pivot from serving a small number of clients to a membership model? with Kirsty Carden appeared first on Janet Murray.

During my recent FREE sales challenge, participants made a staggering 56k in sales - making this one of my most successful online challenges yet.  Want to know all the details? In this episode, I share behind-the-scenes from the challenge, including which social media platforms sent me the most referrals, why my Facebook ads tanked -... READ MORE The post [302] How we generated 56k in 10 days (Sales Challenge debrief) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Academic coach Lucy Parsons started her business four years ago and has seen her revenue grow from just £10 a week to over 50k a year. In this episode, Lucy - who is part of my membership community - the Love Marketing Membership - shares how she has gained fantastic press coverage for her business,... READ MORE The post [301] What it really takes to build an online business with Lucy Parsons appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this celebratory 300th episode, I look back at what I’ve learned over the last five years of business and share practical tips on how to grow your audience including why it’s important, what to do when something goes wrong, and why investing in training is essential for your business growth and development. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [300] How to build an audience (and why you need to) appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to make more sales in your business, you need to be prepared to sell every day. Fact. But selling everyday doesn’t mean constantly pushing your products or services onto people.  There are multiple ways you can get your products/services in front of prospective customers/clients - without being spammy/selly.  In the episode, I... READ MORE The post [299] How to sell everyday (without being a pain in the ass) appeared first on Janet Murray.

How many times have you booked a dental appointment because your dentist sent you a reminder? Or eaten at a restaurant because a voucher code landed in your inbox at exactly the right time? I bet you didn’t think it was scammy/selly. You were probably grateful for the reminder. So why do we feel  awkward... READ MORE The post [298] How to turn browsers into buyers appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you find it difficult to sell through social media?  You’re not alone. In this episode, I explain how to use social media to start conversations about your product or service that will help you generate leads (plus how to convert those leads into sales). [IMPORTANT NOTE] This episode is part of a week-long sales... READ MORE The post [297] How to sell your products or services on social media appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you need to generate income in your  business - fast?!  Approaching customers who have previously bought from you is one of the most efficient (and often most underused) way of generating sales. In this episode I share strategies you can use to make sales from your hottest leads - and do it fast. [IMPORTANT... READ MORE The post [296] How to generate sales in your business - fast! appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re struggling to make sales, it’s likely you’re focusing your marketing efforts on the people who are least likely to buy from you (i.e. your cold leads). That’s why it’s important to go back to basics and ‘prospect’ your leads. In this episode I’ll show you how to identify your hottest leads, so you... READ MORE The post [295] How to prospect your leads appeared first on Janet Murray.

Earlier this year, luxury handbag designer, Jennifer Hamley, was ready to give up on her business.  But after attending one of my live events, she made a radical shift in her marketing strategy - and quadrupled her income. In this episode she shares how Facebook Live has transformed her business - in just seven days.... READ MORE The post [294] How to quadruple your income in seven days with Jennifer Hamley appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you think scarcity marketing is spammy? Is it something you’ve been too afraid to try in case it puts off prospective customers/clients? In this episode, I explain how I use scarcity marketing in my own business and why - far from being spammy/selly - using scarcity in your marketing can help you give your... READ MORE The post [293] Should you use scarcity in your marketing? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Have you heard of messenger bots and wondered what they are, or how they can help your business? In this episode, expert Kelly Noble Mirabella, shares how you can get started with chatbots, including the best tools to use, how to build your subscriber list, and how you can use them effectively to make sales... READ MORE The post [292] How to get started with messenger bots with Kelly Noble Mirabella appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’d like to create passive income for your business, this episode may not be exactly what you were hoping to hear - but it’s essential that you listen. In this episode, I share tips on how to bring more passive income into your business, including how to build your authority through content (and why... READ MORE The post [291] The truth about passive income appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you sell your products or services to different audiences?  Is this getting you confused about your marketing as you don’t know who to focus on and where? In this on-air coaching episode with career coach, Janine Esbrand, I share how to target varied audiences within your email and content marketing, the importance of keeping... READ MORE The post [290] On-Air Coaching: How do I speak to two different audiences in my email marketing? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Speaking at live events can be a great way to attract clients and customers.  But how do you get booked as a speaker - particularly when you’re just starting out?  What kind of experience are event organisers looking for?  And what the best ways to get noticed? In this episode I share how I chose... READ MORE The post [289] How to get booked as a speaker appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you like to try vlogging but have no idea how it will help you business?  Or are you intimidated by the technology involved? Listen to this information packed episode with Lisa Bean, full of helpful tips on how to create interesting and engaging footage using a smartphone, and why sharing your life behind-the-scenes will... READ MORE The post [288] How to get started with vlogging (and how it can help your business) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you like to start selling a premium service or product to create extra income in your business - such as a limited edition product or exclusive access to your expertise. In this episode, I share practical ideas on the premium offers you could create for your customers or clients - including how and why... READ MORE The post [287] How to create premium offers for your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you have an idea for a new product or service you would like to launch but don’t know how to get started? Listen to this latest on-air coaching episode with Ruth Oldfield from Coffee and Kin for practical tips on how to prepare for a product launch, including how to assess whether your business... READ MORE The post [286] On-Air Coaching: How do I get people to buy my product before it’s launched? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you feel like your brand needs a refresh? In this episode I share my tips and strategies on how to rebrand your business - including how to recognise the signs you’re ready for a rebrand, the steps you need to take to make it happen plus the potential consequences of leaving it too late.... READ MORE The post [285] How to rebrand your business (without losing customers) appeared first on Janet Murray.

I started every client consultation by saying: 'let's talk about your monthly income and annual income goals.' You'd be amazed how many business owners say they don't have any. In this episode, I talk to jewellery school owner Jessica Rose about the importance of tracking the numbers in your business - and how doing just... READ MORE The post [284] How to track the numbers in your business with Jessica Rose appeared first on Janet Murray.

I’ve recently started running pop-up meet ups in town and cities where I’m speaking/working. It’s helped me make a deeper connection with existing clients and generate 3.5k of new business (in a matter of weeks). In this episode, I share why meet ups are now part of my marketing strategy - along with practical tips... READ MORE The post [283] How meet ups can help you make sales in your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to think of what to include in your email newsletter?  Or do you spend so much time thinking about what to include, you never get round to writing one at all? Listen to this on-air coaching episode with Boutique Brownies owner, Heidi Wall,  for practical tips on how to create a newsletter... READ MORE The post [282] On-Air Coaching: What should I include in my email newsletter? with Heidi Wall appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to attract new customers or clients?  In this episode I break down the strategy I use to find new clients and customers - every single day. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How to define your ‘hot leads’ (3:35) How to define your ‘warm leads’ (8:55) How to define your ‘cold... READ MORE The post [281] How to find new customers or clients - fast! appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to grow your business, hiring a team is essential. But when is the right time to hire your first team member(s) and where should you be looking? How much should you expect to pay? And what happens if you make a hiring mistake? Mandy Hamerla is an HR expert who helps small... READ MORE The post [280] How to build your virtual dream team with Mandy Hamerla appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you fully booked every month but unsatisfied with your income at the end of it? Listen to this on-air coaching episode with accountant, Zoe Whitman, for some useful tips on building passive income streams and helping you earn more without increasing the hours you work. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Zoe’s business... READ MORE The post [279] On-Air Coaching: How do I create passive income in my service based business? with Zoe Whitman appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you interested in running a live event and want to find out how I organised my latest two-day event Media Influence Live? This episode is jam-packed with practical tips from how to choose your speakers, to how to structure your event and what you can do to add value for your delegates. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [278] Behind-the-scenes of my live event: Media Influence Live appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode, I explain what sales funnels are and how you can start building them (or improving the ones you have) to make more money in your business. I include examples from my own business (for both service and product-based offers), mistakes I’ve made with my own sales funnels (so you don’t have to... READ MORE The post [277] Sales funnels made simple appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to incorporate your personal story within your brand or business?  Sharing your personality with your audience is a fantastic way of building up trust and helping you stand out - but how do you know what to share? Listen to my on-air coaching session with Ali Ribchester, founder of Tutti Frutti Clothing,... READ MORE The post [276] On-Air Coaching: How to use your personal story to sell your products or services appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle with knowing what to include on your sales pages?  Or spend so long writing your sales copy it resembles a blog post and not the clear, pithy call-to-action you originally had in mind? Listen to this episode, as I coach Sarah Cooke through my simple, four-step process to writing effective sales copy,... READ MORE The post [275] On-Air Coaching: How to write awesome sales copy - fast! With Sarah Cooke appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you love to create an ebook or guide for your industry?  In this podcast, Aleisha McCormack, podcaster, producer and entrepreneur, explains how she created and marketed her popular Bridechilla Wedding Planning Survival and Field Guides, including some top tips on how to build your audience and juggle a business alongside a full time job.... READ MORE The post [274] How to create an ebook or guide for your industry with Aleisha McCormack appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you freeze when someone raises an objection to the product or service you are trying to sell? Listen to this episode for six practical tips that will help you handle sales objections successfully - from how to anticipate objections before they come up, to why you need to treat objections as ‘fears’ and welcome... READ MORE The post [273] How to handle sales objections appeared first on Janet Murray.

Susan McVea is an expert in helping people sell with ease, building up their client list person-to-person, without a big following or audience.  She has built her business from ZERO to 6 figures in 18 months, and in this episode, shares her tips and strategies from gaining your first client, to using Facebook groups effectively... READ MORE The post [272] How to get clients when you have no email list with Susan Mcvea appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to set your prices?  Are you unsure how to work out your profit margins and sales targets? In this episode, I offer four easy-to-follow steps that will help you set your prices successfully, no matter whether you’re a product or service based business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: The most... READ MORE The post [271] How to set your prices appeared first on Janet Murray.

Training others to deliver your services - or sell your products - is one of the quickest ways to scale your business. But when is the best time to expand? How do you build up your customer base base in other towns and cities? And what are the pitfalls of scaling your business - and... READ MORE The post [270] On-Air Coaching: How do I scale my business - fast? appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you run your own business you have to make decisions about what to sell. If you’re right at the start of your journey, this might be about working out your very first offer or product range. If you’re further along, it might be about deciding whether or not to introduce a new product or... READ MORE The post [269] Deciding what to sell (at any stage of your business) appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re looking to have conversations with prospective customers, LinkedIn is fast becoming one of the best social media platforms to do this – and that goes for both product and service based businesses. In this episode I share seven practical ways to boost your engagement on LinkedIn. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode:... READ MORE The post [268] How to get more engagement on LinkedIn appeared first on Janet Murray.

Social media is all about engagement, but if you’re new to Twitter – or looking to up your game on the platform – you might be wondering how to get those conversations started. In this episode, I’ll share my tips on how to get more engagement on Twitter and talk to prospective clients for your... READ MORE The post [267] How to get more engagement on Twitter appeared first on Janet Murray.

You don’t have to be a professional photographer to build a loyal following on Instagram – and it can be a great way to attract leads and sales for your business. In this episode, I share six tips on getting more engagement with your audience on Instagram. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why... READ MORE The post [266] How to get more engagement on Instagram appeared first on Janet Murray.

A thriving Facebook group can help you build relationships with your ideal customers – and understand what kind of products and services they might need. In this episode, I share creative ideas and tips that you can use to increase engagement in your Facebook group. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why having your... READ MORE The post [265] How to get more engagement in your Facebook group appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting your content in front of your target audience on Facebook is a powerful way to raise the profile of your business – and reach more prospective clients. But how do you get engagement on your Facebook page – without spending a ton on ads? In this episode, I share 10 pieces of advice to... READ MORE The post [264] How to get more engagement on your Facebook page appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re a regular listener to my podcast you’ve probably noticed the show has had a bit of a makeover - including a change of name. Listen to this special episode on why I’ve changed the name of my podcast, and what to expect over the coming episodes. If you’re new to the show it’s... READ MORE The post [263] Why I changed the name of my podcast appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you feel nervous about selling your product or service?  Do you hesitate when sending yet another marketing email? Well, even if YOU feel like you’ve mentioned it a hundred times, there will still be people out there you haven’t reached yet who would benefit from knowing more.  Listen to this episode to find out... READ MORE The post [262] Why you need to sell more than you think appeared first on Janet Murray.

Mike Kawula, author and serial entrepreneur, has taken three businesses from zero to seven figures in the first 36 months.  In this podcast episode he shares practical steps you can take to ensure your business thrives in the first five years. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Mike’s business story (3:20) Why everything doesn’t... READ MORE The post [261] How to survive your first five years in business with Mike Kawula appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode I share practical tips and strategies for turning failure into success, based on my own recent experience of dropping out a marathon and successfully completing another weeks later. Listen to this episode to find out what practical steps I took to turn my failure into a success, and how those lessons can... READ MORE The post [260] How to turn failure into success appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you feel lost on Twitter and unsure how to utilise it effectively for your business? Listen to this episode for practical tips and strategies on starting conversations, using Twitter lists, getting involved with Twitter chats and how to grow your community online with Twitter marketing expert Madalyn Sklar. Here’s what you’ll learn in this... READ MORE The post [259] How to build a loyal following on Twitter with Madalyn Sklar appeared first on Janet Murray.

Testimonials are so much more than getting your customers to say nice things about you - they’re an essential part of your sales funnel. In this episode, I explain how to get testimonials that convert into sales for your business - and why you shouldn’t let your customers write them for you. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [258] How to get testimonials that convert into sales appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you have big business goals, investing in attending events, training or coaching with key influencers in your industry, can help you get there faster. But what if you don’t have the budget to ‘pay to play’? Is it possible to achieve your business ambitions without significant financial investment? And is it right to ‘buy’... READ MORE The post [257] Do you need to pay to play? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Around 1800 people signed up for my recent Facebook page engagement challenge - would you like to know how? In this episode, I share my best tips and strategies for promoting an online challenge (or any product or service launch). Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Why you may need a reality check if you’re... READ MORE The post [256] How to promote an online challenge appeared first on Janet Murray.

Dan Gingiss, author of the book ‘Winning at Customer Care’, explains how you can use social media to improve your customers overall experience of your brand, from turning detractors into raving fans, to learning what features or products you should sell next. Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Dan’s business story (3:50) 8 Steps to... READ MORE The post [255] Why customer care should be part of your marketing strategy with Dan Gingiss appeared first on Janet Murray.

Ever seen people talking about ‘online challenges’ and wondered what they are or how they could help your business? In this episode I explain what online challenges are, and give practical tips on how you can use them to create an amazing connection with your customers, grow your audience, and make sales. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [254] How to build your email list through online challenges appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you like to be a guest on a podcast but are unsure how to go about it?  Perhaps you’ve already made some guest appearances on podcasts but would like to do more. Nicole Holland is an expert on podcast guesting and shares practical tips on how to find suitable podcasts for your business, how... READ MORE The post [253] How to land guest appearances on podcasts with Nicole Holland appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode I share practical tips and strategies for bouncing back from setbacks, based on my own London Marathon experience (sadly I had to withdraw from the race due to heat exhaustion). Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Background to entering (and training for) the London Marathon 2018 (2:28) Why the weather reports for... READ MORE The post [252] How to bounce back from setbacks appeared first on Janet Murray.

Have you connected with prospective customers on LinkedIn but are unsure how to turn those conversations into sales? Jo Saunders, a LinkedIn and social media marketing expert, explains how you can use the platform to build your visibility, authority and influence for your business. Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Jo’s business story (4:12) How... READ MORE The post [251] How to turn LinkedIn conversations into sales with Jo Saunders appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this bonus episode, recorded live at The London Book Fair, I explain how you can make money as an author, including examples of how I monetised my book, Your Press Release is Breaking My Heart. Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Why you no longer need to wait ‘to be picked’ by traditional publishing... READ MORE The post Bonus Episode recorded live at The London Book Fair: How to develop an entrepreneurial mindset as an author appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you need to sell tickets for live events, email marketing is by far the most effective strategy. But what should you include in your marketing emails? What kind of subject headers should you use? And how often should your be emailing your list about your event? In this episode, I share practical email marketing... READ MORE The post [250] How to use email marketing to promote live events appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you want to land more speaking gigs to help promote your business or become an expert in your field? Simone Vincenzi has spoken at over 200 events this year and gives fantastic advice on how to get yourself booked, how to get ‘bums on seats’ at your own events and how you can sell... READ MORE The post [249] How to get booked as a speaker with Simone Vincenzi appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you running a live event or workshop and wondering how to promote it more effectively? In this episode, I share my top tips including how you can create valuable content that will help to promote your live event across all social media platforms - without ever appearing too ‘salesy’. Here’s what you’ll learn this... READ MORE The post [248] How to use social media to promote live events appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you feel like you're tweeting into a black hole? Samantha Kelly from The Tweeting Goddess is an expert on making Twitter work for your business. Listen to this episode to find out how you can attract new customers on Twitter, connect with useful people within your industry and use the platform to ‘get noticed’.... READ MORE The post [247] How to find customers on Twitter (and how to make it easier for them to find you) with Samantha Kelly appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you considering hosting your own live event but are worried about how to make it profitable for your business? In this episode, I share five tips on how to make money from live events - including the other key benefits running live events will bring you and your business. Here’s what you’ll learn this... READ MORE The post [246] How to make money from live events appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re doing business in the EU - or with anyone living there - you need to be aware of new data protection regulations (known as GDPR) that come into force in May. In this episode, legal expert Suzanne Dibble, explains what you need to know about GDPR and how it could affect your business.... READ MORE The post [245] What you need to know about GDPR with Suzanne Dibble appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to make big decisions for your business? In this episode I share the reasons why I decided to change the name (and format) of my sell out live event Soulful PR Live, along with some practical tips that will help you make decisions in your own business. Here’s what you’ll learn this... READ MORE The post [244] Why I changed the name of my sellout live event appeared first on Janet Murray.

Suzi Grant has used her retirement to set up a successful blog and Instagram account which has led to major media coverage in high-profile publications like the New York Times and Daily Mail. In this episode, Suzi shares her tips on what it takes to grow a following on social media - and why it's... READ MORE The post [243] How to get media famous with Suzi Grant appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you feel like you’re wasting time on social media because no one is responding to what you share?   In this episode, I share four tips on how to create content that people will engage with. The three things you should try to achieve with your content (2:07) Why you should try to solve... READ MORE The post [242] How to get more engagement on social media appeared first on Janet Murray.

Launching the YouTube channel Love and London helped Jessica Dante start a successful travel guide business. In this episode Jessica shares the marketing tactics she’s used on YouTube to build her email list and generate income in her business. Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Jessica’s business story (2:16) The products Jessica sells and how... READ MORE The post [241] How to build your email list via a YouTube channel with Jessica Dante appeared first on Janet Murray.

Would you like to attract more readers to your business blog? In this episode, I explain the four things you need to do to get more eyeballs on your content. Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Why you need to build as many links back to your blog as possible (2:42) The importance of attracting... READ MORE The post [240] How to drive more traffic to your business blog appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you blogging about your business but not getting enough traffic to your website? In this episode, Terra Dawn shares her secrets on how to get more visitors your website and how to convert that traffic into customers. Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Terra’s Business Story (2:52) Why website traffic is so important (3:55)... READ MORE The post [239] How to attract more traffic to your website with Terra Dawn appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to come up with content ideas for your blog?  In this episode, I share three types of blog posts you should be creating regularly for your small business.     Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: How you can use Google to find out what people are searching for (2:16) Why using more... READ MORE The post [238] Three types of blog post you should be creating regularly appeared first on Janet Murray.

Dr Anissa Holmes transformed her struggling dental practice into a highly profitable business in less than a year - using online marketing strategies and Facebook advertising. Now she helps others do the same. In this episode Anissa explains how she built a thriving membership community and a profitable sales funnel for her business. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [237] How to launch a membership site for your business with Anissa Holmes appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you struggling to attract traffic to your website? Or finding that your visitors don’t convert into customers?  In this episode, I explain the top five reasons for having a blog on your website and why it’s essential to grow your business and make more sales.     Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: How having... READ MORE The post [236] Why you need a blog for your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Dorie Clark is a marketing and branding expert, professional speaker and author.  She helps business owners make a living doing what they love through her popular books and online courses. In this episode Dorie explains, and gives examples of, how you can create multiple income streams for your business.   Here’s what you’ll learn this... READ MORE The post [235] How to create multiple streams of income with Dorie Clark appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you think putting prices on your website will deter clients or customers? In this episode, I discuss the three common reasons small business owners give me for not putting their prices on their website and what I think of them. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why putting your prices on your website... READ MORE The post [234] Why you should put your prices on your website appeared first on Janet Murray.

Chris Ducker is a serial entrepreneur, podcaster, author, and founder of the Youpreneur community.  He also owns several businesses, employing up to 400 staff, and is a trusted international business mentor. In this episode, Chris talks about how you can monetise and grow your personal brand. Here’s what you’ll learn this episode: Chris Ducker’s business... READ MORE The post [233] How to monetise your personal brand with Chris Ducker appeared first on Janet Murray.

Regardless of the price point for your product or service, you’ll always have some customers who say they can’t afford it.   That doesn’t necessarily mean you’re too expensive though or that you should start handing out discounts.   Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why objections on pricing don’t necessarily mean you’re too... READ MORE The post [232] Dealing with prospective customers who say 'I can't afford it' appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you struggle to set your prices? Or find yourself undercharging for your product or services?   If so, you’ll love this episode with Sigrun, a business strategist and lifestyle entrepreneur, who has grown her income from zero to seven figures in four years, by confidently raising her prices and charging what she’s worth.   Here’s... READ MORE The post [231] How to charge what you're worth with Sigrun appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you feel like you’re not making enough money in your business? In this episode, I share six reasons why you're not making enough money in your business and offer you some practical solutions you can implement immediately to turn things around. Here's what you'll learn:- Undercharging and how to go about rectifying this (2:32)... READ MORE The post [230] How to make more money in your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode, Sally Bunkham - founder of Mumsback, which provides luxury gift hampers for new mums -  explains how she’s secured high-profile press coverage - in just ten months of being in business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Sally’s business story  - how getting pregnant two months after her first baby was... READ MORE The post [229] How to get big press coverage on a small business budget with Sally Bunkham appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting a regular column in a newspaper or magazine can be a really good way to help grow your business. In this episode, I share my advice on how to land a regular column and why it’s a good PR move. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How most editors choose writers for their... READ MORE The post [228] How to land a regular column in a newspaper or magazine appeared first on Janet Murray.

If selling makes you feel uncomfortable it can really hold you back in your business. In this episode, sales coach Jessica Lorimer talks about the steps to follow if you’re just starting out or if you're looking to overhaul your sales strategy. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Jessica Lorimer’s business story - how... READ MORE The post [227] How to make more sales (without being spammy) with Jessica Lorimer appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to secure media coverage for your business in newspapers, magazines, websites and on radio and TV, finding out exactly the right person to get your idea in front of - the person who can make a decision about whether to run your story - is vital. In this episode, I share my... READ MORE The post [226] How to find journalists' contact details appeared first on Janet Murray.

Securing a TEDx talk can really help to raise the profile of your business - and create new opportunities for growth. In this episode, Helen Packham shares her experience of landing - and delivering - her first TEDx talk. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Helen Packham’s business experience and how she turned a... READ MORE The post [225] How to land your first TEDx talk with Helen Packham appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to get media coverage for your business in newspapers, magazines and on radio and TV, you need to know how to write a great email pitch to journalists. In this episode, I share my tips on crafting a must-read email pitch to the media. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: What... READ MORE The post [224] How to write an email pitch to journalists appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to raise the profile of your business online, you cannot ignore the power of YouTube. In this episode, I talk to Jess Freeman who helps entrepreneurs get more visibility using video. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Jess Freeman’s business story - how she helps businesses stand out using video The... READ MORE The post [223] How to create and brand your own YouTube channel with Jessica Freeman appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to get coverage in newspapers, magazines and on radio and TV, it’s a good idea to know how to put together a compelling press release. In this episode, I share my tips on the key ingredients of a press release, including how to write one and who you should be sending it... READ MORE The post [222] How to write a press release for your small business appeared first on Janet Murray.

For the last episode of the Soulful PR podcast of 2017, I invited our shownotes editor Lucy Dixon to join me to talk about our favourite episodes of the year - which includes those we think you should really listen to if you want to grow your business in 2018. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [221] Soulful PR Podcast review of the year appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re a fan of my 2018 Media Diary, you might be wondering if you could create a similar planner or journal for your own industry. In this episode, I share my tips on launching a diary or planner you can sell to your customers. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why you need... READ MORE The post [220] How to create a planner or journal for your industry appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode, headshot photographer Laura Pearman talks about her innovative approach to marketing: how she ‘handpicks’ her clients and gets them queuing up to work with her - and how you can apply her ideas to your own business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How Laura Pearman targets the people she really... READ MORE The post [219] How to get your ideal clients to fall in love with you with Laura Pearman appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re just getting started with email marketing, you might be wondering what type of content you should be creating and what you should actually write in your emails. In this episode, I share the three main types of emails you should be sending for your business, with lots of tips on how to write... READ MORE The post [218] How to write compelling email copy appeared first on Janet Murray.

Unlocking your entrepreneurial superpower could help you to choose the right growth strategy for your business. In this episode, business coach Osmaan Sharif explains how he uses the eight different personality types to help business owners play to their strengths. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How business coach  Osmaan Sharif went from Human... READ MORE The post [217] How to find your entrepreneurial superpower with Osmaan Sharif appeared first on Janet Murray.

Email marketing is an essential part of promoting your business, but if you’re just starting out it is easy to get overwhelmed by all the options available. In this episode, I share three things to help get you get started with email marketing for your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Tips on... READ MORE The post [216] How to get started with email marketing appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode, photographer and filmmaker Xanthe Berkeley talks about how you can make engaging video content for your business - and how you can start simply shooting with your phone. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Xanthe Berkeley’s business story - how she went from wedding photographer to using her photography and video... READ MORE The post [215] How to tell stories using video with Xanthe Berkeley appeared first on Janet Murray.

Social media is all about engagement, but if you’re new to Twitter - or looking to up your game on the platform - you might be wondering how to get those conversations started. In this episode, I’ll share my tips on how to get more engagement on Twitter and talk to prospective clients for your... READ MORE The post [214] How to get more engagement on Twitter appeared first on Janet Murray.

My first interview with Instagram expert Sara Tasker has been my most popular podcast episode ever. So I invited Sara back on as a guest, to find out what has changed on Instagram since her appearance and get an update on ways you can use the platform to grow your business. Here’s what you’ll learn... READ MORE The post [213] Instagram strategies that work with Sara Tasker appeared first on Janet Murray.

If there is something you really want to invest in for your business but think you can’t afford it, just tackling it from a different angle can really help you get what you want. In this episode, I’ll be sharing why asking yourself ‘how can I make that affordable?’ will inspire you to start thinking... READ MORE The post [212] Stop saying "I can't afford it" appeared first on Janet Murray.

Whatever stage you’re at in your business, an effective website - that helps you attract leads and sales - is a must. In this episode, web designer and SEO expert Martin Huntbach shares his tips on how to create a clean, professional website for your business that will help you attract more traffic and convert... READ MORE The post [211] How to create the perfect website for your small business with Martin Huntbach appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you run your own business, you might feel uncomfortable addressing objections or concerns about your products and services - but you could be missing out on an opportunity to turn someone who is on the fence into a loyal customer. In this episode, I share five common concerns people express about my products and... READ MORE The post [210] The one marketing question you should be asking yourself (but probably aren't) appeared first on Janet Murray.

When it comes to writing content for your business, it’s important to understand exactly who you are writing for and be able to speak their language. In this episode, technical writer John Espirian shares practical tips on how to get tuned into your audience’s needs and write compelling content to help grow your business. Here’s... READ MORE The post [209] How to write great copy with John Espirian appeared first on Janet Murray.

Running live events can be a great way to connect with your audience - and generate income for your business - but if you’re just starting out or thinking of launching a new event, you might be wondering where to begin. In this episode, I share my tips on creating sellout live events. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [208] How to create sellout live events appeared first on Janet Murray.

  If you’re holding data about your customers - including email and postal addresses - you need to know about new data protection rules, which come into force in May 2018. In this episode, marketing expert Katrina Cliffe talks about the changes (known as the General Data Protection Regulations or GDPR) and how they affect... READ MORE The post [207] What you need to know about data protection with Katrina Cliffe appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you need to generate more income in your business, your instinct is probably to look for new customers/clients. In this episode, I explain why starting with your existing customers and clients - and their friends - is the quickest way to generate income in your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why... READ MORE The post [206] How to get new customers or clients appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting featured in the press and/or prominent blogs and social media accounts can be powerful way to build your audience. In this episode, Press Loft founder Nicola Snell shares her tips on how to identify the key journalists and influencers in your sector and then make the most out of these connections. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [205] How to work with bloggers and influencers with Nicola Snell appeared first on Janet Murray.

One of the biggest challenges of doing business online is being consistent with your content. In this episode, I explain how creating a media calendar could help you become more effective at planning and creating content - on your blog or vlog, in your email marketing and on social media. It will also help you generate ideas... READ MORE The post [204] How to create a media calendar for 2018 (and why you need to) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Creating content, whether that’s a blog, vlog or a social media post, is time consuming, but there are ways to repurpose everything you produce and make it go further. In this episode, content repurposing expert Amy Woods talks about how to get the most out of every piece of content that you produce. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [203] Boost your web traffic through content repurposing with Amy Woods appeared first on Janet Murray.

Building a membership community around your products and services is a great way to create repeat customers for your business. In this episode, I go behind the scenes of my membership community to share my tips on how you could create a paid community for your business - even if you have a product-based business.... READ MORE The post [202] Behind the scenes of my membership community appeared first on Janet Murray.

People love working with specialists, so if you want to attract more customers and clients, you need to get clear on your niche. In this episode, Alexia Leachman - who was the first ever guest on the Soulful PR podcast - explains how finding her niche as a fear-free birth coach has helped grow her... READ MORE The post [201] How to find your niche (and why you need to) with Alexia Leachman appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this 200th episode of the Soulful PR podcast, I’m looking back at the shows that have been pivotal for me and my business - and sharing how I have grown the podcast from scratch to 38,000 downloads every month. I’ll share my thoughts on how I’ve created a top 50 UK business podcast (including... READ MORE The post [200] Lessons learned from 200 podcast episodes appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to grow an audience you can turn into paying customers, a social media and/or content strategy is vital. In this episode, social media expert Warren Knight shares his seven-step guide to creating a strategy that will help to develop relationships with your target audience. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Warren... READ MORE The post [199] How to create a social media strategy for your business with Warren Knight appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re looking to have conversations with prospective customers, LinkedIn is fast becoming one of the best social media platforms to do this - and that goes for both product and service based businesses. In this episode I share seven practical ways to boost your engagement on LinkedIn. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode:... READ MORE The post [198] How to get more engagement on LinkedIn appeared first on Janet Murray.

Building a community online takes time and it can have a big impact on your bottom line - if you’re prepared to play the long game. In this episode, Makelight founder Emily Quinton shares practical tips and ideas for building an online community. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How Emily shifted from wedding... READ MORE The post [197] How to build a thriving online community with Emily Quinton from Makelight appeared first on Janet Murray.

You don’t have to be a professional photographer to build a loyal following on Instagram - and it can be a great way to attract leads and sales for your business. In this episode, I share six tips on getting more engagement with your audience on Instagram. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why... READ MORE The post [196] How to get more engagement on Instagram appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode, Katya Varbanova - aka LiveStreamKatya - shares her tips on getting ‘raving fans’ who will spread the word about your business (so you don’t have to). Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How Katya turned her obsession with live video into a thriving business Why you need ‘raving fans’ and how... READ MORE The post [195] How to build raving fans through livestreaming (and why you need to) with Livestream Katya appeared first on Janet Murray.

A thriving Facebook group can help you build relationships with your ideal customers - and understand what kind of products and services they might need. In this episode, I share creative ideas and tips that you can use to increase engagement in your Facebook group. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why having your... READ MORE The post [194] How to get more engagement in your Facebook group appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re doing business online, getting your content in front of big audiences can seem impossible - particularly when you’re just getting started. But there are ways you can quickly grow your audience - without spending a ton on advertising. In this episode, growth hacking expert Vin Clancy shares his secrets on how to grow... READ MORE The post [193] Growth hacking made simple with Vin Clancy appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting your content in front of your target audience on Facebook is a powerful way to raise the profile of your business - and reach more prospective clients, But how do you get engagement on your Facebook page - without spending a ton on ads? In this episode, I share 10 pieces of advice to... READ MORE The post [192] How to get more engagement on your Facebook page appeared first on Janet Murray.

Hosting a competition can be a great way to generate press coverage for your business and to raise brand awareness with prospective customers. In this episode, Kate McQuillan explains how she created an annual pet competition that has become incredibly popular and helped to boost her business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Kate... READ MORE The post [191] How to use competitions in your marketing with Kate McQuillan appeared first on Janet Murray.

Appearing as a guest on a podcast show can be a great way to get known - and get in front of prospective customers and clients. But many podcast hosts are inundated with pitches from people who want to appear on their show. So how can you make sure your pitch stands out? In this... READ MORE The post [190] How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest (and why you need to) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting high-profile media coverage for your business can be a game-changer in raising your profile and getting in front of your target audience. In this episode, I talk to hypnotherapist Dipti Tait about the tactics she has been using to get media coverage in national newspapers, magazines and on radio and TV. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [189] How to become a media pundit with Dipti Tait appeared first on Janet Murray.

Creating content to promote your business can be time consuming, so it’s a good idea to think about how you can make your content go further. In this episode, I share a step-by-step example of how I have repurposed one piece of content and used it in lots of different ways and across different platforms.... READ MORE The post [188] How to repurpose your content (and why you need to) appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to build an online audience, you need to be creating content people love. In this episode, digital marketing expert Daniel Knowlton shares his tips on how to create more shareable content. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Dan Knowlton’s business story - how he became a social media and digital marketing... READ MORE The post [187] How to create shareable content with Daniel Knowlton appeared first on Janet Murray.

Although press releases aren’t necessarily the best way to achieve media coverage for your business, there are times when you might want to send one. In this episode, I help you avoid three mistakes you might be making with your press releases. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: What exactly a press release is... READ MORE The post [186] Three common press-release writing mistakes appeared first on Janet Murray.

You might think that LinkedIn is just a recruitment platform but it can be a really powerful tool to help grow your business. In this episode, LinkedIn expert Mark Williams shares his expertise on getting the most out of networking on LinkedIn. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Mark Williams’ business story - how... READ MORE The post [185] How to use LinkedIn to grow your business with Mark Williams aka Mr LinkedIn appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you have an idea for a new product or service you’d like to create, it’s a vital to test it before you spend money making it. In this episode I share three things I do when I have an idea for a new product or service to make sure I’m not wasting time and... READ MORE The post [184] How to test your business ideas appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want your customers to be able to find you, you need to be active on social media. But managing your social media can take up a huge amount of time and take you away from other important tasks in your business.   In this episode social media manager Cathy Wassell gives her tips... READ MORE The post [183] Should you hire a social media manager? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Having an ideal customer ‘avatar’ i.e. a detailed profile of your ideal customer can be useful. But rely on it too heavily and you could stunt the growth of your business. In this episode I talk about the reasons you shouldn’t be a slave to your customer avatar. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode:... READ MORE The post [182] Why you should ditch your ideal customer avatar appeared first on Janet Murray.

Publishing regular content on a blog can mean that your audience is already sold on you and your ideas, before you’ve even had a conversation with them. In this episode, internal communications expert Rachel Miller explains how you can attract leads for your business through blogging - without the need for the hard-sell. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [181] How to get fully booked through blogging with Rachel Miller appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting time or attention from someone with a bigger audience than you can really help you grow your business. But if you don't have an established relationship with them a 'cold' email request probably isn't going to cut it. In this episode I share my practical ideas on getting influencers to work with you. Here’s... READ MORE The post [180] How to build relationships with influencers appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to stand out in a competitive marketplace, creating good quality content is a must. But how do you get people to ‘like’ and share the content you create In this episode, content marketing experts Andrew Pickering and Peter Gartland - aka Andrew and Pete - share their tips on creating content that... READ MORE The post [179] How to get more eyes on your content with Andrew and Pete appeared first on Janet Murray.

An effective social media campaign can really make a difference to sales when you launch a new product or service - and will help you to make sure you’re creating exactly what your customers want to buy. In this episode I share with you the exact social media strategy I use when I launch something... READ MORE The post [178] How to plan a social media campaign for a launch appeared first on Janet Murray.

Want to get your new products and services in front of a bigger audience? You might want to consider crowdfunding. In this episode, crowdfunding expert Khierstyn Ross shares how platforms like Kickstarter and Indiegogo can help you create successful launches. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How Khierstyn Ross became a product launch specialist,... READ MORE The post [177] How to use crowdfunding to grow your business with Khierstyn Ross appeared first on Janet Murray.

Speaking at events can be a great way to promote your business, but if you haven’t done any public speaking before you might not know where to start. In this episode, I share practical tips on how to deliver a really great talk - from mapping out your content to questions you should ask the... READ MORE The post [176] How to plan and deliver a great talk appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you have a passion for something creative, you might think it’s not possible to turn it into a successful business. In this episode, bestselling author Jeff Goins talks about how to overcome what he calls the ‘starving artist mindset’ and build a thriving business doing something that you love. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [175} How to make money from your creative business with Jeff Goins appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you can’t explain what you do in one sentence, whether that’s on your website, in a meeting or at a networking event, you’ll find it hard to attract clients for your business. In this episode, I share my three-step plan on how to come up with a really great one liner, so you’ll never... READ MORE The post [174] How to explain what you do in 10 words or less appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’ve got a new product or service you’re itching to launch, you might think you need to have a massive email list in order to attract enough customers. In this episode, business consultant Jo Milmine talks about how she has launched successfully with small - but perfectly formed - email lists. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [173] How to launch with a tiny list with Jo Milmine appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’ve ever spent hours trying to write a blog post, website copy or marketing email - only to produce a couple of sentences - then this podcast episode is for you. In this episode, I share why I don’t believe in writer’s block - and three strategies you can use to ensure you never... READ MORE The post [172] How to tackle writer's block appeared first on Janet Murray.

Whether you like it or not, people judge on appearance. Which means your personal style can say a lot about your business and how you operate. In this episode, stylist and confidence coach Loulou Storey shares practical tips on how to use your clothes as a tool for business success. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [171] How your personal image impacts on your business with Loulou Storey appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re doing business online, inevitably there will be times when you find yourself on the receiving end of criticism - whether that’s on your blogs, social media posts or in your email inbox. In this episode I share the strategies I’ve developed to deal with negative comments without letting them throw me - and... READ MORE The post [170] How to deal with criticism appeared first on Janet Murray.

The profile picture you use on social media and on your website can make a big difference to how people view your business. In this episode, headshot photographer Laura Pearman shares her expert advice on how to get pictures that will give the right impression to your prospective customers. Here’s what you’ll learn in this... READ MORE The post [169] Why your business needs great headshot photography (and how to get it) with Laura Pearman appeared first on Janet Murray.

Going to live events can be a great way for you to get in front of prospective customers and show how you may be able to help them. But how do you make connections without delivering the hard sell? Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How to get to know other delegates before the... READ MORE The post [168] How to promote yourself at live events (without being a pain in the ass) appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re not a ‘techie’ sort, you may find the term search engine optimisation (SEO) a bit intimidating. But if you want prospective customers to find you online, it’s something you can’t afford to ignore. In this episode, digital expert Martin Huntbach demystifies the topic and shares what small business owners need to know about... READ MORE The post [167] SEO made simple with Martin Huntbach appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to create a constant stream of leads and sales, there are four things you should be doing in your business every day. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: The four things you should be working on every day in your business if you want to make more sales Practical tips on how... READ MORE The post [166] Four things you should do every day to promote your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Speaking at live events can help you build your credibility, make connections and attract new business. But how do you get started? In this episode, speaker and entrepreneur Grant Baldwin shares practical tips on finding speaking opportunities, getting hired to speak and negotiating fees (plus a whole lot more). Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode:... READ MORE The post [165] How to get booked and paid to speak with Grant Baldwin appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to create a regular stream of leads and sales for your business, you need to build a community around your content. In this episode, I explain how building a community around your content can help your business and share practical tips on how to make it happen. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [164] How to grow a community around your content (and why you need to) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting media coverage for your business in national newspapers, websites and magazines can position you as an expert in your field - and help you make more sales. In this episode, vintage design and lifestyle expert Kate Beavis shares her tips and strategies for getting high-profile press coverage in your target publications. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [163] How to get high-profile media coverage for your business with Kate Beavis appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you losing out on sales because you’re not anticipating the questions prospective customers might have about your products and services? In this episode, I explain how creating content that answers your customers’ questions - and not just on your FAQ page - could make a big difference to the bottom line of your business.... READ MORE The post [162] Do this one thing to make more sales appeared first on Janet Murray.

Working with bloggers and social media influencers can be a great way to get your business or brand in front of more people. But how do you make it happen? In this episode, pro blogger Kat Molesworth explains how to harness the power of bloggers and influencers in your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [161] How to work with bloggers and influencers with Kat Molesworth appeared first on Janet Murray.

The most successful business owners that I know have one thing in common: their ability to focus on one thing. In this episode, I explain how staying small - focusing on one ‘niche’ or trialling your product/service with a handful of clients - can help you achieve bigger results in the long term. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [160] Going small to go big in your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

Attending live events can be great for your business - but have you considered running your own? In this episode, Chris Ducker shares his thoughts on how hosting live events could help you grow your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Chris Ducker's experience of running live events including Tropical Think Tank Why every... READ MORE The post [159] Growing your online business through live events with Chris Ducker appeared first on Janet Murray.

Journalists can be frustrating to deal with. They don’t always answer their phones and can be slow to reply to emails (or not reply at all). The good news is, there are things you can do to get their attention - and increase your chances of getting a ‘yes’ when you pitch a story idea.... READ MORE The post [158] How to get journalists to say 'yes' to you appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you run your own business, there will be times when you feel overwhelmed, with so much on your to-do list, you’re not sure where to get started. In this episode, productivity expert Mike Vardy shares his strategies for getting more done in less time. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Mike Vardy’s business... READ MORE The post [157] How to be more productive with Mike Vardy appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re running your own business, there will be times when the going gets tough and you need to overcome challenges. In this episode, I share seven things I learned from running the London Marathon that can be applied to my business (and to yours too). Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why you... READ MORE The post [156] How to be gritty (and how it can help your business) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Being able to sell your products and services is a key part of running a small business, but time and time again business owners tell me that selling makes them feel a bit icky and uncomfortable. In this episode, Tara Swiger shares her tips on how to build a sustainable business - and how to... READ MORE The post [155] How to sell without feeling gross with Tara Swiger appeared first on Janet Murray.

Want to invest in training or personal development but feel you don’t have the budget? This podcast episode is full of ideas to help you fund training, events and other business opportunities that you’d really hate to miss out on. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Tips for moving yourself from the mindset of... READ MORE The post [154] How to fund events and training as a small business owner appeared first on Janet Murray.

When you’ve got a great idea for a new product or service, your excitement can make it tempting to go full speed ahead to the launch stage. But making sure you are building something people actually want is a crucial place to start. Entrepreneur Mark Asquith shares his tips for the six essential stages of... READ MORE The post [153] Product launch strategies that actually work with Mark Asquith appeared first on Janet Murray.

When you’re running your own business, there will be times when you come across freeloaders - people who ask for favours, including free or discounted products and services. In this episode, I share tips and strategies for dealing with these types of people. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why being upfront about what... READ MORE The post [152] How to deal with freeloaders appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re looking to grow your following on Twitter, you might want to take part in Twitter chats - or even host your own. In this episode, Sian Conway talks about how she launched the #EthicalHour Twitter chat which now gets around one million impressions a month - and has helped her build her profile,... READ MORE The post [151] How to use Twitter chats to promote your business with Sian Conway appeared first on Janet Murray.

When I asked listeners how I should mark the 150th of episode of the Soulful PR podcast,  they said they wanted to know more about me and how the show is put together.  So in this episode, I’m answering the questions rather than asking them. In this episode, I’m interviewed by my friend Rob Lawrence... READ MORE The post [150] Behind the scenes of my business appeared first on Janet Murray.

In this episode, Jennifer Holloway shares her advice on how to define your personal brand - particularly if you feel uncomfortable with the idea of promoting your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Jennifer’s business story - from PR to running her own personal branding business Why the best brands convey the ‘what’... READ MORE The post [149] How to define your personal brand with Jennifer Holloway appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’ve never belonged to a membership community, you might be wondering if it’s a good idea for you to join one. In this episode, I share my advice on how to choose the right membership community for you - and how to get the most out of it for your business. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [148] Should you join a membership site? appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to build an online audience for your business you might be wondering where to start. In this episode, academic coach Lucy Parsons talks about how she has used online marketing to build her academic coaching business online - and get fully booked - in just two years. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [147] How to build an audience online with Lucy Parsons appeared first on Janet Murray.

There are many great things about running your own business, but if you work by yourself you will, inevitably, feel lonely. In this episode I share three simple strategies to combat entrepreneurial loneliness How online communities can be really important to make both online and offline contacts My advice on why live events are a... READ MORE The post [146] How to deal with entrepreneurial loneliness appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to increase your reach on Facebook, you might be considering spending some money on advertising. But how can you make sure you’ll get a good return on investment? In this episode, social media expert Gavin Bell shares his advice on how to make Facebook advertising work for your business. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [145] Getting started with Facebook ads with Gavin Bell appeared first on Janet Murray.

The ‘about’ page on your website should be about you and your business, right?  Not necessarily. In this episode, I share a common mistake you could be making with your about page (and how to fix it). Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why your ‘about’ page shouldn’t be all about you Advice on... READ MORE The post [144] Are you making this mistake with your about page? appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to boost engagement on your Facebook page, you might think you need to pay for advertising - but there are ways to increase likes, comments and shares with little - or no - ad spend. In this episode, Institute of Mums founder Jessie Wilson shares her tips on encouraging organic engagement on... READ MORE The post [143] How to get more engagement on your Facebook page with Jessie Wilson appeared first on Janet Murray.

Trying to make your business all things to everyone? You could end up appealing to no one. In this episode, I explain why you shouldn’t be afraid of niching down your business Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why people love specialists and experts (and why that’s important) How having a niche makes it... READ MORE The post [142] Stop marketing to everyone appeared first on Janet Murray.

Being a published author can help you build credibility in your niche - and attract leads and sales -  making it the best possible business card you can have. But how do you get published? And how do you get your book in front of the people you want to reach? In this episode, wellness... READ MORE The post [141] How to write and publish your own book with Amanda Cook appeared first on Janet Murray.

You might think that being upfront about the costs of your products and services could put off potential customers, but in fact the opposite is true. In this episode, I share why business owners shouldn’t be scared to be transparent about their costs and prices. Here's what you'll learn in this episode: The importance of... READ MORE The post [140] Should you put your prices on your website? appeared first on Janet Murray.

A knack for explaining complicated topics led Pete Matthew to launch a website simplifying financial advice. In this episode, he explains why providing people with useful information in the form of blogs, podcasts and video has helped his business double in size. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Pete’s business story - how he... READ MORE The post [139] How to turn content into cash with Pete Matthew appeared first on Janet Murray.

You might think that giving away free content means your potential customers will have no reason to buy from you, but this couldn’t be further from the truth. In this episode, I explain why creating free content that answers your customers' questions is simply another form of advertising (that’s completely free - bonus!). Here’s what... READ MORE The post [138] Five reasons not to be afraid of giving away free content appeared first on Janet Murray.

Leaving a successful career to set up on his own taught social media expert Mark Schaefer the importance of being known as an expert in his field. In this episode, he explains why business owners should focus on becoming known for what they do and outlines a strategy to achieve this. Here’s what you’ll learn... READ MORE The post [137] How to get known with Mark Schaefer appeared first on Janet Murray.

What is the one thing you need to do to grow your social media following? Find out in this podcast episode (clue: you’ll be surprised how easy it is). Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How to use your existing connections to increase your social media reach Strategies you can use to help you... READ MORE The post [136] The one thing you can do to get more social media followers appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’ve ever worried that focusing too much on a niche will limit the opportunities for your business, then you’ll love hearing how this strategy has worked for Jeff Sieh. In this episode, Jeff shares how specialising in Pinterest for men has helped him grow his social media marketing business. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [135] How to dominate a niche with Jeff Sieh appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you ever get stuck for ideas for blog content? In this episode I share six types of blog post you should be creating regularly. You’ll never run out of ideas again. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How regular blogging can help you build trust with prospective customers Why you should focus on... READ MORE The post [134] Six types of blog post you should be creating regularly appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to connect with journalists and get in front of potential customers, Twitter is the perfect social media platform for you. In this episode, Mike Kawula explains how to use Twitter to grow your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Mike’s business story - from serial entrepreneur to Twitter expert with... READ MORE The post [133] How to grow your following on Twitter appeared first on Janet Murray.

Publishing regular content on your website can help you connect - and build a relationship - with your potential customers. In this episode, I look at the excuses you might be making not to blog - and share some compelling reasons why you should be. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How to make... READ MORE The post [132] Are you making these excuses not to blog? appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to connect with journalists who need your expertise for their stories - without hiring a PR company or writing endless press releases - subscribing to a media enquiry service can be a great move. In this episode, Daryl Willcox shares his tips on getting the most out of media enquiry services to... READ MORE The post [131] How to use media enquiry services with Daryl Willcox appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re serious about getting media coverage for your business, you need to be active on Twitter, and in this episode, I explain why. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How journalists use Twitter like a search engine to find information and expert sources for their stories Making use of Twitter to find journalists’... READ MORE The post [130] Three PR-savvy reasons for you to be active on Twitter appeared first on Janet Murray.

Melyssa Griffin teaches business owners how to stand out online, and one of the ways she does this is through Pinterest. In this episode, she shares her advice on creating an active and engaged Pinterest account that will help grow your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Melyssa’s business story - from high... READ MORE The post [129] How to use Pinterest to grow your business appeared first on Janet Murray.

A Facebook group can be a great way to build relationships with prospective clients and build a community around your content. But how do you attract new members - and ensure they stay in your group? Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why you need to make sure you are signposting your Facebook group... READ MORE The post [128] How to build a large Facebook community appeared first on Janet Murray.

Marcus Sheridan famously transformed his struggling swimming pool business by answering his customers' questions in a blog. Now he shares his marketing expertise through his blog, recently published book - They Ask, You Answer, and as an international keynote speaker. In this episode, he explains how to get started with content marketing. Here’s what you’ll... READ MORE The post [127] They ask, you answer: content marketing made easy with Marcus Sheridan appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re considering setting up a Facebook group to promote your business - or if you already have one but your members aren’t very engaged - then this podcast episode is for you. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: The different ways Facebook groups can help you build trust with current and potential customers... READ MORE The post [126] Should you use a Facebook group to promote your business? appeared first on Janet Murray.

You might think that creating a marketing strategy for your business is a complicated process, but by breaking it down into just three areas you can easily create a straightforward plan. In this episode, marketing expert Roger Edwards shares his advice on simplifying the marketing strategy for your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this... READ MORE The post [125] How to make marketing simple appeared first on Janet Murray.

Great marketing is all about having a conversation with your potential customers and webinars are a fantastic way to do this, while showing them exactly what you know - and how you can help them. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: The powerful ways webinars can help you build relationships with customers How to... READ MORE The post [124] How to use webinars to attract leads and clients appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to sell your products and services online, creating sales funnels is a must. But what are they and how can you use them in your business? In this episode Yann Ilunga breaks down the process and shows how you can use email sales funnels to attract new prospects and turn them into... READ MORE The post [123] How to create awesome sales funnels appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re looking for ways to improve your PR success in 2017, then this episode is just what you need. I share three PR habits that will have a huge impact on your business for the year ahead. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why planning ahead is crucial when identifying PR opportunities The... READ MORE The post [122] Three must-do PR habits for 2017 appeared first on Janet Murray.

You may well be wondering how to secure sponsorship for one of your business offerings, whether that’s an event that you run or an online product or service. Lisa Simone Richards is a PR specialist with a passion for helping health and wellness entrepreneurs do just that. In this episode, she shares her advice on... READ MORE The post [121] How to get sponsorship appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re looking to secure more media coverage for your business, you may be tempted to hire a PR company. But is it a good idea? Here, I share some of the pros and cons of outsourcing your PR. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why journalists prefer going direct to the source if... READ MORE The post [120] Should you hire a PR company? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Over the past four years, Kate has increased her business turnover by 450%. What’s her secret? Blogging. In this episode, she shares her tips on how you can also use a blog to grow your business. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Kate's business story - how she created the biggest pet sitting service in... READ MORE The post [119] How to quadruple your income through blogging appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’re running a business, there might be things you are doing - or not doing - that are damaging your reputation without you even realising. Here, I share three common PR blindspots that business owners should be aware of. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: The importance of standing up for yourself without... READ MORE The post [118] Do you have a PR blindspot? appeared first on Janet Murray.

Natalie Lussier is an online marketing expert and software start-up founder whose product launches have netted her sales of over a million dollars. In this episode, she shares her tips on all the essential elements you need for a successful launch. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Natalie Lussier’s business story - from healthy... READ MORE The post [117] How to plan a successful product launch appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to get more media coverage in 2017, the most important thing to know is that it’s all about timing. Here, I share five ways to increase your chances of getting a ‘yes’ from journalists when pitching stories. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why you should start by mapping out key... READ MORE The post [116] Five ways to get more media coverage in 2017 appeared first on Janet Murray.

In just a few years, Tony Brown went from working 18 hours a day as a freelance consultant to being able to run his business remotely while travelling round Jamaica for eight weeks with his family. In this episode, he shares how he made this possible by creating systems to document key processes within his... READ MORE The post [115] How to make sexy systems appeared first on Janet Murray.

Are you afraid of selling? Perhaps you get scared that if you send a sales email people won’t like you or unsubscribe from your list? Or maybe you hold back from telling your current clients about new product/services you have, in case they think you’re being pushy. But if you’re not telling people about what... READ MORE The post [114] Are you afraid of selling? appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to build a profitable business, email marketing is a must. But what should you write in your email copy? And can you ensure people actually read it? In this episode, business coach Nadia Finer shares her tips on crafting email marketing copy that people want to read. Here’s what you’ll learn in... READ MORE The post [113] How to write non-spammy marketing emails appeared first on Janet Murray.

When it comes to social media, it’s tempting to think you need to be active on every platform. But trying to be everywhere is not only exhausting; it can also make you ineffective. In this episode, I look at how to select the right social media platforms for your business, whether you’re an experienced social... READ MORE The post [112] How to decide which social media platforms to focus on appeared first on Janet Murray.

Mapping out potential media opportunities a year ahead will help you maximise your chances of getting coverage in newspapers, magazines, radio and TV. In this episode, I share my best tips and strategies for creating a media calendar and ensuring you have PR success in 2017. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Why a... READ MORE The post [111] How to get yourself PR ready for 2017 appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you’d like some festive media coverage for your business you’ll love this podcast episode. In it, I share five tips for Christmas-themed ideas you can pitch to journalists - and also use for your social media content. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: How using trending media stories can help you generate festive... READ MORE The post [110] Five Christmassy PR ideas appeared first on Janet Murray.

James Schramko went from a sales job at Mercedes-Benz to a coaching business helping online entrepreneurs create profitable businesses that fit with their lifestyle. In this episode, he shares his ideas and tips on how to connect with your customers, so that you can sell your products and services before you have even created them.... READ MORE The post [109] How to sell without being pushy with James Schramko appeared first on Janet Murray.

When I interviewed Instagram expert Sara Tasker, I had only just started using the platform to promote my business. In just a few weeks, using Sara’s advice, I have really upped my Instagram game. In this episode, I’ll share what I have done to double my Instagram following. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode:... READ MORE The post [108] How to get more engagement on Instagram appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you don't like the idea of self-promotion, putting your business out there can be daunting. But confidence is a skill that can be learned - even by introverts. In this episode, Cat Rose - aka The Creative Introvert - shares her techniques for overcoming the fear of pitching. Here’s what you’ll learn in this... READ MORE The post [107] How to do PR if you don't like self promotion with Cat Rose appeared first on Janet Murray.

A Facebook group is a great way to build relationships with prospective clients and find out exactly how you can help them. But how do you get those conversations started? In this episode, I’ll share six ways to get more engagement in your Facebook group. Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Getting started with... READ MORE The post [106] How to get more engagement in your Facebook group appeared first on Janet Murray.

  'Who are you and why should we care?' A question brand strategist Phil Pallen believes every business owner should be able to answer. In this episode, he shares his tips on creating a memorable brand. Here’s what you’ll learn: Phil's business story: from getting fired by Charlie Sheen to successful branding strategist   Why... READ MORE The post [105] How to build a memorable personal brand with Phil Pallen appeared first on Janet Murray.

Getting press coverage can be great for business, but if you want to make a real impact, you need to let people know about it. So what are the best ways to get more eyes on this content? In this episode, I look at how you can promote your media coverage to a bigger audience. Here’s... READ MORE The post [104] How to PR your press coverage appeared first on Janet Murray.

Katya Varbanova - aka Livestream Katya - quit a career in banking to focus on her business as a livestream strategist just a few months after broadcasting on Periscope for the first time. In this episode she explains the different ways live streaming on Periscope and Facebook Live can help you make money in your... READ MORE The post [103] How to use livestreaming to make money in your business with Livestream Katya appeared first on Janet Murray.

Fact: if you want to raise the media profile of your business, you’ll need to learn how to deal with criticism. But how do you tell the difference between a minor annoyance and a genuine media crisis? Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode: Practical tips on keeping criticism in perspective What to do if... READ MORE The post [102] How to handle a media crisis appeared first on Janet Murray.

Jess Catorc helps female entrepreneurs create stylish DIY websites and particularly enjoys working with women who don't feel like they're "techie". In this episode she shares her tips on creating DIY websites. Here’s what's covered in this episode: Where to host your website Why it might be worth buying more than one domain name for... READ MORE The post [101] How to build your own website with Jess Catorc appeared first on Janet Murray.

When I first started podcasting, last November, I had no idea what the future held. Would I enjoy doing it? Would I be any good at it? And would I still be around in 100 episodes? Well, turns out I am, so to celebrate, here's a round-up up what I've learned over 100 episodes of... READ MORE The post [100] Lessons learned from 100 podcast episodes appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you ever struggle to get words on the page? If so, you'll love this episode with copywriter Stella Orange, who shares her tips on writing stylish copy - fast. Here’s what's covered in this episode: Stella's business story - from outdoors educator to copywriter Stella's tips on writing great copy - quickly Common mistakes people make... READ MORE The post [099] Shut up and write with Stella Orange appeared first on Janet Murray.

Journalists can be frustrating to work with. They don't always reply to emails and rarely answer the phone, so getting feedback on your ideas can be a challenge. In this episode, I explore the most common reasons ignore your emails and what to do about it. Here's what you'll learn: Why being ignored by journalists is perfectly... READ MORE The post [098] What to do if journalists are ignoring you appeared first on Janet Murray.

Genevieve Shingle-Jaffe - aka the Shiny Lawyer - helps business owners protect their businesses - both through online training and off-the-shelf legal documents that can be customised for your business. In this episode, she explains the biggest legal mistakes online business owners make and how to avoid them. Here’s what's covered in this episode: Genevieve's business... READ MORE The post [097]How to legally protect your online business with Genevieve Shingle-Jaffe appeared first on Janet Murray.

If the thought of writing press releases or articles  for the media sends you into a spin, I've got some news for you...it doesn't have to be that way. In this episode I explore how to do PR if you don't like writing (or feel it isn't your biggest strength). Here's what you'll learn: Why you... READ MORE The post [096] How to do PR if you don't like writing appeared first on Janet Murray.

Imagine being able to ask successful entrepreneurs what they earn and how. Well that's exactly what Claire Pelletreau does. As the host of  the Get Paid Podcast, she's interviewed dozens of business owners with six and seven figure businesses (and beyond) and asked all questions you'd love to ask...but probably wouldn't dare. Here’s what's covered in this episode: How Claire... READ MORE The post [095] How to get paid with Claire Pelletreau appeared first on Janet Murray.

One of the most common questions I get asked is 'how do I start a podcast?' So while I wouldn't profess to be an expert (I'll leave that to experts like Colin Gray, who I interviewed back in episode 61), I can share the basic steps I took to get my own podcast up and running... READ MORE The post [094] Seven steps to starting your own podcast appeared first on Janet Murray.

Three years ago, Sara Tasker was a speech and language therapist working for the National Health Service. Now she's an Instagram pro and coach, who helps others grow their businesses through Instagram.  In this episode , Sarah explains how she grew her Instagram following to 110k in just a few years - and shares some... READ MORE The post [093] How to use Instagram to promote your business with Sara Tasker appeared first on Janet Murray.

What's the one PR mistake almost everybody makes? Its so easy-to-fix you'll kick yourself you didn't find out earlier. Here's what you'll learn in this episode: The one PR mistake almost everybody makes Why pitching journalists you've already worked can be better than approaching new ones The one question you should ask journalists every time you get the... READ MORE The post [092] The PR mistake almost everybody makes appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you're looking to grow your audience - and your client base - running live events can be an effective way to build influence and authority. In this episode, Social Day founder Lucy Hall explains how she is using live events to grow her business. Here’s what's covered in this episode: How Lucy went from selling fitness products... READ MORE The post [091]How to grow your business through live events with Lucy Hall appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you're looking to build your media profile, you may be wondering if it's worth investing in a list of journalists' contact details. Access to a media database can cost you anything from a few hundred pounds to a few thousand. So is really worth the investment? Find out in this podcast episode. Here's what... READ MORE The post [090] Should you buy journalists' contact details? appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you're serious about getting media coverage for your business or  brand, building long-term relationships with editors is vital. But most get hundreds or press releases and pitches each day, which means getting their attention can be a challenge. In this episode, Harriet Minter - who has spent the last six years editing at the Guardian... READ MORE The post [089] How to build relationships with editors with Harriet Minter appeared first on Janet Murray.

There is only so much journalists can write about your product or service, so unless what you offer is really unusual and/or you're creating regular updates, there isn't really anything for them to say. So when it comes to getting regular media coverage, having a strong brand story can help a lot.  In this episode... READ MORE The post [088] How your brand story can help you get PR appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to make an impact online, great photography is vital. But when should you commission professional photography and when should you DIY? How do you find a great photographer? And how much should you expect to pay for their services? In this episode, photographer Julie Christie explains all. Here’s what's covered in this episode:... READ MORE The post [087] How photography can help you create a memorable brand with Julie Christie appeared first on Janet Murray.

When you're launching a new product or service, it's tempting to think everyone will be interested in your story - including the national media. But you do need to be realistic about what will be of interest to a national audience. In this episode, I explain how to decide if your story has national potential - or whether... READ MORE The post [086] Will your story interest national journalists? Here's how to find out... appeared first on Janet Murray.

Facebook's new live streaming service Facebook Live lets you broadcast videos from your mobile device straight to your news feed, page or group. It's a fantastic way for you to build your audience and connect with prospective clients. In this episode, social media expert Ian Anderson Gray shares his advice on how to use Facebook Live to promote... READ MORE The post [085] How to use Facebook Live to promote your business with Ian Anderson Gray appeared first on Janet Murray.

Editors can be frustrating to deal with. They don't always respond to emails and rarely return phone calls, so understanding what they're looking for - and the best way to pitch to them - can be a challenge. In this episode, I talk about the pressures journalists are under -and their biggest frustrations - so you'll... READ MORE The post [084] Five things editors would love to say to you appeared first on Janet Murray.

It's easy to be active on social media. Being strategic - so your activity actually has an impact on your business - is much more challenging. But how do you find out if your social media activity is actually working for you? In this episode I talk to social media expert Jennifer Begg about how to measure... READ MORE The post [083] How to find out if social media is actually working for you with Jennifer Begg appeared first on Janet Murray.

While the majority of your clients will understand you're not the only person they work with and respect your free time, you will occasionally come across those who don't respect your boundaries. These kind of clients might call or text you in the evenings, send Facebook messages or call you over the weekend - and then get annoyed when... READ MORE The post [082] How to set boundaries with your clients (and why it's a PR issue) appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you're looking to create recurring revenue, creating a membership site can be a good move. But what exactly is involved in creating a membership site? What kind of tech do you need? What kind of content should you provide? And how do you attract - and keep - members?  Mike Morrison helps business owners create recurring... READ MORE The post [081] How to generate recurring income from a membership site with Mike Morrison appeared first on Janet Murray.

Securing interviews on influential podcasts can be a great way to promote your business and get you in front of prospective clients. But what's the best way to approach the host of a podcast you'd love to be featured on? What should you say in your email pitch? And how can you increase your chances... READ MORE The post [080] Three must-do tips for pitching yourself as a podcast guest appeared first on Janet Murray.

Marya Jan is a Facebook strategist based in Melbourne Australia. I recently hired her to help me put together a campaign for a live event I was running in London, which resulted in around 5k of sales. Since then, she's been helping me promote my book and membership community.  If, like me, you've tried - and failed... READ MORE The post [079] Facebook advertising strategies that actually work with Marya Jan appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you're serious about growing your email list, having an opt-in offer i.e. valuable content you can give people in exchange for their email address is a must. In this episode, I share seven opt-in offer ideas. Here's what you'll learn in this episode: Why you need an irresistible opt-in offer for your email subscribers How... READ MORE The post [078] Seven irresistible email opt-in ideas appeared first on Janet Murray.

Brett Larkin is an online yoga teacher who's turned her hobby into a profitable business, with multiple streams of income. In this episode, she talks about how she's used video to make that happen (and a whole lot more)... Here’s what's covered in this episode: How Brett created an online yoga business 'by accident' The strategy... READ MORE The post [077] How to use video to grow your business with Brett Larkin appeared first on Janet Murray.

You've probably heard the saying 'the money's in the list.' So if you're serious about growing your business, getting prospective clients on your email list should be a priority. In this episode I share five practical strategies to help you build yours - quick. Here's what you'll learn in this episode: How to create an irresistible... READ MORE The post [076] Five strategies to grow your email list appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to become a thought leader in your field - and get in front of new audiences - writing for large news sites like the Huffington Post can be a good move. In this episode, I share my tips on becoming a Huffington Post blogger (based on my own and my students' experiences). Here's what you'll... READ MORE The post [075] How to become a Huffington Post blogger appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you're thinking about writing a book - or are working on one already - you may be wondering whether it's still worth going down the traditional publishing route.  In this episode, I share my recent experience of releasing a book and why I chose to self-publish. Here's what you'll learn in this episode: Why I chose... READ MORE The post [074] Three good reasons to self-publish your own book appeared first on Janet Murray.

Lou Mongello left his job as a lawyer, sold his house in New Jersey and moved to Florida, so he could share his passion for all things Disney. Yep, you read that right - he makes a living writing, talking and teaching people about Disney. In this episode he shares his remarkable business story and... READ MORE The post [073] How to build a brand people will fall in love with with Lou Mongello appeared first on Janet Murray.

Do you set goals for yourself you don’t deliver on? Are you good at starting projects but not so good at seeing them through to the end? Or do you procrastinate so much, you can’t get started at all? If you’ve answered ‘yes’ to any of these questions, you’ll love this podcast episode on how... READ MORE The post [072] How to stop talking about your goals and actually achieve them appeared first on Janet Murray.

Just three years ago, Petra Foster was utterly miserable. She was managing a hostel for teenage parents, and rapidly falling out of love with her job . Meanwhile, her husband was working crazy hours as a long-distance lorry driver. Nowadays, she has six figure business teaching people how to sell premium price services with ease and... READ MORE The post [071] How to have better sales conversations with Petra Foster appeared first on Janet Murray.

I've lost count of the number of people who've told me they feel intimidated by journalists. In fact, the thought of pitching an idea or giving an interview to a journalist can turn some perfectly confident people into a stammering mess. If this sounds like you, this podcast episode is full of practical ideas to help. Here’s what... READ MORE The post [070] How not to feel intimidated by journalists appeared first on Janet Murray.

Over the last eight months Angela Henderson has added over 2,700  people to her email list. What's her secret? A series of 30 day online challenges that have captured the imagination of her target audience (mainly mums of babies and toddlers) and helped build a strong sense of community. In this episode she shares her best... READ MORE The post [069] How to grow your email list through challenges with Angela Henderson appeared first on Janet Murray.

You wouldn't walk up to someone at a networking 'do' and immediately start selling them your products or services, would you? (at least I hope you wouldn't). Yet every day I see people joining Facebook groups (including my own) and the first thing they do is post an advert for their business (or ask if... READ MORE The post [068]Three non-spammy ways to promote your business in Facebook groups appeared first on Janet Murray.

Joanna Penn is a New York Times and USA Today bestselling thriller writer and non-fiction author who has sold over 450,000 books in 74 countries and 5 languages. She's also a speaker, podcaster and online course creator. In this episode she shares her advice on how to get your book idea out of your head and onto... READ MORE The post [067] How to write and publish your own non-fiction book with Joanna Penn appeared first on Janet Murray.

If you want to create great PR opportunities for your business, you need to develop your 'pitching muscle.' That means practising every single day: suggesting a story idea to a journalist,  pitching yourself as a podcast guest or putting yourself forward to speak at an event, for example. It doesn't really matter what you pitch; what's... READ MORE The post [066] How to develop your pitching muscle (and why you need to) appeared first on Janet Murray.

Health coaches Emma and Carla - aka the Merrymaker Sisters - have been featured in dozens of magazines and newspapers, and on radio and TV. What's their secret? They just ask. In this episode,  the Merrymaker Sisters share their tips and strategies for getting major media coverage for their business - without hiring a PR firm... READ MORE The post [065] How to use media coverage to grow your business with the Merrymaker Sisters appeared first on Janet Murray.

So you’ve pitched an idea to a newspaper, magazine or online publication and the editor has said ‘yes’. The trouble is, you’ve now got to write the bloomin’ thing. And it’s sent  you into full-on panic mode. Sound familiar? If so, you’re not alone. I’ve yet to meet anyone who doesn’t feel nervous about writing... READ MORE The post [064] Three writing hacks that will help you write stylish copy - fast appeared first on Janet Murray.